Home

Chapter 1 Basic Configuration Commands

1. Call Notify Release Complete E En 93 O 2 OO 20 0 Ei en CNS 0 0 GE 0 Kod KG A AS ER VO LO A A ER O O SE 3 E EN 3 SE DO A O O O OA O A OA O AA DO E IO EA CO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO CO CH E OF O CH O O O Sr O OF en Ov E O O O O ti EE E EE EE E KT ER E O A TEE OA E ER ER E DA E SE CH EN EN ER Er ER ER SS ET SE ER ER 7 Call Indication Refer 1 21 Command Manual Location Server Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Call Indication Release Call Indication Call Forward Connect Notify HeartBeat Connect Indication HeartBeat Call Query Admission Call Response Admission Call Notify BandWidth Change Call Indication BandWidth Change Invalid CAI Chapter 1 Location Server Commands CAI Distribute Message Statistics of LS CAI Distribute Message CAT Distribute Message between PS and RM CAI Distribute Message between PS and CM 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 total rcv send err dupr dups disc 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CAI Release 0 0 0 0 0 0 CAI Invalid ID 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CAI Distribute Message of LS 0 0 0 Table 1 4 Description on the fields of the display location server statistics command Field Description Register Query Device Query device information Register Response Device The LS returns the information of the queried device
2. interface number Number of the interface Command Manual Basic Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Basic Configuration Commands configuration Displays the specified configuration Is Displays the location server configuration system Displays the system configuration user interface Displays the configuration of the user interface Description Example Use the display current configuration command to view the current configuration of the XE IP PBX The currently configured parameters that are the same with the corresponding default parameters are not displayed You can use the display current configuration command to see if the configurations take effect Some configured parameters will not appear if the functions to which these parameters apply do not take effect Related command display saved configuration Display currently valid parameters of the XE IP PBX lt XE gt display current configuration 1 1 11 display diagnostic information Syntax display diagnostic information View Any view Parameter None Description Use the display diagnostic information command to display the operating information of all the active modules of the system and collect all the information at a time so as to isolate the problem when failure occurs to the system However it is rather difficult for you to collect all the information at a time as there are many display commands involved In this case you can use
3. 4 3 FTP Server Configuration Commands 4 3 1 display ftp server Syntax display ftp server View Any view Parameter None Description Use the display ftp server command to display the parameters of the current FTP server After setting FTP parameters use this command to display the configuration Example Display the configured parameters of FTP server lt XE gt display ftp server FTP server is running Max user number d User count 0 Timeout value in minute 30 Put Method fast The previous information indicates that the FTP server is started up and can support up to 1 logon users simultaneously Now there are no logon user the timeout of an FTP user is 30 minutes and the file is transmitted in fast mode 4 22 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 4 File Management Commands 4 3 2 display ftp user Syntax View Parameter display ftp user Any view None Description Example Use the display ftp user command to display the parameters of the current FTP user Display the FTP user parameter configuration XE dis ftp user UserName Host IP Port Idle HomeDir anchun 192 168 80 100 1029 2 flash backup The previous information indicates that a connection between an FTP user named anchun and the FTP server has been established The IP address of the remote host is 192 168 80 100 the remote port number is 1029 and the authorized directory is flash backup So far
4. Example Set the customized ringback tone whose media ID is 9998 for the call group named friend XE 1s gw gw01 1 1001 myring friend ring 9998 20 1 6 srv switch myring Syntax srv switch myring on off View Subscriber number view Parameter on Enables the MyRing service off Disables the MyRing service Description Use the srv switch myring command to enable or disable the MyRing service By default the MyRing service is disabled Example Enable the MyRing service for subscriber 1001 XE 1s gw gw01 1 1001 srv switch myring on Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 21 CPCP Service 21 1 CPCP Service Configuration Commands 21 1 1 srv switch cpcp Chapter 21 CPCP Service Syntax srv switch cpcp on off View LS GW PREFIX view Subscriber number view Parameter on Enables the CPCP call park call pickup service off Disables the CPCP service Description Use the srv switch cpcp command to enable or disable the CPCP service By default the CPCP service is disabled Example Enable the CPCP service XE 1s gw ual 0 1000 srv switch cpcp on Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 22 Automatic Operator Service Chapter 22 Automatic Operator Service 22 1 Automatic Operator Service Configuration Commands 22 1 1 auto operator Syntax auto operator number of auto operator undo auto operator number of auto operator all View LS
5. Syntax srv switch cb on off View Subscriber number view Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 15 Callback On Busy Service Parameter on Enables the callback on busy service off Disables the callback on busy service Description Use the srv switch cb command to enable or disable the callback on busy service By default the callback on busy service is disabled Example Enable the callback on busy service for subscriber 1001 XE 1s gw gw01 1 1001 srv switch cb on Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 16 Call Pickup Service Chapter 16 Call Pickup Service 16 1 Call Pickup Service Configuration Commands 16 1 1 srv switch cp Syntax srv switch cp on off View LS GW PREFIX view Subscriber number view Parameter on Enables the call pickup service off Disables the call pickup service Description Use the srv switch cp command to enable or disable the call pickup service By default the call pickup service is disabled Example Enable the call pickup service for subscriber 1001 XE 1s gw gw01 1 1001 srv switch cp on Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 17 Call Intervention Service Chapter 17 Call Intervention Service 17 1 Call Intervention Service Configuration Commands 17 1 1 srv switch ci Syntax srv switch ci on off View LS GW PREFIX view LS OG PREFIX view Subscriber number view Parameter on Ena
6. View Subscriber view Parameter table identifier Substitute table identifier 1 to 7 characters all Removes the binding of all substitute tables Description Use the substitute command to bind a substitute table to the subscriber line Use the undo substitute command to unbind the specified or all substitute tables from the subscriber line You can bind up to two substitute tables to a subscriber line By default no substitute table is bound Example Bind a substitute table named table1 to subscriber line 01 XE 1s gw gw01 subscriber 01 67689445 XE 1s gw gw01 01 67689445 substitute tablel 1 16 Command Manual Feature H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 2 Backup and Load Sharing Chapter 2 Backup and Load Sharing 2 1 Backup and Load Sharing Configuration Commands 2 1 1 load share Syntax load share disable enable undo load share View LS GW view Parameter enable Enables the backup and load sharing capabilities of the gateway disable Disables the backup and load sharing capabilities of the gateway Description Use the load share command to enable or disable the load sharing capability of the gateway Use the undo load share command to restore the default By default the load sharing capability of the gateway is disabled Note Even when the load sharing capability of a gateway is disabled with the load share disable command the gateway can affect the overall load sharing policy of the system Example E
7. q Displays the statistics only r Records routing S packetsize The size of ECHO REQUEST packet excluding IP and ICMP packet header in byte in the range of 20 to 8100 t timeout Timeout time of waiting for ECHO RESPONSE after sending ECHO REQUEST in milliseconds within the range of 0 to 65535 v Non ECHO RESPONSE ICMP packet received tos Sets the TOS value of the ECHO REQUEST packet 3 3 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 3 System Maintenance and Management Commands host Destination host field or IP address ip IP protocol used Description Example Use the ping command to check the connectivity with IP network and the reachability of the host The default settings of the above parameters are The number of times of sending ECHO REQUEST packet is 5 The mode of socket is non DEBUG The system determines whether the host is an IP address if not domain name resolution will be performed Pad the packet from 0x01 to 0x09 and then repeat Display all the information including statistics No route is recorded The size of the ECHO REQUEST packet is 56 bytes The timeout time for ECHO RESPONSE packet is 2000 ms Non ECHO RESPONSE ICMP packets are not displayed The ping process is a host sends ICMP ECHO REQUEST packet to destination If the connection works the destination host receives the ICMP ECHO REQUEST packet and responds to the source host with the ICMP ECHO
8. 2 3 Command Manual Basic Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 2 Ethernet Interface Configuration Commands Executing the interface command enables you to enter actual physical interface view and to create a logical interface as needed Note that you can use the undo interface command to delete the logical interfaces that you have created Example Enter Ethernet interface view from system view XE interface ethernet 0 0 XE Ethernet0 0 2 1 4 ip address Syntax ip address p address net mask undo ip address p address net mask View Interface view Parameter jjp address P address of an interface in dotted decimal notation net mask Subnet mask in dotted decimal notation Description Use the ip address command to set the IP address of an interface Use the undo ip address command to remove the IP address of an interface By default an interface has no IP address The IP addresses fall into five categories and you can choose an appropriate IP subnet according to you actual circumstance In addition all Os in the host portion of the address represent the network address and all 1s in the host portion of the address represents a broadcast address neither of which can be used as a general IP address The subnet mask is used to identify the network number of an IP address For example the IP address of a router Ethernet interface is 129 9 30 42 and the mask is 255 255 0 0 After perform
9. Description Use the tunnel command to enable disable NAT FW firewall tunnel traversal on current PS By default NAT FW tunnel traversal is disabled on a PS Example Enable NAT FW tunnel traversal on PSO XE 1s ps ps0 tunnel enable 2 1 7 tunnelpeer Syntax View tunnelpeer tunnelpeer id private private ps id private to public add port private to public port public public ps id public to private add port public to private port undo tunnelpeer tunnelpeer id all LS NAT amp FW view 2 4 Command Manual Location Server Configuration Chapter 2 NAT FW Tunnel Traversal Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Commands Parameter tunnelpeer id ID of the tunnel end pair to be created private ps id ID of the specified PS in the private network private to public add Destination address of the IP packets sourced from the PS in the private network and destined for the PS in the public network private to public port Destination port number of the IP packets sourced from the PS in the private network and destined for the PS in the public network public ps id ID of the specified PS in the public network public to private add Destination address of the IP packets sourced from the PS in the public network and destined for the PS in the private network Normally it is the public network IP address that the PS in the private network is mapped to on the NAT FW public to private port Destination port number
10. SM HSM CCB 0 1 1 1 4 display process server location server status Syntax display process server location server status View Any view Parameter None Description Use the display process server location server status command to display state information of the LS LS administering this PS Command Manual Process Server Configuraiton H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Process Server Example Display state information of the LS administering this PS XE display process server location server status Seege eebe Location Server Information Location Server index 0 Mode Local Connected Process Server xe200 PS HeartBeat Key xe200 Heartbeat Status Authorized 1 1 5 display process server statistics Syntax View Parameter display process server statistics adapter all bkm cdp cm csm hadpt hrm hsm hstack rm sm stack tucl Any view adapter Displays statistics about the adapter layer all Displays all statistics bkm Displays statistics about the BKM module cdp Displays statistics about the CDP module cm Displays statistics about the CM module csm Displays statistics about the CSM module hadpt Displays statistics about the H 323 adapter module hrm Displays statistics about the HRM module hsm Displays statistics about the HSM module hstack Displays statistics about the H 323 stack rm Displays statistics about the SIP RM module sm Displays s
11. Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Table of Contents Chapter 6 Abbreviated Dialing Configuration COMMANGAG c ccesecsseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeneeeees 6 1 6 1 Abbreviated Dialing Configuration Commande 6 1 6 1 1 adi abbreviated dialing service view 6 1 6 1 2 adi Subscriber number view 6 1 EN Ee VE el TEE 6 2 Chapter 7 Do Not Disturb Service Configuration COMMANAS cs ccsesseeeeeteeseeeeeeeeeneeeees 7 1 7 1 Do Not Disturb Service Configuration Commandes 7 1 ONS A navi putea enews Naa ea ee 7 1 Tike GO MOT GISTUPD EE 7 1 7 1 3 srv switch GO NOT GISTUID AA A nano nn cnn nano cnn rra A 7 2 Chapter 8 Calling Line Identification Configuration Commands ssseeneseseereeeeeeeenees 8 1 8 1 Calling Line Identification Configuration Commande 8 1 8 1 1 clir Subscriber NUMber view 8 1 Eeler Ee 8 1 8 1 3 SHV SWITCH CIID einai AA De aa A a aes 8 2 S21 Tee EE 8 2 8 O SIV SWIMT NEE 8 3 CT DEU geeiert aa EE 8 3 Chapter 9 Password Call Configuration COMMANGS csscesees cess eeeessenseeneeeneeseneeenenenenens 9 1 9 1 Password Call Configuration Commande 9 1 9 1 pwa calkpass Word iii ad Seder 9 1 9 1 2 Srv SWitCh PWC Call senese neiaint aA nono n cano cnn VAENE NNA aA A a NA 9 1 Chapter 10 Call Forwarding Configuration Commands ccccsecceeesseeeeeeseeeseeesneeeeenenees 10 1 10 1 CFU Configuration Commandes 10 1 rb fa te TEE 10 1 AA A RT 10 1 lu ENNER UE 10 2 10 2 CF
12. Call Services System Management System Management Feature Feature Feature System Management System Management System Management System Management System Management System Management System Management System Management System Management System Management System Management System Management Call Services System Management 1 14 4 13 4 18 1 17 3 22 1 18 2 3 4 18 4 19 3 22 3 24 1 12 7 3 7 4 7 5 Command Manual Appendix H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX set authentication password set media shell shutdown sip sip config sip port snmp agent snmp agent community snmp agent group snmp agent local engineid snmp agent mib view snmp agent packet max size snmp agent sys info snmp agent target host snmp agent trap enable snmp agent trap life snmp agent trap queue size snmp agent trap source snmp agent usm user speed speed srv switch srv switch adi srv switch alarm srv switch announce srv switch cb srv switch cba srv switch cfb srv switch cf caller srv switch cfnr srv switch cfo srv switch cft A 15 Appendix A Command Index System Management 1 13 Media Server 2 4 System Management 1 14 Call Services 23 7 Process Server Configuration 1 16 Process Server Configuration 1 16 Feature 2 5 System Management 6 7 System Management 6 8 System Management 6 9 System Management 6 10 System Management 6 11 System Management 6 11 System Management 6 12 System Management 6
13. Command Manual Process Server Configuraiton H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Process Server Example Enable the long time call interruption function XE ps policy call interrupt by long time enable 1 1 13 policy call interrupt time Syntax policy call interrupt time call interrupt time undo policy call interrupt time View PS view Parameter call interrupt time The timeout interval for the long time call interruption ranging from 1440 to 14400 seconds The timeout interval defaults to 2880 seconds Description Use the policy call interrupt time command to set the timeout interval for the long time call interruption If the call interrupt time expires the conversation will stop Use the undo policy call interrupt time command to restore the default timeout interval By default the timeout interval for the long time call interruption is 2880 minutes Example Configure the timeout interval to 1440 minutes XE ps policy call interrupt time 1440 1 1 14 ps config Syntax ps config identifier interface interface type interface number undo ps config View PS view Parameter identifier Identifier of the PS interface type Interface type 1 13 Command Manual Process Server Configuraiton H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Process Server interface number Interface number Description Use the ps config command to configure the basic information about the process server Use the undo ps config command t
14. Example Use the undo tracecall command to disable call tracing By default the related debugging information at levels 1 through 7 is printed LX Note Before using the tracecall command turn on the debugging information output display switch with the terminal debugging command and the terminal monitor command ft Trace the calls related to number 4000 lt XE gt terminal debugging lt XE gt terminal monitor lt XE gt system view XE process server XE ps tracecall 4000 0 1234730 XE2000 XE 8 XEngine HSM gt lt Handle 0 gt lt Informational gt lt 2005 05 13 09 05 51 gt gt HSMGetCMIndex After receive LRO or caller ARQ HSM allocate new CM CR File ps_hsm_core c 1235 1 22 Location Server Configuration Command Manual Location Server Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Table of Contents Table of Contents Chapter 1 Location Server COMMANdOS cccsccccssceseeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeneeeeeesaeseseeeenseeeeeeeeeseeseseeneneeees 1 1 1 1 Location Server Commande 1 1 1 1 1 authentication LS GW view ccccccceeesee cee ee cee eeeaeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaaeseeeeeseaeeesaeeneneeee 1 1 1 1 2 bearer capability LS GW view 1 1 1 1 3 bearer capability LS OFFICEGROUP OFFICE view 1 2 114 Call2MOde iia Aisa te ee Aes AA oie ca rh inate 1 2 Jet ale el EE iio tiertd alt ite dieta 1 3 1 1 0 CallESIONAl PO iii a A ae a a lee A eed dG 1 4 1 1 7 codec LS GW PREFIX view 1 5 1 1 8 codec
15. Syntax pwd View FTP client view Parameter None Description Use the pwd command to display the operating directory on the remote FTP server Example Display the operating directory on the remote FTP server ftp pwd d temp is current directory 4 4 20 quit Syntax quit View FTP client view Parameter None Description Use the quit command to terminate the connection to the remote FTP server and return to user view Example Terminate the connection to the remote FTP server and return to user view ftp quit lt XE gt 4 37 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 4 File Management Commands 4 4 21 remotehelp Syntax remotehelp protocol command View FTP client view Parameter protocol command FTP protocol command Description Use the remotehelp command to display the help of the FTP protocol command Example Display the syntax of the protocol command user ftp remotehelp user 214 Syntax USER lt sp gt lt username gt 4 4 22 rmdir Syntax rmdir pathname View FTP client view Parameter pathname Name of the directory on the remote FTP server Description Use the rmdir command to delete a specified directory on the FTP server Example Delete the directory d temp1 on the remote FTP server ftp rmdir d temp1 4 4 23 user Syntax user username password Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 4 File Management Commands Vi
16. Syntax send number all type name number View User view Parameter all Sends messages to all user interfaces type name Type of user interface number Absolute Relative user interface number 1 12 Command Manual System Management Chapter 1 Terminal Service and User Interface H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Configuration Commands Description Example Use the send command to transfer messages between user interfaces Use the send all command to send messages to all user interfaces Use the send number command to send messages to the user interface specified by the number argument Use the send type name number command to send messages to the user interface specified by the type name and number arguments Send messages to a user interface of the console type lt XE gt send con 0 Enter message end with CTRL Z or Enter abort with CTRL C Hello good morning Send message Y N y 1 1 19 set authentication password Syntax set authentication password simple cipher password undo set authentication password View User interface view Parameter simple Plain text password cipher Encrypted password password If the password format is set to simple the parameter password must be in plain text if it is set to cipher the password can be either in cipher text or in plain text depending on what has been input A plain text password can be a string of no more than 16 consecutive characters 1234567 for examp
17. System Management Media Server System Management System Management System Management System Management System Management Process Server Configuration Location Server Configuration System Management Process Server Configuration Call Services Call Services System Management System Management Basic Configuration Process Server Configuration Media Server Media Server Location Server 4 8 22 1 4 8 1 5 4 5 23 4 4 9 2 2 1 6 4 33 4 23 4 24 4 24 1 25 4 33 23 5 23 4 2 1 2 1 1 9 1 3 3 1 1 26 Command Manual Appendix H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX heartbeat time range history command max size hotkey idle timeout info center channel info center console channel info center enable info center logbuffer info center loghost info center loghost source info center monitor channel info center snmp channel info center source info center timestamp info center trapbuffer interface interval LS SRV CB view ip address ip host ip route static ip address LS GW view ip address LS OFFICEGROUP OFFICE view irr frequency J join K A 9 Appendix A Command Index Configuration Location Server Configuration System Management Basic Configuration System Management System Management System Management System Management System Management System Management System Management System Management System Management System Management System Management System Manag
18. XE 1s gw gw001 bearer capability audio 1 1 3 bearer capability LS OFFICEGROUP OFFICE view Syntax bearer capability audio video undo bearer capability View LS OFFICEGROUP OFFICE view Parameter audio Specifies audio type only video Specifies video and audio types Description Use the bearer capability command to specify the bearer capability type for the office device that is to specify the service type bearer capability type supported in the Q 931 header of setup messages sent to the terminating side By default the video type is adopted Example Specify the bearer capability type for the office device to audio XE ls og og01 of01 bearer capability audio 1 1 4 call mode Syntax call mode h323 sip redirect routed undo call mode h323 sip Command Manual Location Server Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Location Server Commands View Parameter LS view h323 Sets the call mode to H 323 sip Sets the call mode to SIP redirect Sets the call mode of LS to redirect routed Sets the call mode of LS to routed Description Example Use the call mode command to set the call mode of LS Use the undo call mode command to restore the default setting By default routed mode is adopted for both H 323 and SIP Set the LS to work in redirect mode XE ls call mode h323 redirect XE ls call mode sip redirect 1 1 5 call signal ip address Syntax View
19. XE Ethernet0 0 loopback 2 5 Command Manual Basic Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 2 Ethernet Interface Configuration Commands 2 1 6 mtu Ethernet Gigabitethernet Interface Syntax mtu size undo mtu View Ethernet interface view Parameter size MTU size of the Ethernet interface in bytes The value is in the range of 46 to 1500 for Ethernet_ll frames and 46 to 16384 for Gigabit Ethernet frames Description Use the mtu command to set the MTU for an Ethernet interface Use the undo mtu command to restore the default or 1500 bytes The setting of MTU affects fragmentation and reassembly of IP packets on the Ethernet interface After you change MTU of the interface using the mtu command you need to execute the commands shutdown and undo shutdown on the interface to have the new MTU take effect Related command display interface Example Set the MTU of FE interface 1 0 to 1492 XE Ethernet0 0 mtu 1492 2 1 7 promiscuous Syntax promiscuous undo promiscuous View Ethernet interface view Parameter None Description Use the promiscuous command to enable the Ethernet interface to operate in the 2 6 Command Manual Basic Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 2 Ethernet Interface Configuration Commands promiscuous mode Use the undo promiscuous command to disable the Ethernet interface from operating in the promiscuous mode By default the Ethernet interface operates
20. can be any character in the following set 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 a b C d e f 9 h i j k l m n O DO r S t uU V W X y Z B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R SE U V W X Y Z Separator all Deletes all license stings Description Use the xe license command to add service of a license to the current service data Up to 128 licenses can be added If continuous ten invalid licenses are inputted the system will forbid any license input unless you restart it Use the undo xe license command to delete the service of an added license from the service data or to delete all service data Example Add service in the license string 123456 899909 123456 789456 369852 258147 to the current service data XE xe license 123456 899909 123456 789456 369852 258147 8 1 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 8 License Management Commands 8 1 2 display xe service Syntax View Parameter display xe service Any view None Description Example Use the display xe service command to display all services loaded on the XE IP PBX Display all services loaded on the XE IP PBX XE ls display xe service Current supported service by XEngine ID Service Name Status Table 8 1 Description on the fields of the display xe service command Item Description ID Service ID Service Name Service name Status Service status 8 2
21. completing the functions of SNMP messages such as message dispatching message processing security authentication and access control Example Display the engine ID of the local device lt XE gt display snmp agent local engineid SNMP local EngineID 000007DB7F0000013859 Here SNMP local EnginelD indicates the engine ID of the local SNMP entity 6 1 3 display snmp agent community Syntax display snmp agent community read write View Any view Parameter read Displays information of the community with the read only authority write Displays the information of the community with the read and write authorities Description Use the display snmp agent community command to display the current community information of SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c Example Display the current community information lt XE gt display snmp agent community 6 2 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 6 SNMP Configuration Commands 6 1 4 display snmp agent group Syntax display snmp agent group group name View Any view Parameter group name Specifies the group name of the SNMP information to be displayed ranging from 1 to 32 characters Description Use the display snmp agent group command to display the USM based group information Without any parameter the command displays the group information of all the specified group names including group name security mode and storage type Example Display the
22. device status LS GW view Configuration 1 11 Location Server device status LS OFFICEGROUP OFFICE view Configuration 1 12 Location Server device status forever up attachedps Configuration 2 2 Location Server device type LS GW view Configuration 1 13 Location Server device type LS OFFICEGROUP OFFICE view Configuration 1 13 dial test Call Services 18 1 dir System Management 4 7 dir System Management 4 32 disconnect System Management 4 32 IP Performance and display arp Application 2 2 A 4 Command Manual Appendix H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX display channel display clipboard display clock display command alias display cpu usage for user display current configuration display current configuration display debugging display debugging location server display debugging process server display device manuinfo display diagnostic information display diagnostic information display fib display fib begin display fib longer display fib statistics display ftp server display ftp user display gui user display history command display info center display interface ethernet display ip interface display ip interface display ip routing table display ip socket display ip statistics A 5 Appendix A Command Index System Management 3 7 Basic Configuration 1 7 Basic Configuration 1 7 Basic Configuration 1 8 Basic Configuration 1 8 Basic Configuration 1 9 System Management 4 14 System Management 3 2 Lo
23. display media server media resource predefine display overload display process server call information display process server location server status display process server statistics display saved configuration display saved configuration A 6 Appendix A Command Index Call Services Call Services Call Services Call Services Call Services Location Server Configuration Location Server Configuration Media Server Call Services Call Services Feature Location Server Configuration Location Server Configuration Location Server Configuration Call Services Call Services Feature Location Server Configuration System Management Media Server Media Server Media Server Feature Process Server Configuration Process Server Configuration Process Server Configuration Basic Configuration System Management 14 1 1 21 5 1 5 2 1 23 3 9 2 1 2 1 3 1 Command Manual Appendix H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX display schedule reboot display snmp agent display snmp agent community display snmp agent group display snmp agent mib view display snmp agent statistics display snmp agent sys info display snmp agent usm user display startup display subscriber display tcp statistics display tcp status display tcp status display this display this display trapbuffer display udp statistics display user interface display users display version display xe service dnd domain do
24. start return 4 2 2 display saved configuration Syntax display saved configuration View Any view Parameter None Description Use display saved configuration command to display the saved configuration of the XE IP PBX that is the configuration of the XE IP PBX for the next boot Related command save reset saved configuration display current configuration Example Display the configuration file of XE IP PBX in storage device lt XE gt display saved configuration sysname XE tcp window 8 undo multicast igmp all enable interface Aust link protocol ppp interface Ethernet0 0 0 interface NULLO user interface con 0 user interface aux 0 user interface vty 0 4 4 16 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX return 4 2 3 display startup Syntax display startup View Any view Parameter None Description Chapter 4 File Management Commands Use the display startup command to display the configuration file used for startup Example Display the configuration file used for startup lt XE gt display startup Startup saved configuration file Next startup saved configuration file 4 2 4 display this Syntax display this View Any view Parameter None Description flash config cfg flash xhy cfg Use the display this command to display the current configuration of the current view Example Display the current configuration of
25. to the SNMP group Johngroup with the security level of requiring authentication the specified authentication protocol as HMAC MD5 96 and the password as hello Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 6 SNMP Configuration Commands XE snmp agent usm user v3 John Johngroup authentication mode md5 hello 6 19 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 7 Modem Management Configuration Commands Chapter 7 Modem Management Configuration Commands 7 1 Modem Management Configuration Commands 7 1 1 debugging modem Syntax debugging modem View User view Parameter None Description Use the debugging modem command to enable debugging for the Modem Through the output of this command you can check whether a proper Modem script is specified for a particular event Example None 7 1 2 modem Syntax modem both call in undo modem both call in View User interface view Parameter both Specifies both incoming and outgoing calls of the Modem call in Specifies only incoming calls of the Modem 7 1 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 7 Modem Management Configuration Commands Description Example Use the modem command to allow only incoming calls or both incoming and outgoing calls of the Modem Use the undo modem command to inhibit incoming calls and outgoing calls of the Modem By default both incoming and
26. users of different levels can only run the commands with the same or lower level after login 1 19 Command Manual Basic Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Basic Configuration Commands Example The four levels of command are visit monitor system and manage which are described as follows Visit level The commands of network diagnostic tool such as ping and tracert and the commands sent out to access other devices such as telnet rlogin Commands of this level do not allow you to save configuration files Monitor level The commands used for system maintenance and service troubleshooting including display and debugging Commands of this level do not allow you to save configuration files System level The commands of service configuration including commands of routing and of each network layer The commands provide users with direct network services Manage level The commands related to basic operation and system supporting module including commands of file system FTP TFTP downloading via XMODEM and switching configuration file power control backplane controlling user management level setting internal parameter setting non protocol specification or RFC specification and so on To prevent unauthorized access the system requires a password of a higher level to be entered to authenticate the user when switching from a lower level to a higher level in case super password level user level si
27. which you can monitor a TCP connection at any time Related command display local user Example Display the TCP connection status XE ps display tcp status TCPCB Local Add port Foreign Add port State 23a4ae04 192 168 80 50 2452 192 168 80 50 13579 Established 239 de44 192 168 80 50 13579 0 0 0 0 0 Listening 23a47404 192 168 80 50 13579 192 168 80 50 2451 Time_Wait The output indicates that one TCP connection is set up where the TCP control block number is 23a4ae04 the local IP address is 192 168 80 50 the local port is 2452 the remote IP address is 192 168 80 50 and the remote port is 13579 1 1 15 display udp statistics Syntax display udp statistics View Any view Parameter None Description Use the display udp statistics command to display UDP traffic statistics This command displays traffic statistics of all current UDP connections Statistics is composed of two parts the sending part and the receiving part Each part can be divided into different types of packets such as checking packets error packets and so on The command can also display statistics information closely related to the connection such as the number of broadcast packets and so on The information is counted in packets Related command reset udp statistics 1 15 Command Manual IP Performance and Application H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 IP Performance Configuration Commands Example Display UDP traffic statistics
28. 0 lt XE gt debugging ip icmp Command Manual IP Performance and Application H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 IP Performance Configuration Commands PING 192 168 80 30 56 data bytes press CTRL_C to break 0 13372110 XE2000 IP 8 debug_icmp ICMP Send echo Type 8 Code 0 Dst 192 168 80 30 Reply from 192 168 80 30 bytes 56 Sequence 1 tt1 255 time 1 ms 0 13372110 XE2000 IP 8 debug_icmp ICMP Receive echo reply Type 0 Code 0 Src 192 168 80 30 Dst 192 168 80 50 1 1 2 debugging tcp event Syntax debugging tcp event task_id socket_id undo debugging tcp event task_id socket_id View User view Parameter task_id Task ID socket_id Socket ID Description Use the debugging tcp event command to enable TCP event debugging Use the undo debugging tcp event command to disable TCP event debugging When executing this command to enable the debugging the number of debugging you can enable is limited that is you can enable debugging of fixed number the combination of task ID and socket ID at one time besides a new socket will be created to establish connection if TCP is passively opened or receives connection request and some applications such as Telnet server will create a new task to process the connection So you must not use parameters task_id and socket_id if you want to get information on connection establishment Example Enable TCP event debugging lt XE gt debugging tcp event 0 13467370 X
29. 0 0 to the end of the buffer lt XE gt display fib begin 169 254 0 0 Destination Mask Nexthop Flag TimeStamp Interface 169 254 0 0 16 Zola Ll U t 0 Ethernet1 0 2 0 0 0 16 2 25164 U t 0 Ethernet1 0 127 0 0 0 8 ZOOL U t 0 InLoopBack0O Display all lines containing the string Etherneto lt XE gt display fib include Ethernet1 0 Destination Mask Nexthop Flag TimeStamp Interface 169 254 0 0 16 Dl DeL U t 0 Ethernet1 0 2 0 0 0 16 Dae eels 0 t 0 Ethernet1 0 Display all lines that do not contain the string 169 254 0 0 lt XE gt display fib exclude 169 254 0 0 Destination Mask Nexthop Flag TimeStamp Interface 2 0 0 0 16 Ss I U t 0 Ethernet1 0 127 0 0 0 8 SC RRE U t 0 InLoopBack0O 1 6 Command Manual IP Performance and Application H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 IP Performance Configuration Commands 1 1 8 display fib longer Syntax display fib dest addr1 dest mask1 longer display fibdest addr1 dest mask1 dest addr2 dest mask2 View Any view Parameter dest addr1 Destination IP address 1 in dotted decimal notation dest mask1 Subnet mask of dest addr1 in dotted decimal notation or an integer representing the length of the subnet mask dest addr2 Destination IP address 2 in dotted decimal notation dest mask2 Subnet mask of dest addr2 in dotted decimal notation or an integer representing the length of the subnet mask Description For this command how the FIB table entries will be
30. 1 29 1 1 32 multiplex LS GW view 1 30 1 1 33 multiplex LS OFFICEGROUP OFFICE view 1 30 1 1 34 multiplex LS PS view 1 31 OC a eat e eer cd ld 1 31 AL A A EE 1 32 Command Manual Location Server Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Table of Contents ES A ee hs Ae ea 1 33 1 1 38 password LS GW view 1 33 1 1 39 policy random selechon nn 1 34 11 40 policy select ruleian tint na eee at et hee 1 34 1 1 41 policy upknown device acdmieslon nenn 1 35 1 1 42 port LS GW view 1 36 1 1 43 port LS OFFICEGROUP OFFICE view 1 36 11 44 prefix ESCW VIEW iria aa bad 1 37 1 1 45 prefix LS OFFICEGROUP view 1 38 1 1 46 priority LS GW view 1 38 1 1 47 priority LS OFFICEGROUP OFFICE view 1 39 1 1 48 priority prefix view 1 39 1 1 49 priority subscriber view 1 40 11 50 process Soor i a EE AEA oni 1 41 1 1 51 reset location server statistics eccccecseeeeeeeceeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeaeeseeeeesaeeesaeeeeaeeeeaees 1 41 A EE 1 42 11253 StOp EE 1 42 L t Eo el ngle A A Roa 1 43 1 1 55 transport LS GW view 1 44 1 1 56 transport LS OFFICEGROUP OFFICE view 1 44 AD Ml AE 1 45 Chapter 2 NAT FW Tunnel Traversal Configuration Commande ccccccccnnnnnnncncnnnnennnnnnnncnnnnannos 2 1 2 1 NAT FW Tunnel Traversal Configuration Commandes 2 1 CAS e EE 2 1 21 2 OLOMOUC A ade 2 1 2 1 3 device status forever Up attachedps oococonccconoccconocanonccccnnnnnnoncnnnn cn nann nana nann cnn 2 2 NON 2 2 EN EE 2 3
31. 13 System Management 6 14 System Management 6 15 System Management 6 16 System Management 6 17 System Management 6 17 Basic Configuration 2 7 System Management 1 15 Call Services 1 1 Call Services 6 2 Call Services 26 2 Call Services 19 1 Call Services 15 2 Call Services 5 3 Call Services 10 10 Call Services 10 5 Call Services 10 3 Call Services 10 8 Call Services 10 7 Command Manual Appendix H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX srv switch cfu srv switch ci srv switch clip srv switch clir srv switch cp srv switch cpcp srv switch ct srv switch do not disturb srv switch group limited call srv switch limited time call srv switch myring srv switch pwd call srv switch query self srv switch rio srv switch tcir sscb manage sscb rule Subscriber view start start start start start start PS view start PS GK view start PS SIP view start script startup saved configuration stop stop stop stop A 16 Appendix A Command Index Call Services Call Services Call Services Call Services Call Services Call Services Call Services Call Services Call Services Call Services Call Services Call Services Call Services Call Services Call Services Call Services Feature Call Services Location Server Configuration Feature System Management Media Server Process Server Configuration Process Server Configuration Process Server Configuration System Management System Management Lo
32. 13 Time Limit Call Configuration Command ssecceseeeeseeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeseneeeneneeeeees 13 1 13 1 Time Limit Call Configuration Commands ooonccccnccnnnnicnnocinnncccnonnno nana nn canon rana 13 1 13 1 T deta ltlimit cal timnme mdi aene eegene lt ethene ete 13 1 13 1 2 UIMItO0O CAl tIMO EE 13 1 13 1 3 Imtted me call 13 2 13 1 4 srv switch limited time Call oo ee cece ee eeeeee ee eeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaes 13 2 Chapter 14 Third Party Call Control Service ccsecceeeeseeeeeseeeeneeeeeeneeeseaeeeneeeeseeeseseaeensneeeeees 14 1 14 1 Third Party Call Control Service Configuration Commands oooonccccncccnonccononnnanancnanccnnns 14 1 TAM A aa e e e aa utaa 14 1 14 1 2 display location Server 20 14 1 ERA Meee als nde neal eed eedaddiee Weave 14 2 Chapter 15 Callback On BuSy Service cccsccsssceeseeeeeeeeesseeseseeeeneneesseaesaseeenseeeseeeseseaesasneeenees 15 1 15 1 Callback On Busy Service Configuration Commande 15 1 Ra CO ET E 15 1 15 1 2 interval LS SRV CB view 15 1 15 1 3 retry LS SRV CB view 15 2 15 14 SIV SWIlCh Re E 15 2 Chapter 16 Call Pickup ServiCe cccssecceseeeseseeeseeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeaeseseeeenseeeseeseseaesaseeeseeeeseseaeseseeeeeees 16 1 16 1 Call Pickup Service Configuration Commande occconcccnocinoncccnonnnnnoncnann cnn non nano nnnana carne 16 1 IB CDi A a ran 16 1 Chapter 17 Call Intervention ServiCe cccescccsseesseeeeeeeeeseeeseseeeeneeeeese
33. 3 2 member Call Services 23 6 A 10 Command Manual Appendix H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Appendix A Command Index mkdir System Management 4 10 mkdir System Management 4 35 modem System Management 1 9 modem System Management 7 1 modem auto answer System Management 1 9 modem auto answer System Management 7 2 modem timer answer System Management 1 10 more System Management 4 10 move System Management 4 11 ms config Media Server 1 5 IP Performance and mtu Application 1 16 mtu Ethernet Gigabitethernet Interface Basic Configuration 2 6 Location Server multiplex LS GW view Configuration 1 30 Location Server multiplex LS OFFICEGROUP OFFICE view Configuration 1 30 Location Server multiplex LS PS view Configuration 1 31 myring Call Services 20 3 N Location Server nat amp fw Configuration 2 3 notify config Call Services 23 7 number substitute Feature 1 5 O Location Server office Configuration 1 31 Location Server office group Configuration 1 32 only Call Services 12 1 open System Management 4 35 Location Server otapc Configuration 1 33 overload protection Feature 3 2 A 11 Command Manual Appendix H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Appendix A Command Index P parity System Management 1 10 participant Call Services 14 2 passive System Management 4 36 Location Server password LS GW view Configuration 1 33 ping System Management 3 3 policy area code substitute Feature 1 6 Process Server policy call interrupt by long time
34. CFU service XE 1s gw gw01 1 1001 srv switch cfu on 10 2 CFNR Configuration Commands 10 2 1 cfnr Syntax cfnr View Subscriber number view Parameter None Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 10 Call Forwarding Configuration Commands Description Use the cfnr command to enter call forwarding no reply CFNR service view Example Enter CFNR service view XE 1s gw gw01 1 1001 cfnr XE 1s gw gw01 1 1001 cfnr 10 2 2 cfnr number Syntax cfnr number forward number undo cfnr number forward number all View CFNR service view Parameter forward number Target CFNR number which consists of up to 31 characters which can be digits from 0 to 9 letters A B C and D and signs and all Removes all target CFNR numbers Description Use the cfnr number command to add target CFNR numbers Up to 2 target CFNR numbers can be added Use the undo cfnr number command to remove specified or all target CFNR numbers Example Add target CFNR number 8888 XE 1s gw gw01 1 1001 cfnr cfnr number 8888 10 2 3 srv switch cfnr Syntax srv switch cfnr on off View Subscriber number view Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 10 Call Forwarding Configuration Commands Parameter on Enables CFNR service off Disables CFNR service Description Use the srv switch cfnr command to enable or disable CFNR service By default CFNR service is enabled Ex
35. Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 7 Modem Management Configuration Commands Els Description character p t Represents the tabulation Tab character Represents the backslash character T Represents telephone number Example XE script string example AT OK ATS0 1 OK 7 1 10 start script Syntax start script script name number View User view Parameter script name Name of a script in the script set number Number of the interface on which the script is run Description Use the start script command to execute a specific script You can use this command to immediately execute a Modem script But if there is already a script running on the interface the system will not execute this command and will report an error Related command script string Example Execute the Modem script example on interface 1 lt XE gt start script example 1 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 8 License Management Commands Chapter 8 License Management Commands 8 1 License Management Commands 8 1 1 xe license Syntax xe license siring undo xe license string all View System view Parameter string The license string that contains 36 valid characters divided into six groups by separators Each group consists of six bits forming the sting in the format of XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX Where each x is a valid character and
36. Commande cee nono rn 2 1 Lap Slide a Aa ate a a 2 1 2 1 2 debugging arp pa cket AA 2 2 E EE as ieeabensbbdkvts ipdeed aa a a 2 2 2 1 4 display ip Interface inicia dd Fed veins 2 3 LOPNA tias 2 4 A EE 2 5 Command Manual IP Performance and Application H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 IP Performance Configuration Commands Chapter 1 IP Performance Configuration Commands 1 1 IP Performance Configuration Commands 1 1 1 debugging ip Syntax debugging ip icmp packet error undo debugging ip icmp packet error View User view Parameter icmp ICMP debugging packet IP connection debugging error Error information debugging Description Use the debugging ip icmp command to enable ICMP debugging Use the undo debugging ip icmp command to disable ICMP debugging Use the debugging ip packet command to enable IP connection debugging Use the undo debugging ip packet command to disable IP connection debugging Use the debugging ip error command to enable error information debugging Use the undo debugging ip error command to disable error information debugging Example Enable IP connection debugging lt XE gt debugging ip packet 0 13259300 XE2000 IP 8 debug_case Receiving interface GigabitEthernet0 0 version 4 headlen 20 tos 0 pktlen 84 pktid 3670 offset 0 ttl 255 protocol 1 checksum 35761 s 192 168 80 30 d 192 168 80 50 prompt Receiving IP packet from GigabitEthernet0
37. HeartBeat The PS sends periodical heartbeat message to the LS Connect Indication HeartBeat The LS sends periodical heartbeat message to the PS Call Query Admission Admission of the called party Call Response Admission Response to the admission of the called party Call Notify BandWidth Change Notification of the bandwidth change request Call Indication BandWidth Change Indication of the bandwidth change request 1 1 23 display location server tunnelpeer Syntax display location server tunnelpeer tunnelpeer id all View Any view Parameter tunnelpeer id ID of the tunnel end pair whose information is to be displayed All Displays information about all tunnel end pairs Description Use the display location server tunnelpeer command to display the information about one or all tunnel end pairs that is one or all pairs of PSs on an LS Example Display the information about all tunnel end pairs XE ls display location server tunnelpeer all SSeS AANA TunnelPeer information MX 1 23 Command Manual Location Server Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Location Server Commands Tunnelpeer Identifier tunnel01 current state initial Private Domain Process Server Information belongto domain PrivateDomain map to firewall IP e ee red KE map to firewall port 9600 Public Domain Process Server Information belongto domain Publ
38. IP Performance and Application Command Manual IP Performance and Application H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Table of Contents Table of Contents Chapter 1 IP Performance Configuration COMMANAS occcccncnnnconcnnonenonnnnnnnnrnnncr career rn 1 1 1 1 IP Performance Configuration Commande oooonccccncccnonicononanonccononcn naar nora rca rn 1 1 TAS NS Aa E tae 1 1 1 1 2 debugging tep EVO cooncccccnonococononcconnnonccnnn noc 1 2 1 1 3 AODUQGING dC MOD ec datada dnd 1 3 1 1 4 debugging keete le 1 4 121 5 debugging UdP PACk E 1 4 LALO display T iaa Geese a ie A Bai aia idid Ae Deeds 1 5 147 display Ab ge GE 1 6 1 1 8 display fib longer oonoconcncinnccnnnnccnnccnncccnonccncnrccnn nro crac 1 7 119 display fib statistiese kan cdi ida eee tien ae he 1 8 1 1 10 display ip interface AA 1 8 1 11 display ip Socko niana eeni aR Lavbadah inane caaee ddl MEEA 1 11 11 12 EE le E EE 1 12 US Seele RE Ee 1 13 1 1 14 display tep Status mii dde tds 1 14 1 1 15 display Udp Statistics AA 1 15 Neel OSU a Auster tele eat cetveran da 1 16 kid reset RE Ee te te ae te ti ti he 1 17 1 1 18 reset tep Statistics coccion iii ieee det qed avenge eee avidin 1 17 EE KR ele statistics iii iii 1 18 JSL TCP IMSS a iii Ii ees 1 18 11 21 tcp TIMER ln TTT 1 19 1 1 22 tcp timer syn imeut siii canon 1 19 11 23 CO WIN EE 1 20 Chapter 2 IP Application Configuration Commands ccssecceseeeeeseeesseeeeseeeenseeeseseeeesneneneeees 2 1 2 1 IP Application Configuration
39. Installation features installation configuration Manual maintenance and troubleshooting involved in the XE series It presents the functional features H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Operation operating fundamentals and Manual configuration guide involved in the XE 200 2000 It introduces the graphic user interface and the operation through the XE 200 2000 H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX G Remote User Manual Organization H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Command Manual is organized as follows Chapter Contents 1 Basic Configuration Describes the commands involved in basic configuration interface configuration and static route configuration 2 Process Server Configuration Describes the commands involved in the configuration on H 323 GateKeeper and SIP Server 3 Location Server Configuration Describes the commands involved in Location Server configuration 4 Feature Describes the commands involved in the unique functions and features that the IP PBX provides 5 System Management Describes the commands involved in terminal service and user interface configuration system maintenance and management file management user management as well as SNMP configuration Chapter Contents 6 IP Performance and Application Describes the commands involved in the configuration on static routes RIP OSPF BGP MBGP IGMP PIM MSDP and routing policies 7 Media Server Describes the comman
40. LS GW SUBSCRIBER view 1 6 ACI codec LS GW EE 1 7 1 1 10 codec LS OFFICEGROUP OFFICE view 1 8 1 1 11 codec LS OFFICEGROUP PREFIX view 1 9 1 1 12 debugging ocaton server 1 10 1 1 13 device status LS GW view 1 11 1 1 14 device status LS OFFICEGROUP OFFICE view 1 12 1 1 15 device type LS GW view 200 eececeeeceee eect eeeeee tenets seaeeeeaaeseeaeeseeeetaeeesaeenenes 1 13 1 1 16 device type LS OFFICEGROUP OFFICE view 1 13 1 1 17 display debugging ocaton server cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaees 1 14 1 1 18 display location server domaine 1 14 1 1 19 display location server gateway oocoocinnccccnnnococcnnnoncccnnnonccnnnnrrc cnn cc rr 1 15 1 1 20 display location server office group cseeeceeeeeseeeeeeeaeeeeaeeseeeeesaeeesaaeeeeneeseaees 1 18 1 1 21 display location server process Server cooiniccccnnnoccconononcccnnnanccnnn nc cnn rra 1 19 1 1 22 display location server staiteice eese eeneee ette nt teen tnn ntn reen nnen nenn nnn 1 21 1 1 23 display location server tunnelpeer oooonnncccnnnonicinononccnnononccnnnnarncn nn cc cnn 1 23 NB Ne NAM A ed e a ed 1 25 11 25 92 Way LS MEW AA tian A aie 1 25 1 1 26 heartbeat password LS PS view 1 26 1 1 27 heartbeat time range cieee aR E EEEE ARRE ES EA ARRERA EK 1 27 1 1 28 ip address LS GW view 1 27 1 1 29 ip address LS OFFICEGROUP OFFICE view ssssesssessseessressresrrrssrsssrnssrnses 1 28 SN Lut WEE 1 28 IS Ch WEI te EE
41. LS is 10 1 5 6 XE ms 1s mode remote ip address 10 1 5 6 1 1 6 media server Syntax media server View System view Parameter None Command Manual Media Server H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 MS Configuration Commands Description Use the media server command to enter MS view Example Enter MS view XE media server XE ms 1 1 7 ms config Syntax ms config ms id interface interface type interface number undo ms config View MS view Parameter ms id 1D of the MS 32 character string length limitation interface type Type of the interface used by the MS interface number Number of the interface used by the MS Description Use the ms config command to configure the basic information of the MS Use the undo ms config command to delete the basic information of the MS By default the MS ID is MS Example Configure the MS ID to ms1 h8c and configure the MS interface to GigabitEthernet0 0 XE ms ms config msl h3c interface GigabitEthernet 0 0 1 1 8 start Syntax start View MS view Command Manual Media Server H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Parameter None Description Use the start command to start the MS Example Start the MS XE ms start 1 1 9 stop Syntax stop View MS view Parameter None Description Use the stop command to stop the MS Example Stop the MS XE ms stop Chapter 1 MS Configuration Commands Command Manual Media Server H3C XE 200 2000 IP PB
42. Length Discards 0 50 0 Protocol queue Size Length Discards 0 500 0 FIFO queuing Size Length Discards 0 75 0 seconds input rate 0 00 bytes sec 0 00 packets sec seconds output rate 0 00 bytes sec 0 00 packets sec packets 0 bytes 0 buffers broadcasts 0 multicasts 0 pauses errors 0 runts D giants crc 0 align errors 0 overruns dribbles 0 drops 0 no buffers packets 0 bytes 0 buffers broadcasts 0 multicasts 0 pauses errors 0 underruns 0 collisions deferred 0 lost carriers duplex full half negotiation undo duplex View Ethernet interface view Parameter full Sets the operating mode of the Ethernet interface to full duplex half Sets the operating mode of the Ethernet interface to half duplex negotiation Sets the operating mode of the Ethernet interface to auto negotiation Description Use the duplex command to set the operating mode of the Ethernet interface Use the undo duplex command to restore the default operating mode that is auto negotiation When connected to a hub the Ethernet interface must operate in half duplex mode but when connected to a network device that operates in full duplex an Ethernet switch for example it must operate in full duplex too Before setting the Ethernet interface to auto negotiation mode you must ensure the remote interface also operates in this mode If this is uncertain you are recommended to manually set the same operating mode on the
43. None Description Use the display fib command to view the summary of the forward information base FIB This command exports the FIB in a table Each line represents a route where the following information is included e Destination address mask length e Next hop e Current flag combination of G H and U where G represents Gateway H represents Host host route and U to UP available e Timestamp e Output interface Example Display the summary of the FIB table lt XE gt display fib Destination Mask Nexthop Flag TimeStamp Interface 192 168 80 50 32 TZT ee af GHU t 0 InLoopBack0 192 168 80 0 24 192 168 80 50 U t 0 GigabitEthernet0 0 127 0 0 0 8 127 0 0 1 U t 0 InLoopBack0 Command Manual IP Performance and Application H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 IP Performance Configuration Commands 1 1 7 display fib begin Syntax display fib begin include exclude text View Any view Parameter text A string Description Use the display fib command to export lines that relate to string text in the buffer according to regular expression The display fib begin text command displays all lines from the first line containing the string text to the end of the buffer The display fib include text command displays lines containing the string text The display fib exclude text command displays lines that do not contain the string text Example Display all lines from the first line containing the string 169 254
44. Parameter None Description Use the reboot command to restart your XE IP PBX Executing this command has the same effect with the action by powering off the XE IP PBX and powering it on However it provides users convenience to reboot the XE IP PBX from a remote site You are recommended not to use this command because rebooting the machine will cause transient network unavailability Save the configuration file before rebooting the IP PBX otherwise the configurations you just made cannot survive a reboot Example Reboot IP PBX lt XE gt reboot This command will reboot the system The current configuration has not been saved and will be lost if you continue Continue Y N y 3 1 6 tracert Syntax tracert Ta X X X X f first_TTL m max_TTL p port q nqueries vpn instance vpn instance name w timeout host 3 5 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 3 System Maintenance and Management Commands View Parameter Any view a Specifies the source address of the packet configured by the tracert command X X X X specifies the IP address of the tracert packet to be configured in the format of X X X X lt must be an address of a local interface f Sets the initial TTL first_TTL represents the initial TTL ranging from O to the maximum TTL m Sets the maximum TTL max_TTL represents the maximum TTL which is larger than the initial TTL p Sets the UDP port number port i
45. Parameter rule tag Substitute rule tag in the range of 0 to 7 caller Sets input output calling number pattern callee Sets input output called number pattern input format Input number pattern consisting of characters NW 0 9ABCD The number should be within 31 digits in length output format Output number pattern consisting of characters A I 0 9SABCD The length should be within 31 digits in length before Performs number substitution before number analysis after Performs number substitution after number analysis all Deletes all substitute rules Description Use the rule command to configure a substitute rule for the office group Use the undo rule command to delete the specified or all substitute rules for the office group 1 10 Command Manual Feature H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Number Substitution Example You can configure up to eight substitute rules for an office group each serving the purpose of calling number substitution called number substitution or both as shown in the following table Table 1 2 Configure substitute rules Operation Command Substitute the calling numbers that rule rule tag caller input format match the input calling number pattern output format before after Substitute the called numbers that rule rule tag callee input format match the input called number pattern output format before after Substitute both ca
46. REPLY packet Use the ping command to test the network connectivity for troubleshooting The output information includes e Response of a destination to every ECHO REQUEST packet Bytes of the reply packet packet number TTL and the response time The Request time out is displayed if no reply packet is received in timeout time e The final statistics includes number of the transmitted packets number of the received packets packet loss ratio and minimum average and maximum roundtrip times If the packet is transmitted at a slow rate you can enlarge the timeout time for reply packets Related command tracert Ping a host with an IP address of 202 38 160 244 to check the connectivity lt XE gt ping 202 38 160 244 ping 202 38 160 244 56 data bytes press CTRL C to break Reply from 202 38 160 244 bytes 56 sequence 1 tt1 255 time lms Reply from 202 38 160 244 bytes 56 sequence 2 tt1 255 time 2ms 3 4 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 3 System Maintenance and Management Commands Reply from 202 38 160 244 bytes 56 sequence 3 ttl1 255 time lms Reply from 202 38 160 244 bytes 56 sequence 4 tt1 255 time 3ms Reply from 202 38 160 244 bytes 56 sequence 5 ttl1 255 time 2ms 202 38 160 244 ping statistics 5 packets transmitted 5 packets received 0 packet loss round trip min avg max 1 2 3 ms 3 1 5 reboot Syntax reboot View User view
47. SRV view Parameter number of auto operator Access code of the automatic operator service The maximum length of the code is 31 characters which can be digits from 0 to 9 letters A B C and D and signs and all Deletes all the access codes of the automatic operator service Description Use the auto operator command to enter automatic operator view or create an access code for the automatic operator service and enter the corresponding automatic operator view if the specified access code does not exist Use the undo auto operator command to delete the specified access code or all access codes of the automatic operator service Example Create the access code 6666 of the automatic operator service and enter its automatic operator view XE ls srv auto operator 6666 XE 1s srv ao 6666 22 1 2 extension Syntax extension corresponding number corresponding number of extension undo extension corresponding number all Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 22 Automatic Operator Service View Parameter LS SRV AO view corresponding number Operational code The maximum length of the code is four characters which can be digits from 0 to 9 letters A B C and D and signs and Letter A may conflict with keyword all thus the operational code is not allowed to be configured to be a single letter A corresponding number of extension Phone number that corresponds to the ope
48. SSB ALARM view Is gw ssb cba LS GW SSB CBA view Is gw ssb cfb LS GW SSB CFB view Is gw ssb cfc LS GW SSB CFC view Is gw ssb cfnr LS GW SSB CFNR view Is gw ssb cfo LS GW SSB CFO view Is gw ssb cft LS GW SSB CFT view Is gw ssb cfu LS GW SSB CFU view Is gw ssb clir LS GW SSB CLIR view Is gw ssb dnd LS GW SSB DND view Is gw ssb Icg LS GW SSB LCG view Is gw ssb ltc LS GW SSB LTC view Is gw ssb myring LS GW SSB MYRING view Is gw ssb myring cg LS GW SSB MYRING CG view Is gw ssb ssbm LS GW SSB SSBM view Is ms LS MS view Is nat amp fw LS NAT amp FW view Is og LS OG view Is og office LS OG OFFICE view Is og prf LS OG PRF view Is only LS ONLY view Is ps LS PS view Is srv LS SRV view Is srv 3pcc LS SRV 3PCC view Is srv ao LS SRV AO view Command Ma nual Basic Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Basic Configuration Commands Keyword View Is srv cb LS SRV CB view Is srv gn LS SRV GN view Is srv gn gc LS SRV GN GC view Is srv gn nc LS SRV GN NC view Is ssbr LS SSBR view Is ssbt LS SSBT view Is sst LS SST view ma MA view ma lang MA LANG view ma lang fmt MA LANG FMT view ms MS view null NULL view olp OLP view ps PS view ps gk PS GK view ps sip PS SIP view shell Shell view system System view user interface Us
49. System Management Chapter 2 GUI Server Configuration and Mana H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX gement Commands Chapter 2 GUI Server Configuration and Management Commands 2 1 GUI Server Configuration and Management Commands 2 1 1 gui Syntax gui View System view Parameter None Description Use the gui command to enter GUI configuration view Example Enter GUI configuration view XE2000 gui XE2000 gui 2 1 2 gui config Syntax gui config interface interface type slot number port port undo gui config View GUI configuration view Parameter interface type Interface type slot number Interface number Port GUI service port number lt ranges from 1 to 65535 and defaults to 10999 2 1 Command Manual System Management Chapter 2 GUI Server Configuration and Mana H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX gement Commands Description Use the gui config command to configure basic GUI server information Use the undo gui config command to delete basic GUI server information By default no basic GUI server information is configured Example Configure basic GUI server information to use interface GigabitEthernet0 0 and service port 11000 XE2000 gui gui config interface GigabitEthernet 0 0 port 11000 2 1 3 start Syntax start View GUI configuration view Parameter None Description Use the start command to enable the GUI server By default the GUI server is disabled Example Enable the GUI server XE2000 gui start GUI
50. User view Parameter HH MM SS Current time in HH MM SS format HH is in the range 0 to 23 MM and SS in the range 0 to 59 YYYY MM DD Current date in YYYY MM DD format where YYYY is the current year 2000 to 2099 MM is the current month 1 to 12 DD is the current day 1 to 31 Description Use the clock datetime command to set current date and time for a H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX hereinafter referred to as XE IP PBX You must set the current date and time when the absolute time is required The parameter SS is not necessary for time setting Related command display clock Example Set the current date time of an XE IP PBX to January 1 2004 00 00 00 lt XE gt clock datetime 0 0 0 2004 01 01 1 1 2 clock summer time Syntax clock summer time summer time zone name one off repeating start time start date end time end date add time undo clock summer time View User view Command Manual Basic Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Basic Configuration Commands Parameter summer time zone name Name of the time zone to be displayed when the daylight saving time is in effect from 1 to 32 characters in length one off Only sets the time of daylight saving time for a particular year repeating Sets the time of daylight saving time for every year from a particular year start time start date The start time and date of the daylight saving time with time in HH MM SS format and date in YYYY MM DD format e
51. View Parameter start notify id notify time duration of notify Group notify view notify id ID of the group notification to be started notify time Time to start sending the group notification It is in the format of YYYY MM DD HH MM SS or HH MM SS YYYY MM DD Date when the local group notification is to be sent If YYYY MM DD is not provided it defaults to the current day HH MM SS Time when the group notification is to be sent If HH MM SS is not provided the group notification will be sent immediately duration of notify Duration of the local group notification that is the time between the starting and ending points of the notification It ranges from 1 to 120 minutes defaulting to 30 Note Only when configuring local group notification not remote group notification can you use notify time and duration of notify parameters Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 23 Group Notification Service Description Example Use the start command to activate the specified group notification and set related information including the notification sending time and notification duration You can set the notification sending time in the form of e HH MM SS The group notification is sent at the specified time on the current day e YYYY MM DD HH MM SS The group notification is sent at the specified time on the specified day If you do not specify the time the group notification will be sent
52. View FTP client view Parameter jpadar IP address of the remote FTP server port Port number of the remote FTP server a p address Source address of the specified FTP client Description Use the open command to establish the control connection to the remote FTP server Example Establish the control connection to FTP server 10 110 3 1 ftp open 10 110 3 1 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 4 File Management Commands 4 4 17 passive Syntax passive undo passive View FTP client view Parameter None Description Use the passive command to set the data transmission mode to passive mode Use the undo passive command to set the data transmission mode to active mode By default the data transmission mode is passive Example Set the data transmission mode to passive mode ftp passive 4 4 18 put Syntax put localfile remotefile View FTP client view Parameter localfile Name of the local file remotefile Name of the file on the remote FTP server Description Use the put command to upload the local files to the remote FTP server By default if no remote file name is specified the uploaded file will have the same name with the one of the local file Example Upload the local file temp c to the remote FTP server and save it as temp1 c Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 4 File Management Commands ftp put temp c templ c 4 4 19 pwd
53. View LS view Parameter enable Enables location based number substitution disable Disables location based number substitution Description Use the policy area code substitute command to enable or disable location based number substitution Use the undo policy area code substitute command to restore the default By default location based number substitution is enabled Example Disable location based number substitution XE ls policy area code substitute disable 1 1 10 policy num substitute Syntax policy num substitute enable disable undo policy num substitute Command Manual Feature H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Number Substitution View LS view Parameter enable Enables rule based number substitution disable Disables rule based number substitution Description Use the policy num substitute command to enable or disable rule based number substitution Use the undo policy num substitute command to restore the default By default rule base number substitution is enabled Example Disable rule based number substitution XE ls policy num substitute disable 1 1 11 policy substitute inherit Syntax policy substitute inherit enable disable undo policy substitute inherit View LS view Parameter enable Enables inheritance mode number substitution disable Disables inheritance mode number substitution Description Use the policy substitute inherit command to enable or disable inherita
54. a gateway registered with the LS By default multiplexing is disabled Example Enable multiplexing on the gateway gw001 XE 1s gw gw001 multiplex enable 1 1 33 multiplex LS OFFICEGROUP OFFICE view Syntax multiplex disable enable undo multiplex View LS OFFICEGROUP OFFICE view Parameter disable Disables multiplexing enable Enables multiplexing Command Manual Location Server Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Location Server Commands Description Use the multiplex command to specify the multiplexing mode of an office device configured on the LS By default multiplexing is disabled Example Enable multiplexing on the office device of1 XE 1s og 0g01 of1 multiplex enable 1 1 34 multiplex LS PS view Syntax multiplex disable enable undo multiplex View LS PS view Parameter disable Disables multiplexing enable Enables multiplexing Description Use the multiplex command to specify the multiplexing mode of a PS registered with the LS By default multiplexing is disabled Example Enable multiplexing on the PS ps0 XE 1s ps ps0 multiplex enable 1 1 35 office Syntax office device id undo office device id all View LS OFFICEGROUP view 1 31 Command Manual Location Server Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Location Server Commands Parameter device id The identifier of the office device It is case sensitive all Deletes all offic
55. a number entry for a voice subscriber line of the subscriber whose long number is 68835641 with 11 as the short number XE 1s gw gw01 31 68835641 quit XE 1s gw gw01 subscriber 11 68835641 1 43 Command Manual Location Server Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Location Server Commands XE 1s gw gw01 11 68835641 1 1 55 transport LS GW view Syntax transport auto tcp udp undo transport View LS GW view Parameter auto Specifies to select transport mode automatically tcp Specifies to transport using TCP udp Specifies to transport using UDP Description Use the transport command to specify the transport mode of a gateway registered with the LS Use the undo transport command to restore the default transport mode By default udp mode is selected Example Specify the gateway gw001 to transport using TCP XE 1s gw gw001 transport tcp 1 1 56 transport LS OFFICEGROUP OFFICE view Syntax View Parameter transport auto tcp udp undo transport LS OFFICEGROUP OFFICE view auto Specifies to select transport mode automatically tcp Specifies to transport using TCP udp Specifies to transport using UDP 1 44 Command Manual Location Server Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Location Server Commands Description Use the transport command to specify the transport mode of an office device configured on the LS Use the undo transport command to resto
56. accounting on calling users on office devices After accounting is enabled for office devices when a user on an office device calls a user in the LS domain the XE IP PBX will request the RADIUS accounting server to implement accounting on the calling user By default accounting is disabled for calling users on office devices Example Disable accounting for calling users on office device office1 XE 1s og 0g01 office officel XE 1s og 0g01 officellacct disable XE 1s og 0g01 officel System Management Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Table of Contents Table of Contents Chapter 1 Terminal Service and User Interface Configuration Commands ssseeeeees 1 1 1 1 User Interface Configuration Commands ooccccncccnnoncconocanoncccnonnnn nana n nan cc rca 1 1 1 1 1 autbhenticaton mode nn cnc nn nana nn cnc ranma mann 1 1 1 1 2 auto execute Commande 1 2 A data EE 1 3 SN E 1 3 L t display Ueleger edoert Hares e ea enaa deed EES 1 4 1 4126 display USAS ii a in ie ns ai A ee a 1 5 VASTO CO O EE 1 5 1 1 8 free user interface it id A A AE cid 1 6 1 1 9 history COMMAand Max SIZO ionekaet a arc cette ae a a e A R 1 7 131510 Biere TEE 1 7 1 1 11 local user level 2 eee cece a aeaeee eee ea aE a aA aa A ara a LA AEE 1 8 HA V2 TMOG EE 1 9 USR Suel Eu le EE 1 9 1 1 14 modem timer answer nn nn cnn cnn nnnn nn nn nn nn nn nn anar nen 1 10 VANA o ie al 1 10 TO Meana nt ae 1 11 kid Sereen length 4 cts
57. all bkm cdp cm csm hadpt hrm hsm hstack om rm sm stack tucl User view adapter Enables adapter layer debugging all Enables all debugging bkm Enables backup management BKM module debugging cdp Enables call distribute process CDP module debugging cm Enables call management CM module debugging hadpt Enables H 323 adapter module debugging hrm Enables H 323 registration management HRM module debugging hsm Enables H 323 subscriber management HSM module debugging hstack Enables H 323 stack debugging rm Enables SIP register management RM module debugging sm Enables SIP subscriber management SM module debugging om Enables operation management OM module debugging stack Enables SIP protocol stack debugging tucl Enables TCP UDP control layer TUCL module debugging csm Enables CSM module debugging level evel Debugging information level Description Use the debugging process server command to debug the process server PS Command Manual Process Server Configuraiton H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Process Server Use the undo debugging process server command to restore the default level of output debugging information The argument level can take on a value in the range 0 to 7 By default the debugging at all levels is disabled If it is set to 4 the debugging information at levels 1 through 4 is output If it is set to 0 no debugging information is out
58. are the first character of text The system will exit the interactive process after the ending character is entered If you do not want to enter the interactive process just enter the same character twice and press lt Enter gt Set the banner of the session establishment XE header shell SHELL Hello Welcome use XE 2000 Test the previous setting XE quit lt XE gt quit Press RETURN to get started SHELL Hello Welcome use XE 2000 lt XE gt 1 1 18 hotkey Syntax View Parameter hotkey CTRL_G CTRL_L CTRL_O CTRL_T CTRL_U command text undo hotkey CTRL_G CTRL_L CTRL_O CTRL_T CTRL_U System view CTRL_G Assigns hot key lt CTRL G gt to a command CTRL_L Assigns hot key lt CTRL L gt to a command CTRL_O Assigns hot key lt CTRL O gt to a command CTRL_T Assigns hot key lt CTRL T gt to a command CTRL_U Assigns hot key lt CTRL U gt to a command command_text The command line associated with the hot key Description Use the hotkey command to assign a hot key to a specific command line 1 15 Chapter 1 Basic Configuration Commands Command Manual Basic Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Basic Configuration Commands Example Use the undo hotkey command to restore the default setting By default the hot key CTRL_G CTRL_L and CTRL_O are assigned to default commands as follows CTRL_G corresponds to the display current configuration
59. attribute private 2 1 2 belongto Syntax belongto domain id undo belongto View LS OFFICEGROUP view LS office view 2 1 Command Manual Location Server Configuration Chapter 2 NAT FW Tunnel Traversal Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Commands Parameter domain id ID of the domain to which the PS or office group is to belong Description Use the belongto command to specify the domain to which the PS or office group is to belong Use the undo belongto command to specify that the PS or office group belongs to the default domain domain By default a PS or an office group belongs to the default domain domain Example Specify that psO belongs to domain001 XE 1s ps ps0 belongto domain001 2 1 3 device status forever up attachedps Syntax device status forever up attachedps ps id View LS GW view Parameter ps id ID of the PS to which the gateway device is to belong Description Use the device status forever up attachedps ps id command to specify the PS to which a forever up gateway device is to belong Example Specify that gw01 a forever up gateway device belongs to ps01 XE 1s gw gw01 device status forever up attachedps ps01 2 1 4 domain Syntax domain domain id undo domain domain id all no confirm 2 2 Command Manual Location Server Configuration Chapter 2 NAT FW Tunnel Traversal Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Commands View LS view Parameter domain id ID of the do
60. backup can be performed e To configure static route you can specify either outgoing interface or next hop Which one is adopted in practice depends on actual condition For the interfaces which can translate network address to link layer address or point to point interface transmission interface or next hop address can be specified But for NBMA interfaces that support point to multi point you should configure besides IP route secondary routes i e the mapping from IP address to link layer address In such condition not the transmission interface but the next hop IP address should be configured when configuring static route e When configuring two static routes with equal cost you must do it in the same way that is configuring both to next hop or both to outgoing interface You cannot configure equal cost routes with different configurations Related command display ip routing table Set the next hop of the default route to 129 102 0 2 XE ip route static 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 129 102 0 2 3 3 Process Server Configuration Command Manual Process Server Configuraiton H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Table of Contents Table of Contents Chapter 1 Process erer ES dianas 1 1 1 1 Process Server Commande 1 1 1 1 1 debugging processer onura a a a a e a a a a 1 1 1 1 2 display debugging process Server eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeneaeees 1 3 1 1 3 display process server call ntformatton 1 4 1 1 4 d
61. be saved locally Description Use the dir command to query a specified file You can use this command to display all files under a directory or display the files to be queried Example Query the file temp c and save the result in the file temp1 ftp dir temp c templ 4 4 10 disconnect Syntax disconnect View FTP client view Parameter None Description Use the disconnect command to terminate the connection to the remote FTP server and remain in the FTP client view The command terminates the control connection and data connection to FTP server simultaneously Example Terminate the connection to the remote FTP server and remain in FTP client view ftp disconnect 4 32 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 4 File Management Commands ftp 4 4 11 ftp Syntax ftp host port a p address View User view Parameter host IP address or host name of the remote FTP server port Port number of the remote FTP server a p address Source address of the specified FTP client Description Use the ftp command to establish the control connection to the remote FTP server and enter the FTP client view Example Connect to the remote FTP server with an IP address of 1 1 1 1 lt XE gt ftp 1 1 1 1 4 4 12 get Syntax get remotefile localfile View FTP client view Parameter localfile Local file name remotefile Name of the file on the remote FTP server Description Use the g
62. brackets For j example File gt Create gt Folder Convention Description A Button names are inside angle brackets For example click lt OK gt Window names menu items data table and field names are inside square brackets For example pop up the New User window Multi level menus are separated by forward slashes For example File Create Folder lll Symbols Convention Description A Means reader be extremely careful Improper operation A Warning may cause bodily injury d Means reader be careful Improper operation may cause Caution data loss or damage to equipment Note Means a complementary description Basic Configuration Command Manual Basic Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Table of Contents Table of Contents Chapter 1 Basic Configuration Commands cssecceseceseseeeseeeeneeeeeeeeeesneneeneeeeeeeeeeseaesesnenenseees 1 1 Tais Beleeger LEE 1 1 TEZ clock SUMMONING ve tac MA Aaa te aA ada tan a ees 1 1 1 1 3 ClOCK TIMEZONE eege NENNEN did 1 2 EE ell ue E ET 1 3 TAL 5 COMMANG PNIVIICGC iriran ia in eet eee ee 1 4 USR e Eeer le eet comica 1 7 VALIOSA clock voii a A E AL ada ae ee eed a 1 7 1 1 8 display Command aas 1 8 1 1 9 display Cpu USAge TOr user 1 8 1 1 10 display Current CONFIQUIATION coooncncinnncnnncccnncccnnonnnnnannnancc canon naar n nr nc rnn rana 1 9 1 1 11 display diagnostic information crac rn 1 10 1 1 12 display histor
63. call control service Description Use the srv switch cba command to enable disable outgoing call control service By default outgoing call control service is enabled Example Disable outgoing call control service XE 1s gw gw01 1 1001 srv switch cba off Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 5 Outgoing Call Authority Configuration Commands 5 1 5 subscriber role LS view Syntax subscriber role role undo subscriber role role all View LS view Parameter role Name of user role which is case sensitive and consists of 32 characters at most all Removes all user roles Description Use the subscriber role command to enter user role view If the specified user role does not exist in the system the system first creates the user role and then enters the corresponding view Use the undo subscriber role command to remove specified or all user roles Example Create user role sales and enter the corresponding view XE 1s subscriber role sales XE 1s ssbr sales 5 1 6 subscriber role outgoing call control service view Syntax subscriber role ro e undo subscriber role role View Outgoing call control service view Parameter role Name of user role which is case sensitive and consists of 32 characters at most Description Use the subscriber role command to configure or change the user role Use the undo subscriber role command to remove the user role By default no user role is defi
64. call limit relationship between all call limit groups XE ls clg display location server call limit group bind Group normal table CAN T call 1 Group black table Group black table CAN T call 7 Group normal table Group black table Group white table Group gl Group g2 Group g3 Group g4 Group white table CAN T cal1 0 Group gl CAN T call 3 Group black table Group g3 Group g4 Group g2 CAN T call 2 Group black table Group g4 Group g3 CAN T call 1 Group black table Group g4 CAN T call 1 Group black table This command displays information in the following format Group group caller CAN T call limit call group number Group group calleel Group group callee2 group caller refers to the call limit group the caller is in limit call group number refers to the number of the call limit groups group caller cannot call group callee group callee2 and the like represent the call limit groups group caller cannot call 4 4 Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 4 Inter Group Call Restriction Configuration Commands 4 1 6 forbid Syntax View Parameter forbid src call limit group all call dst call limit group all undo forbid src call limit group all call dst call limit group all Call limit group view src call limit group Name of the call limit group for the caller which is case sensitive and consists of 16 characters at most ds
65. clock service for subscriber 1001 XE 1s gw gw01 1 1001 srv switch alarm on 26 3 Appendix Command Manual Appendix H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Appendix A Command Index Appendix A Command Index The command index includes all the commands in the VRP Command Manual which are arranged alphabetically ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ aaa enable access LS GW view access LS OFFICEGROUP view access command access list acct adi abbreviated dialing service view adi subscriber number view alarm alarm clock view alarm subscriber number view area code LS GW view area code LS OFFICEGROUP view area code substitute LS GW view area code substitute LS OFFICEGROUP view arp static ascii attribute authentication LS GW view authentication mode auto execute command auto operator A 1 Feature System Management System Management System Management System Management Feature Call Services Call Services Call Services Call Services Feature Feature Feature Feature IP Performance and Application System Management Location Server Configuration Location Server Configuration System Management System Management Call Services 4 1 2 5 2 5 2 6 2 6 4 4 2 1 4 28 2 1 1 4 1 2 22 1 Command Manual Appendix H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Appendix A Command Index B Location Server bearer capability LS GW view Configuration 1 1 Location Server bearer capabil
66. command to change the operating path to an upper directory Example Change the operating path to an upper directory ftp cdup 4 4 6 close Syntax close View FTP client view Parameter None Description Use the close command to terminate the connection to the remote FTP server and remain in FTP client view The command terminates the control connection and data connection to the remote FTP server simultaneously Example Terminate the connection to the remote FTP server and remain in FTP client view ftp close ftp Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX 4 4 7 debugging Syntax debugging undo debugging View FTP client view Parameter None Description Chapter 4 File Management Commands Use the debugging command to enable the debugging Use the undo debugging to disable the debugging By default the debugging of FTP client command is disabled Example Enable the debugging ftp debugging 4 4 8 delete Syntax delete remotefile View FTP client view Parameter remotefile File name Description Use the delete command to delete a specified file Example Delete the file temp c ftp delete temp c Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 4 File Management Commands 4 4 9 dir Syntax dir filename localfile View FTP client view Parameter filename Name of the file to be queried localfile Name of the file to
67. ete ec thea ee dia tl 1 12 11 18 SONG tiie weil acing ane nai eid a eee eee a gta ete 1 12 1 1 19 set authentication D seword nono cnn nn nana n nan nnnn narran rra 1 13 ALO Sl A A A A a 1 14 A EE 1 15 141 22 StOPDITS EE 1 15 TASS USER TU EE 1 16 11 24 USEF INTE ACS ita 1 17 1 2 Telnet Terminal Service Configuration Commande 1 18 1 2 1 debugging KC 1 18 12 2 display tcp Status is usaras 1 18 ET 1 19 Chapter 2 GUI Server Configuration and Management Commands cccsesecereeseeeeees 2 1 2 1 GUI Server Configuration and Management Commande coccccnocccnnoccnoncccnancnonnananana cono ncnnns 2 1 LAU A io 2 1 2A 2 QUIFCONNIG trial atada tere 2 1 2 13 SA A A A AA eee ses AMOR Ae AAA 2 2 2 ee EE 2 2 O EE 2 3 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Table of Contents 2O WED KEE 2 3 2 127 depay Ur USE EE ceeds cect anibdea a 2 4 ARMENIA 2 5 2 1 9 access LS OFFICEGROUP view 2 5 2 t10 O A eee ENNER AEAN NAKA A U NEEN ES 2 6 2 11 ACCESS COMMA EE 2 6 Chapter 3 System Maintenance and Management CommanG cccsssseenesesceneeseseees 3 1 3 1 Network Diagnostic Commande cooocoococcconococoncccnonnnononananocononn nan nn nn nan c nro nr r anna anna cc nnncns 3 1 O A e EE 3 1 3 12 display te Le Te WE 3 2 3 1 3 display diagnostic information ccseeceececee cess eeeeeeceeeeecaeeeeaaeseeeeeseeeesaeeeeeneeee 3 2 RE PUIG DEE 3 3 E lee eseeneeepnrer freed nreeT a nina da AEE 3 5 SA
68. immediately after this command is executed Configure to send the group notification named notify1 immediately XE ls srv gn start notifyl Configure to send group notification named notify2 at 03 04 05 on January 2 2005 The notification lasts five minutes XE ls srv gn start notify2 2005 01 02 03 04 05 5 Configure to send group notification named notify3 at 20 00 00 on the current day The notification lasts three minutes XE 1s srv gn start notify3 20 00 00 3 Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 24 Call Transfer Service Chapter 24 Call Transfer Service 24 1 Call Transfer Service Configuration Commands 24 1 1 srv switch ct Syntax srv switch ct on off View LS GW PREFIX view LS OG PREFIX view Subscriber number view Parameter on Enables the call transfer service off Disables the call transfer service Description Use the srv switch ct command to enable or disable the call transfer service By default the call transfer service is disabled Example Enable the call transfer service for subscriber 1001 XE 1s gw gw01 1 1001 srv switch ct on Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 25 Number Query Service Chapter 25 Number Query Service 25 1 Number Query Service Configuration Commands 25 1 1 srv switch query self Syntax srv switch query self on off View LS GW PREFIX view Subscriber number view Parameter on Enables t
69. in the trap buffer lt XE gt display trapbuffer size 23 Trapping Buffer Configuration and contents enabled allowed max buffer size 1024 actual buffer size 256 channel number 3 channel name trapbuf dropped messages 0 overwrote messages 0 current messages 0 3 2 6 info center channel Syntax info center channel channel number name channel name View System view Parameter channel number Channel number in the range of 0 to 9 which means the system can have 10 channels channel name Channel name up to 30 characters and it cannot be P or Y characters Description Use the info center channel command to name the channels Do not give channels the same name 3 12 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 3 System Maintenance and Management Commands Example Name the channel 0 execconsole XE info center channel 0 name execconsole 3 2 7 info center console channel Syntax info center console channel channel number channel name undo info center console channel View System view Parameter channel number Channel number from 0 to 9 which means the system can have 10 channels channel name Channel name Description Use the info center console channel command to output information to console and specify the channel to be used Use the undo info center console channel command to remove the current configuration By default no
70. is a network problem you can use the tracert command to locate the problem The output of the tracert command includes all the IP addresses of gateways through which the packet travels If the gateway times out then the output is Example Trace the route lt XE gt tracert 18 26 0 115 tracert to allspice lcs mit edu 18 26 0 115 30 hops max 1 helios ee lbl gov 128 3 112 1 O ms 0 ms O ms lilac dmc Berkeley EDU 128 32 216 1 19 ms 19 ms 19 ms lilac dmc Berkeley EDU 128 32 216 1 39 ms 19 ms 19 ms Ss W N ccngw ner cc Berkeley EDU 128 32 136 23 19 ms 39 ms 39 ms a ccn nerif22 Berkeley EDU 128 32 168 22 20 ms 39 ms 39 ms 6 128 32 197 4 128 32 197 4 59 ms 119 ms 39 ms 7 131 119 2 5 131 119 2 5 59 ms 59 ms 39 ms 8 129 140 70 13 129 140 70 13 80 ms 79 ms 99 ms 9 129 140 71 6 129 140 71 6 139 ms 139 ms 159 ms 10 129 140 81 7 129 140 81 7 199 ms 180 ms 300 ms 11 129 140 72 17 129 140 72 17 300 ms 239 ms 239 ms 12 13 128 121 54 72 128 121 54 72 259 ms 499 ms 279 ms 14 15 16 17 x 18 ALLSPICE LCS MIT EDU 18 26 0 115 339 ms 279 ms 279 ms 3 2 Information Processing Commands 3 2 1 display channel Syntax display channel channel number channel name View Any view Parameter channel number Channel number which can be from 0 to 9 that means the system can have 10 channels channel name Channel name 3 7 Command Manual Sys
71. level severity trap state on off level severity debug state on off level severity undo info center source module name default channel channel number channel name System view module name Module name default Sets the default information records channel number Specifies the channel number channel name Specifies the channel name log Log information trap Trap information debug Debugging information Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 3 System Maintenance and Management Commands on Enables the information output off Disables the information output level Specifies the level of the information The information at a level greater than severity cannot be sent severity Level of information which is grouped into 8 levels according to severity or emergency As shown in the following table a packet with a lower severity level is more urgent Severity level 1 means emergency and level 8 means debugging Table 3 2 Severity levels defined in syslog Severity Meaning emergencies The extremely emergent errors alerts The errors that need to be corrected immediately Critical Critical errors errors The errors that need to be concerned but not critical warnings Warning there might exist some kinds of errors notifications The information should be concerned informational Common prompt debugging Debugging infor
72. lt XE gt display udp statistics Received packet Total 0 checksum error 0 shorter than header 0 data length larger than packet 0 no socket on port 0 broadcast 0 not delivered input socket full 0 input packets missing pcb cache 0 Sent packet Total 0 1 1 16 mtu Syntax mtu mtu size undo mtu View Interface view Parameter mtu size The maximum transmission unit MTU size of packets an interface can transmit without the need to fragment ranging from 46 to 1500 bytes Description Use the mtu command to set the MTU size of packets an interface can transmit Use the undo mtu command to remove the MTU setting of an interface By default the MTU size is 1500 bytes Example Set an MTU to 800 XE Ethernet1 0 mtu 800 Restore to the default MTU value XE Ethernet1 0 undo mtu Command Manual IP Performance and Application H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX 1 1 17 reset ip statistics Syntax reset ip statistics View User view Parameter None Description Chapter 1 IP Performance Configuration Commands Use the reset ip statistics command to clear IP statistics It is necessary to clear IP statistics to perform a new calculating in some special cases Related command display ip interface display ip statistics Example Clear IP statistics lt XE gt reset ip statistics 1 1 18 reset tcp statistics Syntax reset tcp statistics View User view Parameter None Description Use the rese
73. matched depends on how the parameters are set Use the display fib dest addr command to display all the subnets if the destination address can find corresponding FIB table entry in the range of natural mask otherwise displays the FIB table entry that best matches the destination address Use the display fib dest addr dest mask command to display the FIB table entries that exactly match the destination address and mask Use the display fib dest addr longer command to display all the destination address FIB table entries that match the IP address of destination address in the range of natural mask Use the display fib dest addr dest mask longer command to display all the destination address FIB table entries that match the IP address in the range of the entered mask Use the display fib dest addr1 dest mask1 dest addr2 dest mask2 command to display FIB table entries whose destination address within the range determined by the entered parameters dest addr1 dest mask1 and dest addr2 dest mask2 and the entries with the destination address matching the dest addri dest mask1 and dest addre2 dest mask2 Example Display matched FIB table entries or best matched FIB table entries that are in the range of natural mask with destination address of 169 253 0 0 XE display fib 192 168 80 30 Command Manual IP Performance and Application H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 IP Performance Configuration Commands Route Entry Count 1 Destination Mask Next
74. nn nano cnn rro nn nr rana 6 1 6 1 2 display SNMP AGENE nosiri eee cece i areia ei a eE cnn nr rana Na e NEEE Ka aaraa 6 1 6 1 3 display snmp agent Community 6 2 6 1 4 display snmp agent oroup eee ce ceeeee cece enter eeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeeeneaas 6 3 6 1 5 display Snmp agent MID ViCW eee ceeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeneaas 6 4 6 1 6 display snmp agent statistics ec eee eee eneeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeseeaaeeeeeeaeeeeeneaaes 6 5 6 1 7 display SnMp agent evento 6 6 6 1 8 display SNMp aGeNt uem user eee eee eeee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeseeaaaeeeeeeaaeeeseeaaeeeeeeaas 6 6 6 41 O SMIMP DON tias dai oca 6 7 6 1 10 SAMP AYENt Community 6 8 Gah ul Ee lu te e ip e ta i ee eet 6 9 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Table of Contents 6 1 12 snmp agent local engineid 2 eee eee cece cent ee eeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaeeeseeaaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaas 6 10 6 1 13 SNMp agent mlb view nano n cnn nana nn arrancan 6 11 6 1 14 snmp agent packet max eize nn ee canon nn c nana nc cc anar nncnnnnns 6 11 6 1 15 Snmp agent evento EE 6 12 6 1 16 snmp agent orgethost nn nn nnnn nn nn nana n cnc nana nccncnnnns 6 13 6 1 17 snmp agent trap enable ooconocccccnnocccccnnoncncnanoncnnnnno cnn c naar cnn nr naar nn rra n nr rra 6 14 6 1 18 Snmp agent trap life oooonoconncccnnicinncnnnncccnnnccnnnocno nono nono n narran cnn cnn rca 6 15 6 1 19 snmp agent t
75. notify config gn01 Notify config gn01 State config Mode local Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 23 Group Notification Service MediaID 1010 Callee access 777 Start time Call interval 2 min Duration 30 min range of notify curgroup Table 23 1 Description on the fields of the display location server notify config command Field Description Notify config Group notification name State group notification status Mode Group notification mode Media ID Media ID of the media file used for local group notification Access code that receivers use to hear the Callee access notification Start time Time that the notification is sent Duration Group notification duration Range of notify Group that receives the notification 23 1 3 display location server notify group Syntax display location server notify group notify group id all View Any view Parameter caller group id D of the notification group to be displayed all Displays all groups Description Use the display location server notify group command to display information about one specified notification group or all notification groups Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 23 Group Notification Service Example Display information of the notification group named notifyGroup lt XE gt display location server notify group notifyGroup notif
76. of entries for subscriber line numbers 2 1002 Short number and long number Static Alias Number Number of static number routes Static Alias List Routing table of static number Device Priority Device priority Registration Circle Registration circle Authentication Authentication mode Password Authentication password Area Code Substitute State of the location based number substitute Nation Code Country code Region Code Area code Registration Status Registration status Registration Transport Registration transport mode Dynamic Alias Number Number of dynamic number routes Dynamic Alias Check Sum Check sum of dynamic number routes Resource Can Use Whether the gateway resource is available Registration Call Identifier Registration call identifier RM handle Registration module handle CAI handle CAI module handle Notification Bitmap Notification bitmap 1 17 Command Manual Location Server Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Location Server Commands Field Description Indication Bitmap Indication bitmap Attached PS the gateway registers with the LS Attached Process Server through this PS 1 1 20 display location server office group Syntax display location server office group all officegroup id list View Any view Parameter all Displ
77. of the IP packets sourced from the PS in the public network and destined for the PS in the private network Normally it is the port number of the firewall used by the PS in the private network Description Example Use the tunnelpeer command to configure a tunnel end pair that is a pair of PSs with one in the private network and another in the public network which will communicate with each other across the firewall Use the undo tunnelpeer command to delete all tunnel end pairs or a specified tunnel end pair PSO resides in the private network and its IP address is 192 168 1 2 PS1 resides in the public network and its IP address is 220 10 10 2 NAT is enabled between the private and public networks and the public network IP address is exposed to the private network Specify PSO and PS1 to be a tunnel end pair using port 11998 at both ends PSO uses the following IP address and port number of the firewall 220 10 10 1 and 11998 XE ls nat fw tunnelpeer tunnelpeer01l private PSO 220 10 10 2 port 11998 public PS1 220 10 10 1 port 11998 2 5 Feature Command Manual Feature H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Table of Contents Table of Contents Chapter 1 Number Substitution cccsceeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeseaesesneeeeeseeeseaeseseaeeaseeeseneeeseaeseseeeeneeees 1 1 1 1 Number Substitution Configuration Commande sessseesseesseesseeseeenerennneerrennrstnnnnnneen nee 1 1 1 1 1 area code LS GW view 1 1 1 1 2
78. old user named ocal user will not be affected Add a user whose name and password are both XE1 and the password is to be displayed in cipher text 4 26 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 4 File Management Commands XE local user XEl password cipher XEl 4 3 8 local user service type Syntax local user ocal user service type ftp terminal telnet undo local user oca user service type View System view Parameter local user Username ftp Authorizes the user to use FTP terminal Authorizes the user to use terminal service that is logging on from the Console port telnet Authorizes the user to use Telnet service Description Use the local user service type command to set the terminal services available to the user Use the undo local user service type command to restore the default terminal services available to the user By default all terminal services are available to the user The command can be used together with the local user oca user password command Related command local user password Example Authorize the user XE whose password is h3c to use the telnet service only XE local user XE password cipher h3c XE local user XE service type telnet Authorize the user XE whose password is h3c to use the FTP service only XE local user XE password cipher h3c XE local user XE service type ftp 4 27 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 200
79. priority level undo priority Command Manual Location Server Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Location Server Commands View Prefix view Parameter level Priority of a static route number which ranges from 0 to 1000 and the default is the same as that of a gateway Description Use the priority command to set the priority of a static route number registered with the LS Use the undo priority command to restore the default priority The default priority of a static route number is the same as that of a gateway or an office device refer to priority LS GW view for details Example Set the priority of the static route number 1101 to 11 XE 1s gw gw01 prefix 1101 XE 1s gw gw01 1101 priority 11 1 1 49 priority subscriber view Syntax priority priority level undo priority View Subscriber view Parameter level Priority of a voice subscriber line number entry which ranges from 0 to 1000 and the default is the same as that of a gateway Description Use the priority command to set the priority of a voice subscriber line number entry registered with the LS Use the undo priority command to restore the default priority The default priority of a voice subscriber line number is the same as that of a gateway refer to priority LS GW view for details 1 40 Command Manual Location Server Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Location Server Commands Example Set the
80. priority of the voice subscriber line number entry 01 9901 to 11 XE 1s gw gw01 subscriber 01 9901 XE 1s gw gw01 01 9901 priority 11 1 1 50 process server Syntax process server device id undo process server device id all View LS view Parameter device id The identifier of a PS It is case sensitive all Deletes all PSs Description Use the process server command to add a PS and enter the LS PS view of the LS If this PS exists this command brings you into the LS PS view of the LS Use the undo process server command to delete the PSs registered with the LS Before deleting a PS to which a permanently online gateway connects you need to change the status of the gateway You need to enter LS PS view first before configuring the PS Example Enter the view of the PS ps0 XE ls process server ps0 XE ls ps ps0 1 1 51 reset location server statistics Syntax reset location server statistics View User view 1 41 Command Manual Location Server Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Location Server Commands Parameter None Description Use the reset location server statistics command to clear the statistics about the LS that is to clear the information displayed by the display location server statistics command Example Clear the statistics about the LS lt XE gt reset location server statistics 1 1 52 start Syntax start View LS view Parameter None Description Use the start co
81. prompt on the LS XE 1s ms media01 language English 3 1 3 media server Syntax media server ms id undo media server ms id all View LS view Parameter ms id 1D of the MS 32 character string length limitation It is case sensitive all Deletes all the MSs managed by the LS Description Use the media server command to add an MS and enter LS MS view on the LS If the MS already exists this command lets you enter the LS MS view corresponding to that MS directly Use the undo media server command to delete the MS managed by the LS Example Configure a media server with the ID of ms1 h3c in LS view and enter the LS MS view corresponding to the MS XE ls media server ms1 h3c XE ls ms ms1 h3c 3 2 Call Services Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Table of Contents Table of Contents Chapter 1 Voice Service Configuration COMMANAS cssccssetceseeeeeeeeeseeeseseeeeneeeesseeeseneeeeneeees 1 1 1 1 Voice Service Configuration Commande tnt 1 1 WAS Re E ee ta 1 1 LABS Wii deed ate etic edit nee seeded eed eee tices 1 1 Chapter 2 User Management Configuration COMMANAS ccecceeseeeseeeeeseeeeeseeeseeeseeneeneeseees 2 1 2 1 User Management Configuration Commande 2 1 CNR e E E 2 1 271 2 SUDSCFIDEF StAtUssnc i 5 ccdecebeckedehdacavisasauhechbaneesege a aa and dada aid eg 2 1 Chapter 3 Emergency Call Configuration COMMANAS occccncccncnnnnnnncconnnnnarnnnncr carecer rana 3 1
82. random selection By default the random selection is enabled Example Disable random selection XE LS policy random selection disable 1 1 40 policy select rule Syntax policy select rule number first priority first undo policy select rule Command Manual Location Server Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Location Server Commands View LS view Parameter number first Configures the longest number at a higher priority priority first Configures the priority number at a higher priority Description Use the policy select rule command to configure the longest number or the priority number at a higher priority Use the undo policy select rule command to restore the default call matching criterion By default the call matching criterion sets the priority number at a higher priority Example Configure the longest number at a higher priority XE ls policy select rule number first XE Is 1 1 41 policy unknown device admission Syntax policy unknown device admission enable disable undo policy unknown device admission View LS view Parameter Enable Enables the XE IP PBX to accept requests from unknown devices Disable Disables the XE IP PBX to accept requests from unknown devices Description Use the policy unknown device admission command to enable or disable to accept requests for unknown devices Use the undo policy unknown device admission command to restore the defau
83. rename a file If the name of the destination file is the same with that of an existing directory the execution fails If the name of the destination file is the same with that of an existing file the operation fails A Caution If there is only one application file system file in the system you are not allowed to modify the file name Otherwise the system may break down when you upgrade the application of the XE IP PBX 4 12 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 4 File Management Commands Example Rename the file sample txt as sample bak lt XE gt rename sample txt sample bak Rename flash sample txt to flash sample bak Y N y o Renamed file flash sample txt flash sample bak 4 1 16 reset recycle bin Syntax reset recycle bin filename View User view Parameter filename Name of the file to be deleted Description Use the reset recycle bin command to delete a file from the recycle bin permanently This command supports wildcard The delete command only moves a file to the recycle bin directory To delete a file permanently use the reset recycle bin command Example Delete the specified file from the recycle bin lt XE gt reset recycle bin flash plh_logic out reset flash plh_logic out Y N y 4 1 17 rmdir Syntax rmdir directory View User view Parameter directory Name of the directory Description Use the rmdir command to delete a directory The directory
84. the Irq mode command to set the LRQ signaling processing method of the gatekeeper Use the undo Irq mode command to restore the default LRQ signaling processing method of the gatekeeper By default the terminated mode is used Example Set the LRQ signaling processing method of the gatekeeper as forward 1 10 Command Manual Process Server Configuraiton H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Process Server xe ps gk lrg mode forward 1 1 10 irr frequency Syntax irr frequency irr frequency value undo irr frequency View PS GK view Parameter irr frequency value Interval for reporting Info_Request_Response IRR messages It defaults to 60 seconds Description Use the irr frequency command to configure the interval at which gateways report their state information to the gatekeeper regularly If the interval is set to 0 gateways do not report IRR regularly Use the undo irr frequency command to restore the default interval at which gateways report their state information to the gatekeeper regularly Example Enable gateways to report IRR at 120 second intervals XE ps gk irr frequency 120 1 1 11 Is mode Syntax Is mode d priority local remote ip address p address port port undo Is mode d priority all View PS view Parameter id priority D of the LS used by the PS This ID ranges from 0 to 4 representing the LS priority in an ascending order local Uses the co located LS remote Use
85. the PublicDomain domain XE ls display location server domain PublicDomain SETAS Domain Information Domain Identifier PublicDomain Domain Attribute public process server list ps0 office group list The result shows that the attribute of the PublicDomain domain is public and the PS belonging to it is ps0 1 1 19 display location server gateway Syntax display location server gateway device id all h323 sip list View Any view Parameter all Displays information about all gateways device id The identifier of the gateway to be displayed h323 Displays information about H 323 gateways sip Displays information about SIP user agents list Lists the identifiers and device types of the gateways Description Use the display location server gateway command to display information about the gateways registered with the LS Example Display information about all gateways lt XE gt display location server gateway all LEN cara Gateway Information Identifier gw02 1 15 Command Manual Location Server Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Location Server Commands LoadShare Disable SubsLine 4 PsGroupID o Static Information Device Type SIP UA Ip address 0 0 0 0 5060 Call Ip address 0 0 0 0 1720 Device Status normal Device Manufacturer H3C Transport udp Multiplex disable DynamicIp disable Subscriber count 1 Subscriber List 2 1002 Static Ali
86. the display diagnostic information command to collect the operating information of all the active modules in the system Example Display the diagnostic information 1 10 Command Manual Basic Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Basic Configuration Commands lt XE gt display diagnostic information 1 1 12 display history command Syntax display history command View Any view Parameter None Description Use the display history command command to display history command s The terminal automatically saves recently executed commands that is any input that ends with a carriage return You can use the display history command command to display the saved history commands Example Display the history command s lt XE gt display history command display interface display interface e 1 0 1 1 13 display saved configuration Syntax display saved configuration View Any view Parameter None Description Use the display saved configuration command to display the saved configuration of the XE IP PBX which is valid after the next boot Related command display current configuration 1 11 Command Manual Basic Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Basic Configuration Commands Example Display configure file of XE IP PBX in storage device lt XE gt display saved configuration sysname XE interface Aux0 link protocol ppp interface Ethernet0 0 interface Ethernet0 1 int
87. the user has not sent any service request to the FTP server in two minutes 4 3 3 ftp server enable Syntax View Parameter Description ftp server enable undo ftp server System view None Use the ftp server enable command to enable the FTP server and allow the login of FTP users 4 23 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 4 File Management Commands Use the undo ftp server command to disable the FTP server and disallow the login of FTP users By default the FTP server is disabled Example Disable the FTP server XE undo ftp server 4 3 4 ftp timeout Syntax ftp timeout minute undo ftp timeout View System view Parameter minute Connection timeout in minutes in the range of 1 to 35791 By default it is 30 minutes Description Use the ftp timeout command to set the connection timeout Use the undo ftp timeout command to restore the default connection timeout Once the user logs onto the FTP server if an abnormal disconnection occurs or the user disrupts the connection abnormally FTP server is not notified and thus the connection is still on To avoid such a problem you can set a connection timeout If the connection is idle in a period of time FTP server regards it as connection failure and terminate the connection Example Set the connection timeout to 36 minutes XE ftp timeout 36 4 3 5 ftp update Syntax ftp update fast normal undo ftp u
88. this community XE snmp agent community read comaccess Set the community name to mgr and enable the read and write access XE snmp agent community write mgr Delete the community comaccess XE undo snmp agent community comaccess 6 1 11 snmp agent group Syntax View Parameter snmp agent group v1 v2c group name read read view write write view notify notify view undo snmp agent group v1 v2c group name snmp agent group v3 group name authentication privacy read read view write write view notify notify view undo snmp agent group v3 group name authentication privacy System view v1 v1 security mode in use v2c v2c security mode in use v3 v3 security mode in use group name Group name in the range of 1 to 32 characters authentication Specifies authentication of the packet without encryption privacy Specifies authentication and encryption of the packet read Enables the setting of read only view read view Specifies name of the read only view in the range of 1 to 32 characters write Enables the setting of read write view write view Specifies name of the read write view in the range of 1 to 32 characters 6 9 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 6 SNMP Configuration Commands notify Enables the setting of notify view notify view Specifies name of the notify view in the range of 1 to 32 char
89. undo super password command to remove the current setting Example Set the password to zbr when switching from a lower level to level 3 XE super password level 3 simple zbr 1 1 25 sysname Syntax sysname sysname View System view Parameter sysname Name of the XE IP PBX a string from 1 to 30 characters in length Description Use the sysname command to set the name of the XE IP PBX The name of the XE IP PBX is H3C by default The modification to the name of an IP PBX can affect the prompt of the CLI For the XE IP PBX named XE the prompt of user view is lt XE gt Example Set the domain name of the XE IP PBX to XE 1 21 Command Manual Basic Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Basic Configuration Commands H3C sysname XE XE 1 1 26 system view Syntax system view View User view Parameter None Description Use the system view command to switch from user view to system view Related command quit return Example Switch from user view to system view lt XE gt system view System View return to User View with Ctrl Z XE 1 22 Command Manual Basic Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 2 Ethernet Interface Configuration Commands Chapter 2 Ethernet Interface Configuration Commands 2 1 1 display interface ethernet Syntax display interface ethernet gigabitethernet Aux NULL interface number View Any view Parameter ethernet Displays state information
90. value is 0 or 1 1 10 Command Manual IP Performance and Application H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 IP Performance Configuration Commands Field Description The statistics of the received ICMP packets including the following e Total number of packets e ECHO response packets e Packets with unreachable destination e Packets with source address suppressed e Packets with route redirected e ECHO request packets e Route broadcasting packets ICMP packet input number e Route request packets e Timeout packets e Packets with wrong IP header e Timestamp request packets e Time tamp response packets e Information request packets e Information response packets e Mask request packets e Mask response packets e Packets of unknown types 1 1 11 display ip socket Syntax display ip socket socktype sock_type task_id socket_id View Any view Parameter sock_type Type of the socket 1 for tcp 2 for udp and 3 for raw ip task_id Task ID socket_id Socket ID Description Use the display ip socket command to display information of all current system sockets Example Display socket information of TCP type lt XE gt display ip socket socktype 1 SOCK_STREAM 1 11 Command Manual IP Performance and Application H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 IP Performance Configuration Commands Task VTYD 9 socketid 1 Proto 6 LA 0 0 0 0 23 FA 0 0 0 0 0 sndbuf 4096 r
91. view XE 1s gw gw01 1 1001 myring caller group friend XE 1s gw gw01 1 1001 myring friend 20 1 2 caller member Syntax caller member ong number undo caller member long number all View Caller group view Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 20 MyRing Service Parameter long number Number of the caller which can be digits from 0 to 9 letters A B C and D and signs and all Deletes all callers from the current caller group Description Use the caller member command to add a caller into the current caller group Use the undo caller member command to delete the specified member or all members from the current caller group Example Add a caller member 1002 into called group friend XE 1s gw gw01 1 1001 myring friend caller member 1002 20 1 3 default ring Syntax default ring media id undo default ring View MyRing view Parameter media id Media ID of the customized ringback tone to be played to a caller that is calling the specified called party Description Use the default ring command to set the media ID of the default customized ringback tone which is played to a subscriber calling the specified called party if the caller does not belong to any caller group Use the undo default ring command to delete the media ID corresponding to the default customized ringback tone Example Set the media ID of the default customized ringback tone of subscriber 100
92. 0 Cpld 0 0 Driver 2 0 Cpld 0 0 Command Manual Basic Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Basic Configuration Commands View Parameter System view None Description Example Use the enable command alias command to enable the command alias function Use the undo enable command alias command to disable the command alias function By default the command alias function is disabled Enable the command alias function XE enable command alias Command alias switch is on Disable the command alias function XE undo enable command alias Command alias switch is off 1 1 17 header Syntax header shell incoming login text undo header shell incoming login View System view Parameter login The banner to be displayed before the login prompt shell The banner of the user session establishment incoming The banner of the login interface text Contents of the banner Description Use the header command to set the banner to be displayed Use the undo header command to disable the function 1 14 Command Manual Basic Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Example If the banner properties are set the related information appears when the user logs into the XE IP PBX from the terminal Once the terminal connection is activated the login banner appears on the terminal If the login succeeds the banner shell appears The beginning and ending characters of the text
93. 0 IP PBX Chapter 4 File Management Commands 4 4 FTP Client Configuration Commands 4 4 1 ascii Syntax ascii View FTP client view Parameter None Description Use the ascii command to set the type of the transmitted data to ASCII format By default the data type is ASCII format Example Set the data type to ASCII format ftp ascii 200 Type set to A 4 4 2 binary Syntax binary View FTP client view Parameter None Description Use the binary command to set the type of transmitted data to binary format Example Set the data type binary format ftp binary 200 Type set to B 4 28 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 4 File Management Commands 4 4 3 bye Syntax bye View FTP client view Parameter None Description Use the bye command to terminate the connection to the remote FTP server and return to the user view Example Terminate the connection to the remote FTP server and return to the user view ftp bye lt XE gt 4 4 4 cd Syntax cd pathname View FTP client view Parameter pathname Directory name Description Use the cd command to change the operating path on the remote FTP server Example Change operating path to d temp ftp cd d temp 4 29 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 4 File Management Commands 4 4 5 cdup Syntax cdup View FTP client view Parameter None Description Use the cdup
94. 1 1001 srv switch adi on Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 7 Do Not Disturb Service Configuration Commands Chapter 7 Do Not Disturb Service Configuration Commands 7 1 Do Not Disturb Service Configuration Commands 7 1 1 dnd Syntax dnd View Subscriber number view Parameter None Description Use the dnd command to enter the do not disturb service view Example Enter the do not disturb service view XE 1s gw gw01 1 1001 dnd XE 1s gw gw01 1 1001 dnd 7 1 2 do not disturb Syntax do not disturb open close View Do not disturb service view Parameter open Enable the do not disturb service close Disable the do not disturb service Description Use the do not disturb command to enable the do not disturb service 7 1 Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 7 Do Not Disturb Service Configuration Commands Example Enable the do not disturb service XE 1s gw gw01 1 1001 dnd do not disturb open XE 1s gw gw01 1 1001 dnd 7 1 3 srv switch do not disturb Syntax srv switch do not disturb on off View Subscriber number view Parameter on Enables do not disturb service off Disables do not disturb service Description Use the srv switch do not disturb command to enable or disable do not disturb service By default do not disturb service is not enabled Example Enable do not disturb service XE 1s gw gw01 1 1001 srv switch d
95. 1 15 Command Manual System Management Chapter 1 Terminal Service and User Interface H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Configuration Commands undo stopbits View User interface view Parameter 1 5 Stop bit is 1 5 1 Stop bit is 1 2 Stop bit is 2 Description Use the stopbits command to set the stop bits on the user interface Use the undo stopbits command to restore the default setting that is 1 Only when the AUX interface works in asynchronous flow mode can the configuration take effect Example Set stop bit to 1 5 XE ui vty0 stopbits 1 5 1 1 23 user privilege Syntax user privilege level eve undo user privilege level View User interface view Parameter level Command level in the range of 0 to 3 Description Use the user privilege command to configure the command level that the login user on the current user interface can access Use the undo user privilege command to remove the current configuration The configuration takes effect at next login By default the default command level is set to 3 for console user interfaces and 0 for other user interfaces 1 16 Command Manual System Management Chapter 1 Terminal Service and User Interface H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Configuration Commands Example When the level of a user conflicts with the level of the user interface where the user logs in the former overrides the latter For example the command level of VTY O user interface is 2 however user 00
96. 1 to 18 in units of 10 ms video Sets the video codec type h263 Sets the video codec type as H263 h261 Sets the video codec type as H261 data Sets the data codec type t38fax Sets T38 faxing support Description Use the codec command to configure the codec type used when the gatekeeper initiates capability negotiation with a gateway device Use the undo codec command to restore the default codec type By default G 729 is adopted for audio codec the packetization time length is 30 ms and video codec and data faxing is not supported Example Set the codec type to G729 so that the gatekeeper uses to initiate capability negotiation with a gateway device Set the packetization time length to 40 ms and video codec to H261 XE 1s gw gw000 codec audio g729 packet length 4 XE 1s gw gw000 codec video h261 Command Manual Location Server Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Location Server Commands 1 1 10 codec LS OFFICEGROUP OFFICE view Syntax codec audio g7231 g729 pcma pemu packet length packet length video h261 h263 data t38fax undo codec audio video data View LS OFFICEGROUP OFFICE view Parameter audio Sets the audio codec type 97231 Sets the audio codec type as G 723 1 g729 Sets the audio codec type as G 729 pcma Sets the audio codec type as G 711 A law 64K pemu Sets the audio codec type as G 711 u law 64K packet length Packetization time length that rang
97. 1 to 9999 so that when a subscriber not in any caller group calls the subscriber 1001 the caller will hear the default customized ringback tone XE 1s gw gw01 1 1001 myring default ring 9999 Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 20 MyRing Service 20 1 4 myring Syntax myring View Subscriber number view Description Use the myring command to enter MyRing view Example Enter MyRing view XE 1s gw gw01 1 1001 myring XE 1s gw gw01 1 1001 myring 20 1 5 ring Syntax ring media id undo ring View Caller group view Parameter media id Media ID of the customized ringback tone to be played to callers in the current caller group Description Use the ring command to configure the media ID of the customized ringback tone to be played to the current caller group After this configuration when a member in this group calls the specified called party the caller will hear the customized ringback tone corresponding to the media ID but not the default customized ringback tone configured by the default ring command If a caller group is not configured with a specific ringback tone when its members dial the number of the specified called party they will hear the default customized ringback tone configured by the default ring command Use the undo ring command to restore the default ringback tone for the current caller group Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 20 MyRing Service
98. 2 TO MO iii al 2 4 LUN a eee ses teen A A 2 4 Command Manual Location Server Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Location Server Commands Chapter 1 Location Server Commands 1 1 Location Server Commands 1 1 1 authentication LS GW view Syntax authentication disable enable undo authentication View LS GW view Parameter disable Disables the gateway from performing authentication enable Enables the gateway to perform authentication Description Use the authentication command to set the authentication mode of a gateway Use the undo authentication command to restore the default setting Authentication is disabled by default Example Enable the gateway gw01 to perform the authentication XE 1s gw gw01 authentication enable 1 1 2 bearer capability LS GW view Syntax bearer capability audio video undo bearer capability View LS GW view Parameter audio Specifies audio type only video Specifies video and audio types 1 1 Command Manual Location Server Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Location Server Commands Description Use the bearer capability command to specify the bearer capability type for the gateway that is to specify the service type bearer capability type supported in the Q 931 header of setup messages sent to the terminating side By default the video type is adopted Example Specify the bearer capability type for the gateway to audio
99. 3 2 1 6 register port aai anaa a aAA E A ania 2 4 2 1 7 relative Capabillity saian EAA A AEAEE ERTA ER 2 5 Ka SIPs e EE 2 5 2 189 SUDSIMO SUM errar aaa 2 6 Chapter 3 Overload Protection csssccsseeeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeneeeeseaaesesneeeneeeeseaeseseeesaeeeeeeeeeeseaesaseeenseees 3 1 3 1 Overload Protection Configuration Commande eect eeeaeeteeeeeeseaeeesaaeeeeees 3 1 O ANNO 3 1 Command Manual Feature H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Table of Contents 3 1 2 display OVEMOAC EE 3 1 3 13 OVErlOAC PFOLSCIION iii tea 3 2 Sms iaa 3 3 A heel gee idee E 3 3 Chapter 4 VoIP RADIUS Accounting Configuration ccssscceseeeeeseeesseeseneeeeeseeesseeesesneneneeees 4 1 4 1 VoIP RADIUS Accounting Configuration Commande 4 1 All aaa Ee 4 1 NN ER 4 1 4 1 3 radius Shared key c ccccceseccceeeecceceeeecceeeseeeceeesesuececeseeceeeseeaaeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeneeaeenenees 4 2 4 1 4 radius SOUTCO A UTesS cooconnccccnnniccccnnoncccnnnnnecnnnnnnecnn nine crecer narran 4 2 4 1 5 radius timer response Hmeout nc cn anar acc Riin 4 3 NR 4 4 Command Manual Feature H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Number Substitution Chapter 1 Number Substitution 1 1 Number Substitution Configuration Commands 1 1 1 area code LS GW view Syntax area code region code nation code undo area code View LS GW view Parameter region code Area code nation code Country code Description Use the area code command to configure the area code and
100. 3 1 Emergency Call Configuration Commande essseeseesseeseseieeeieenrtetnsnntstnnstnnttnnnen nnn nnt 3 1 CN te Ener 3 1 3 1 2 emergency call number cococcconnccconoccnonncoconcno noc nana n cnn cnn anna cnn cnn nn 3 1 Chapter A Inter Group Call Restriction Configuration Commands occcconcccccnnonccnnnnnnncnnnnananennns 4 1 4 1 Inter Group Call Restriction Configuration Commands occcoccccnnnicinoconnncccnanccnnnrnnnnnnnanacn 4 1 4 1 1 CalElIMIDTOU E 4 1 A O 4 1 4 1 3 display location server cal Imt oroup nara nancccnn arca cnn 4 2 4 1 4 display location server cal mt oroup 4 3 4 1 5 display location server call limit gr0Up Dinde 4 3 A E E A E 4 5 4 1 7 limited call group subscriber number view 4 6 4 1 8 limited call group call limit group view 4 6 4 1 9 IMICO OO UP EE 4 7 4 1 10 srv switch oroup Jmted call 4 7 Chapter 5 Outgoing Call Authority Configuration Command cssseeneeseeseereeeeecenees 5 1 5 1 Outgoing Call Authority Configuration Commandes 5 1 A TT 5 1 5 1 2 display location server subscrber role nana cnn nana 5 1 5 1 3 display location server subscriber type nana nnnnr nana cnn rca 5 2 HAA SIV SWITCH Cada a ote ode ota meat ree eee 5 3 5 1 5 subscriber role LS view 5 4 5 1 6 subscriber role outgoing call control Service view 5 4 5 1 7 subscriber type LS view 5 5 5 1 8 subscriber type user role view 5 5 ERD ct biveceentetync Ed E E E ET 5 6 Command Manual
101. 3c 1 1 20 shell Syntax shell undo shell View User interface view Parameter None Description Use the shell command to enable terminal service on the user interface Use the undo shell command to remove the current setting By default terminal service is enabled on all the user interfaces Console port does not support the undo shell command Example Disable terminal service on the virtual terminals VTYs 0 through 4 XE user interface vty 0 4 1 14 Command Manual System Management Chapter 1 Terminal Service and User Interface H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Configuration Commands XE ui vty0 4 undo shell When a Telnet terminal logs on the following information is displayed connection refused by remote host 1 1 21 speed Syntax speed speed value undo speed View User interface view Parameter speed value Transmission rate in bps Description Use the speed command to set the transmission rate of the user interface Use the undo speed command to restore the default that is 9600 bps Only when the AUX interface works in asynchronous flow mode can the configuration take effect The transmission rates supported by the AUX port include e 300 bps e 600 bps e 1200 bps e 4800 bps e 9600 bps e 19200 bps e 38400 bps e 57600 bps e 115200 bps Example Set the transmission rate of the user interface to 19200 bps XE ui vty0 speed 19200 1 1 22 stopbits Syntax stopbits 1 5 1 2
102. 7 has the right to access command level 3 If 007 logs in from VTY 0 user interface he can access commands at level 3 and lower Set the command level that the user logging in from the interface VTY 0 to 2 XE ui vty0 user privilege level 2 After the user telnets to the H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX hereinafter referred to as XE IP PBX from vty 0 the terminal displays lt XE gt 1 1 24 user interface Syntax user interface type keyword user interface number ending user interface number View System view Parameter type keyword Type of a user interface user interface number The first user interface to be configured ending user interface number The last user interface to be configured Description Use the user interface command to enter single user interface view or multi user interface view Example Enter the view of user interface console 0 to configure the interface XE user interface console 0 XE ui console0 Enter the view of user interface vty 0 to configure the interface XE user interface vty 0 XE ui vty0 Enter the user interface VTY view to configure VTYs 0 through 3 XE user interface vty 0 3 XE ui vty0 3 1 17 Command Manual System Management Chapter 1 Terminal Service and User Interface H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Configuration Commands Enter user interface view to configure user interfaces 0 through 4 The types of the interfaces include console AUX and VTY The ac
103. 9 12 1 3 25 Command Manual Appendix H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX terminal logging terminal monitor terminal trapping tftp timeout callee timeout caller tracecall tracert transport LS GW view transport LS OFFICEGROUP OFFICE view ttl tunnel tunnelpeer type U undelete upgrade upgrade user user privilege user interface V verbose W web X A 18 Appendix A Command Index System Management System Management System Management System Management Process Server Configuration Process Server Configuration Process Server Configuration System Management Location Server Configuration Location Server Configuration Location Server Configuration Location Server Configuration Location Server Configuration Call Services System Management System Management System Management System Management System Management System Management System Management System Management 3 26 3 26 3 27 4 40 1 20 1 21 1 21 3 5 1 44 1 44 1 45 2 4 2 4 5 6 4 14 3 27 4 21 4 38 1 16 1 17 4 39 Command Manual Appendix H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Appendix A Command Index xe license System Management 8 1 Y Z A 19
104. ARP 2 1 4 display ip interface Syntax display ip interface jinterface type interface number View Any view Parameter interface type Interface type interface number Interface number Description Use the display ip interface command to display the current health of all interfaces Example Display the health of the interface Ethernet1 0 lt XE gt display ip interface Ethernet1 0 Ethernet1 0 current state UP Line protocol current state UP Internet Address 5 5 5 5 8 Broadcast address 0 0 0 0 The Maximum Transmit Unit 1500 bytes input packets 1231 bytes 57557 multicasts 1177 2 3 Command Manual IP Performance and Application H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 2 IP Application Configuration Commands output packets 0 bytes 0 multicasts O 2 1 5 ip host Syntax ip host hostname ip address undo ip host hostname p address View System view Parameter hostname Name of a host a character string in the range from 1 to 20 jjp address IP address corresponding to the host name can be class A B C or D Description Use the ip host command to configure the entries of the static domain name resolution table that is the host names and their corresponding IP addresses Use the undo ip host command to remove the mapping between a host name and an IP address Each hostname can have only one corresponding IP address The hostname can be comprised of lower and upper letters a to z an
105. AUX port Description Use the flow control command to configure the flow control mode Use the undo flow control command to restore the default that is none The configuration becomes effective only when the AUX interface works in the asynchronous flow mode When the system is producing information press lt Ctrl S gt to stop sending output to the screen or press lt Ctrl Q gt to resume the sending of output Example Configure software flow control in user interface view XE ui console0 flow control software 1 1 8 free user interface Syntax free user interface type name number View User view Parameter type name User interface type number Absolute relative user interface number Description Use the free user interface number command to clear the user interface with the number defined by the parameter number Use the free user interface type name number command to clear the user interface specified by number and by type name Command Manual System Management Chapter 1 Terminal Service and User Interface H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Configuration Commands Example Clear user interface 0 lt XE gt free user interface 0 1 1 9 history command max size Syntax history command max size size value undo history command max size View User interface view Parameter size value History command buffer size in the range of O to 256 It defaults to 10 meaning up to ten history commands can be stored Desc
106. B numbers Example Add target CFB number 8899 XE 1s gw gw01 1 1001 cfb cfb number 8889 10 6 3 srv switch cfb Syntax srv switch cfb on off View Subscriber number view Parameter on Enables CFB service off Disables CFB service Description Use the srv switch cfb command to enable or disable CFB service By default CFB service is enabled Example Enable CFB service XE 1s gw gw01 1 1001 srv switch cfb on 10 10 Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 11 Third Party Call Termination Configuration Commands Chapter 11 Third Party Call Termination Configuration Commands 11 1 Third Party Call Termination Configuration Commands 11 1 1 break Syntax break call index View LS view Parameter call index LS index corresponding to the terminated call in the range of 0 to 1599 for an XE 200 IP PBX and in the range of 0 to 15999 for an XE 2000 IP PBX Description Use the break command to terminate specified calls The administrator locates the terminated calls through the LS index Example Terminate calls on LS 13 XE 1s break 13 Break the call 13 11 1 2 display location server call list Syntax display location server call list number all View Any view Parameter number Displays the call lists of a specific caller or called number which consists of up to 31 characters Each character can be a digit 0 through 9 A B C D or all Display
107. C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 14 Third Party Call Control Service the start time which is in the range 1 to 1439 Here YYYY MM and DD refer to the year month and date respectively HH MM and SS represent hour minute and second respectively all Deletes all existing third party call control tasks Description Example Use the participant command to create a third party call control task The start time must be later than the current system time otherwise the configuration fails After a third party call control task is executed the XE IP PBX deletes this task automatically Use the undo participant command to delete the specified third party call control task or all third party call control tasks Specify to start a third party call control task at 00 00 00 on Oct 1 2002 The participant numbers are 100 and 200 respectively and the task ID is 2 XE 1s srv 3pcc participant 2 100 200 2005 10 1 0 0 0 Specify to start a third party call control task at 01 02 03 on the current day The participant numbers are 100 and 200 respectively and the task ID is 3 XE 1s srv 3pcc participant 3 100 200 1 2 3 Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 15 Callback On Busy Service Chapter 15 Callback On Busy Service 15 1 Callback On Busy Service Configuration Commands 15 1 1 cb Syntax cb View LS SRV view Parameter None Description Use the cb command to enter callback view Example Enter callback vi
108. Configuration 1 12 Process Server policy call interrupt time Configuration 1 13 policy num substitute Feature 1 6 Location Server policy random selection Configuration 1 34 Location Server policy select rule Configuration 1 34 policy substitute inherit Feature 1 7 Location Server policy unknown device admission Configuration 1 35 Location Server port LS GW view Configuration 1 36 Location Server port LS OFFICEGROUP OFFICE view Configuration 1 36 Location Server prefix LS GW view Configuration 1 37 Location Server prefix LS OFFICEGROUP view Configuration 1 38 prefix rule Prefix view Feature 1 8 Location Server priority LS GW view Configuration 1 38 Location Server priority LS OFFICEGROUP OFFICE view Configuration 1 39 Location Server priority prefix view Configuration 1 39 Location Server priority subscriber view Configuration 1 40 Location Server process server Configuration 1 41 A 12 Command Manual Appendix H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX promiscuous prompt ps config psgroup id LS GW view psgroup id LS PS view put pwd pwd pwd call password Q quit quit R radius server radius shared key radius source address radius timer response timeout ras port reboot redirect register port relative capability remotehelp rename repair tcp reset arp reset ip statistics reset location server statistics reset logbuffer A 13 Appendix A Command Index Basic Con
109. DEBUG_LEVEL_NOTIFICATION Operating properly but the environment slightly abnormal Information about key service flow Message header of the transmitted message Level 6 DEBUG_LEVEL_INFORMATIONAL Key processing flow of module function Memory allocating releasing Timeout message of normal timer Important information of MD5 algorithm Important information of Hash algorithm Level 7 DEBUG_LEVEL_DEBUGGING General flow information Extraction adding processing functions of optional IE IE list information of message message content Calling instruction of function entry instruction of returned value Example Enable all debugging options and set the debugging level of LS to 5 lt XE gt debugging location server all level 5 1 1 13 device status LS GW view Syntax device status forever up attachedps ps id normal suspend undo device status 1 11 Command Manual Location Server Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Location Server Commands View LS GW view Parameter forever up Sets a gateway to work in forever up state attachedps Specifies the PS that this forever up device belongs to ps id ID of the PS that this forever up device belongs to normal Sets a gateway to work in normal state suspend Sets a gateway to work in suspend state Description Use the device status command to set the state of a gateway Use the undo device status command to restore the default gateway state The device state defa
110. E gt display tcp status TCPCB Local Add port Foreign Add port State 028ca412 129 102 100 142 23 129 102 001 092 Established 028ca414 0 0 0 0 23 0 0 0 0 0 Listening The above information indicates that one TCP connection is present whose local IP address is 129 102 100 142 local port number is 23 and the remote IP address is 129 102 1 92 The information also indicates that a local server process is listening to port 23 1 2 3 telnet Syntax telnet host ip address service port View User view Parameter host ip address Hostname or IP address of the remote XE IP PBX in dotted decimal format service port ID of the TCP port through which the remote XE IP PBX provides Telnet services in the range of 0 to 65535 Description Use the telnet command to Telnet to another device through the current XE IP PBX If the service port argument is not specified the Telnet port number defaults to 23 1 19 Command Manual System Management Chapter 1 Terminal Service and User Interface H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Configuration Commands Example With this command you can easily telnet to another XE IP PBX from the current IP PBX for remote management Related command display tcp status Telnet from the current IP PBX that is XE1 to another XE IP PBX that is XE2 with an IP address of 129 102 0 1 lt XE gt telnet 129 102 0 1 Trying 129 102 0 1 Service port is 23 Connected to 129 102 0 1 lt XE2 gt Command Manual
111. E2000 SOCKET 8 TCP EVENT 1112118213 task co0 8 socketid 0 TCPCB 0x239b1c04 created 1 2 Command Manual IP Performance and Application H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 IP Performance Configuration Commands 0 13467370 XE2000 SOCKET 8 TCP EVENT 1112118213 task co0 8 socketid 1 state Closed changed to Syn_Sent 0 13467370 XE2000 SOCKET 8 TCP EVENT 1112118213 task co0 8 socketid 1 sending SYN seq 1724422400 LA 192 168 80 50 1033 FA 192 168 80 30 23 0 13467370 XE2000 SOCKET 8 TCP EVENT 1112118213 task co0 8 socketid 1 advertising MSS 1460 LA 192 168 80 50 1033 FA 192 168 80 30 23 Connected to 192 168 80 30 0 13467380 XE2000 SOCKET 8 TCP EVENT 1112118213 task co0 8 socketid 1 received MSS 1460 LA 192 168 80 50 1033 FA 192 168 80 30 23 0 13467380 XE2000 SOCKET 8 TCP EVENT 1112118213 task co0 8 socketid 1 state Syn_Sent changed to Established 1 1 3 debugging tcp md5 Syntax debugging tcp md5 undo debugging tcp md5 View User view Parameter None Description Use the debugging tcp md5 command to enable TCP connection md5 authentication debugging Use the undo debugging tcp md5 command to disable TCP connection md5 authentication debugging 1 3 Command Manual IP Performance and Application H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 IP Performance Configuration Commands Example Enable TCP connection m
112. HSC H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Command Manual Hangzhou H3C Technologies Co Ltd http Awww h3c com Manual Version T2 08192B 20070520 C 3 01 Copyright 2006 2007 Hangzhou H3C Technologies Co Ltd All Rights Reserved No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Hangzhou H3C Technologies Co Ltd Trademarks Hac HSC Aolynk 2 HCare ge TOP G Fore IRF NetPilot Neocean NeoVTL SecPro SecPoint SecEngine SecPath Comware Secware Storware NQA VVG V G V G PSPT XGbus N Bus TiGem InnoVision and HUASAN are trademarks of Hangzhou H3C Technologies Co Ltd All other trademarks that may be mentioned in this manual are the property of their respective owners Notice The information in this document is subject to change without notice Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents but all statements information and recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind express or implied To obtain the latest information please access http www h3c com Technical Support customer_service h3c com http www h3c com About This Manual Related Documentation In addition to this manual each H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX documentation set includes the following Manual Description It provides information for the hardware H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX
113. MA td ee ee 3 5 3 2 Information Processing Commande 3 7 3 2 1 display EE 3 7 3 2 2 display Info Centern aa aai a aaa aaa alioa 3 8 3 2 3 e Eege ele EE 3 9 3 2 4 display Schedule TEDOOt cvc ccucscieacescchbegutceekgrecne vecadewbi nde dnewbsructehyeecadewbiecuabbbegeeutoeles 3 11 3 2 5 display trapbutter izes cavern AL didi Bead dee ave ee 3 11 3 2 6 info center channel 3 12 3 2 7 info center console channel 3 13 3 2 8 info center enable a Acai iad koh A al A 3 13 3 2 9 info center logbuffer 2 2 eee cece ceteeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeaaeeeeeecaaeeeeaaeedeaeeseaeeeseaaeeeeaaeeninees 3 14 3 2 10 info center Joohost 3 15 3 2 11 info center lOghOSt source 3 16 3 2 12 info center monitor channel 3 17 3 2 13 info center snmp channel 3 17 3 2 14 info center source coocconcccnncccnocccnnccnnonnccnn arc 3 18 3 2 15 info center Hmesiamp cra nar nanc cnn 3 20 3 2 16 info center trapDUffer AAA 3 21 3 2 17 reset logbulffer iii iaa eee 3 22 ell EE 3 22 3 219 schedule reboot Stee EEN aca eet nae ae eta 3 22 3 2 20 scnedulo e lege EE 3 24 3 2 21 service MOdEM CaAIIDACK c ce ceecceeeteceeeeeeeaeeeeeaeceeeeeceaeeesaaeeseaaeseeeeessaeeeenaeeeenees 3 24 3 2 22 terminal debugging acc nnn cc cnn cnn nana 3 25 3 2 23 terminal Jogging 3 26 3 2 24 terminal MONON ci nn a eEEE aa ised abel 3 26 3 2 25 terminal trapping asians aaa a aiana dia atitea aA aAA atikan 3 27 e LEE 3 27 3 3 Digital Label Information Commande ssssssesssesssessisesiesrii
114. Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 4 Inter Group Call Restriction Configuration Commands By default the user is not added to any call limit group Example Add user 1000 to call limit group beijing XE ls gw curcfggw 1 1000 lcg limited call group beijing 4 1 9 limited group Syntax limited group call limit group name undo limited group call limit group name all View Call limit group view Parameter call limit group name Name of the call limit group which is case sensitive and consists of 16 characters at most all Removes all call limit groups Description Use the limited group command to add a call limit group Up to 64 call limit groups can be set Use the undo limited group command to remove specified or all call limit groups The reserved groups white table black table and normal table cannot be removed Example Add call limit group beijing XE ls clg limited group beijing 4 1 10 srv switch group limited call Syntax srv switch group limited call on off View Subscriber number view Parameter on Enables call limit group service off Disables call limit group service 4 7 Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 4 Inter Group Call Restriction Configuration Commands Description Use the srv switch group limited call command to enable or disable call limit group service By default call limit group service is enabled Example Enable c
115. NR Configuration Commande oocccccccconococonocananccononanonona nano cnn rra cnn 10 2 TODA A A dd E a adds E dd E 10 2 A ul el TE 10 3 10 2 3 SIVES WI CLA 560 gi sat sae A A geet 10 3 10 3 CFC Configuration Commandes 10 4 E Da A ied Aha ated nd a Rie i ne edie ey tied ae 10 4 AGT EE 10 4 10 3 3 srv switch Cf Caller a AE 10 5 10 4 CFT Configuration Commandes 10 6 10 4 1 cft Subscriber number view 10 6 10 4 2 cft CFT Service view ooccocnncconoccnoncccconccnnonn nono nnnnnn cnn rca 10 6 TOS Srv WI CC Aia 10 7 10 5 CFO Configuration Commande oonccccncccononinononcnoncnnnnn nono n crac 10 7 VOD Oi AAA ee eee 10 7 Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Table of Contents 10 5 2 te Enn 10 8 10 SeSFV SWITCHCTO E 10 8 10 6 CFB Configuration Commande nono narran cnc rra 10 9 ug IR S1 DE E EE 10 9 et Elle 10 9 10 0 3 SV S Wilco iaa 10 10 Chapter 11 Third Party Call Termination Configuration Commands ooooncccccnncccnnonacncnnnnaannnos 11 1 11 1 Third Party Call Termination Configuration Commande 11 1 ifs Wea li ele 11 1 11 1 2 display location server Call liSt cccceccceeseeceeeeeceeeeeseaeeeeaaeeseeeeeseaeeetaeeseneeesaes 11 1 Chapter 12 ONLY Service Configuration Commands ccsseccsseceeeseesseeeeseeeeeeeeesseaeenseeeeeees 12 1 12 1 ONLY Service Configuration Commande essessssseeesiessissriesrissriesissiesrinssrissrnesrnnsrnn 12 1 EC Ee ee E 12 1 EN e Mail iii ie 12 1 Chapter
116. P PBX Parameter None Description Use the stop command to disable the gatekeeper Disabling the gatekeeper will not disable the PS By default the gatekeeper is disabled Example Disable the gatekeeper XE ps gk stop 1 1 24 stop PS SIP view Syntax stop View PS SIP view Parameter None Description Use the stop command to disable the SIP Server Disabling the SIP server will not disable the PS By default the SIP server is disabled Example Disable the SIP server XE ps sip stop 1 1 25 stop PS view Syntax stop View PS view 1 19 Chapter 1 Process Server Command Manual Process Server Configuraiton H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Process Server Parameter None Description Use the stop command to disable the PS Disabling the PS will disable the gatekeeper and the SIP server Example Disable the PS XE ps stop SIP Server stopped Gatekeeper stopped Process Server stopped 1 1 26 timeout callee Syntax timeout callee ringing time time undo timeout callee ringing time View PS view Parameter ringing time Configures the maximum ringing duration allowed for each called party time Maximum ringing duration for each called party in the range of 25 to 50 seconds It defaults to 40 seconds Description Use the timeout callee ringing time command to configure the maximum ringing duration allowed for each called party Use the undo timeout callee ringing time comm
117. P related information of interface GigabitEthernet 0 0 lt XE gt display ip interface GigabitEthernet 0 0 GigabitEthernet0 0 current state Line protocol current state UP Internet Address is 192 168 80 50 Broadcast address 192 168 80 25 The Maximum Transmit Unit ip fast forwarding incoming ip fast forwarding outgoing input packets 1635 bytes 255090 output packets 625 bytes 264 ARP packet input number Request packet Reply packet Unknown packet TTL invalid packet number ICMP packet input number Echo reply Unreachable Source quench Rou ting redirect Echo request Rou Rou IP ter advert ter solicit Time exceed header bad Timestamp request Timestamp reply Information request Information reply Netmask request 1 9 UP 24 5 09 114 H H pa hop OS O O O O CO CO Gu O O Eu Oo O O Go Oo O Gu 1500 bytes packets state is Enabled packets state is Enabled multicasts 3 multicasts 0 Command Manual IP Performance and Application H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Netmask reply Unknown type DHCP packet deal mode global Chapter 1 IP Performance Configuration Commands 0 0 Table 1 1 Descriptions on the fields of the display ip interface command Field Description GigabitEthernet0 0 current state Current status of the interface Link layer protocol current state Link
118. PREFIX view Configuration 1 5 Location Server codec LS GW SUBSCRIBER view Configuration 1 6 Location Server codec LS OFFICEGROUP OFFICE view Configuration 1 8 Location Server codec LS OFFICEGROUP PREFIX view Configuration 1 9 command alias Basic Configuration 1 3 command privilege Basic Configuration 1 4 config Call Services 23 1 copy System Management 4 5 cpu Feature 3 1 D databits System Management 1 3 debugging System Management 3 1 debugging System Management 4 31 debugging aaa event System Management 5 1 debugging aaa primitive System Management 5 1 IP Performance and debugging arp packet Application 2 2 A 3 Command Manual Appendix H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Appendix A Command Index IP Performance and debugging ip Application 1 1 Location Server debugging location server Configuration 1 10 debugging modem System Management 7 1 Process Server debugging process server Configuration 1 1 debugging snmp agent System Management 6 1 IP Performance and debugging tcp event Application 1 2 IP Performance and debugging tcp md5 Application 1 3 IP Performance and debugging tcp packet Application 1 4 debugging telnet System Management 1 18 IP Performance and debugging udp packet Application 1 4 debugging vty System Management 1 3 default limit call time Call Services 13 1 default ring Call Services 20 2 delete System Management 4 6 delete System Management 4 31 delete static routes all Basic Configuration 3 1 Location Server
119. Parameter call signal ip address p address undo call signal ip address LS GW view ip address Sets the IP address of call signaling jjp address P address Description Use the call signal ip address command to configure the call signaling of the gateways registered with the LS Use the undo call signal ip address command to restore the default call signaling setting If the gateway does not support dynamic IP address report function or the administrator has disabled the function using the dynamic ip disable command in LS GW view and Command Manual Location Server Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Location Server Commands the gateway is in normal or forever up status you need to manually configure the call signaling address of the gateway on the XE IP PBX Then during registration the gateway reports its call signaling address to match the configured one By default the IP address of call signaling is reported dynamically by the gateway Example Set the call signaling IP address of the gateway gw001 to 169 254 10 1 XE 1s gw gw001 call signal ip address 169 254 10 1 1 1 6 call signal port Syntax call signal port port undo call signal port View LS GW view Parameter port Sets the port number of call signaling port Port number ranging from 1 to 65535 Description Use the call signal port command to configure the call signaling of the gateways registered with the LS Use the undo ca
120. Register Notify Confirm Notify the LS of successful registration Register Notify Reject Notify the LS of failed registration Register Notify Challenge Notify LS to send Challenge message Register Indication DeviceStatus The LS prompts the registration status success failure or redirect Register Notify BlankOut Notify the LS of expired registration Register Indication DeviceUpdate The LS prompts the update of the device configuration Call Query NumberAnalysis The PS queries the LS about number analysis Call Response NumberAnalysis The LS returns the result of number analysis Call Notify RingBack The PS notifies the subscriber to ring back Call Notify Redirect The PS notifies the LS to redirect the call Call Notify OffHook The PS notifies that the called has picked up the phone Command Manual Location Server Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Location Server Commands Field Description Call Notify Talk The PS notifies that the subscriber is on the call Call Notify Release Notify that the LS is ready to release the call Call Notify ReleaseComplete Notify that the call release completes Call Indication Refer Information of the calling and called parties Call Indication Release Indicate the PS to terminate the call Call Indication CallForward Indicate call forwarding Connect Notify
121. S signaling as a backup PS or as the PS in a redirect Use the undo ras port command to restore the default Example Configure the PS named ps0 to transmit receive RAS signaling on port 500 when functioning as a backup PS or the PS in a redirect XE 1s ps ps0 ras port 500 2 1 6 register port Syntax register port port undo register port View LS OFFICEGROUP OFFICE view Parameter port Number of the port through which the PS receives registration messages in the range of 1 to 65535 Description Use the register port command to configure the registration port for PS backup The registration port for PS backup is the port that the secondary PSs use to receive the REGISTER message Use the undo register port command to restore the default registration port By default the backup registration port is port 5060 Example Set the backup registration port the secondary PSs to 6000 XE 1s og 0g01 of1 register port 6000 2 4 Command Manual Feature H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 2 Backup and Load Sharing 2 1 7 relative capability Syntax relative capability value undo relative capability View LS PS view Parameter value Relative capability of the PS an integer in the range of 1 to 100 It defaults to 1 Description Use the relative capability command to configure the relative capability of the PS Use the undo relative capability command to restore the default relative capability of the PS The relative capability o
122. S GW view Parameter table identifier Substitute table identifier 1 to 7 characters all Removes the binding of all substitute tables 1 13 Command Manual Feature H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Number Substitution Description Use the substitute command to bind a substitute table to the gateway device Use the undo substitute command to unbind the specified or all substitute tables from the gateway You can bind up to eight substitute tables to a gateway By default no substitute table is bound Example Bind the substitute table named table1 to gateway gw01 XE 1s gw gw01 substitute tablel 1 1 18 substitute LS OFFICEGROUP view Syntax substitute table identifier undo substitute table identifier all View LS OFFICEGROUP view Parameter table identifier Substitute table identifier 1 to 7 characters all Removes the binding of all substitute tables Description Use the substitute command to bind a substitute table to the office group Use the undo substitute command to unbind the specified or all substitute tables from the office group You can bind up to eight substitute tables to each office group By default no substitute table is bound Example Bind a substitute table named table1 to office group og1 XE 1s og 0g1 substitute tablel 1 1 19 substitute LS view Syntax substitute table identifier 1 14 Command Manual Feature H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Number Substituti
123. Server is running now 2 1 4 stop Syntax stop View GUI configuration view Parameter None Command Manual System Management Chapter 2 GUI Server Configuration and Mana H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Description Use the stop command to disable the GUI server Example Disable the GUI server XE2000 gui stop GUI Server is stopped now XE2000 gui 2 1 5 reset ual gement Commands Syntax reset ual View GUI configuration view Parameter None Description Use the reset ual command to restore the user information list to the initial state That is it is to delete all accounts created by the administrator so that only the default account is contained in the list Note to disable the GUI server before you run this command Example Restore the user information list to the initial state XE2000 gui reset ual NOTICE This command will reset the GUI User Accout List to its initial status which contains only the default accout Continue Y N y User Accout List has been reset XE2000 gui 2 1 6 web Syntax web start stop View GUI configuration view 2 3 Command Manual System Management Chapter 2 GUI Server Configuration and Mana H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX gement Commands Parameter start Enable the Web service stop Disable the Web service Description Use the web command to enable disable the Web service By default the Web service is disabled Example Enable the Web service XE2000
124. Use the undo group config command to delete the specified notification group or all notification groups When a notification group is configured it configuration is deleted as well Example Create a notification group named group1 and enter its notification group configuration view XE 1s srv gn group config groupl XE 1s srv gn gc groupl Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 23 Group Notification Service 23 1 7 join Syntax join group id undo join group id all View Notify config view Parameter group id ID of the notification receiver group all Deletes all groups that receive the current notification Description Use the join command to specify a group as a notification receiver group so that all members in it can receive the group notification Use the undo join command to disable all members of the specified group or of all groups from receiving the group notification Example Enable all members of the group named group1 to receive the group notification notify1 XE ls srv gn nc notifyl join groupl 23 1 8 member Syntax member number undo member number all View Group config view Parameter number Number of the subscriber to be added to the current group all Deletes all subscribers in the current notification group Description Use the member command to add a subscriber to the current group A subscriber belongs to only one group Comm
125. X Chapter 2 Media Resource Configuration Commands Chapter 2 Media Resource Configuration Commands 2 1 Media Resource Management Configuration Commands 2 1 1 display media server media resource Syntax display media server media resource media id media file path all View Any view Parameter Media id Media resource ID 32 integers ranging from 0 to 2147483647 Note that digits O to 10000 are media resource IDs reserved by the system and cannot be deleted randomly media file path Full path of the media resource files to be displayed case sensitive consisting of 1 to 255 characters all Displays all media resource information Description Use the display media server media resource command to display the media resource information on the MS Example Display all media resource information XE ls display media server media resource all 1001 Chinese G7lla wav 1001 wav The information above includes from top down the media resource ID the language type of the media resource the media format and the full path of the media resource 2 1 2 display media server media resource predefine Syntax display media server media resource predefine format language 2 1 Command Manual Media Server H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 2 Media Resource Configuration Commands View Any view Parameter format Displays the predefined media format type language Displays the predefined language type Descr
126. XE ls clg 4 1 2 change Syntax change old group name new group name View Call limit group view Parameter old group name Old name of the call limit group which is case sensitive and consists of 16 characters at most new group name New name of the call limit group which is case sensitive and consists of 16 characters at most 4 1 Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 4 Inter Group Call Restriction Configuration Commands Description Use the change command to change the name of a call limit group Example Rename the call limit group beijing as beijing group XE ls clg change beijing beijing group 4 1 3 display location server call limit group Syntax display location server call limit group View Any view Parameter None Description Use the display location server call limit group command to display lists of all call limit groups Example Display lists of all call limit groups XE ls clg display location server call 1limit group normal table black table white table shanghai beijing Note In information for the display location server call limit group command the normal table black table and white table are the reserved call limit groups Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 4 Inter Group Call Restriction Configuration Commands 4 1 4 display location server call limit group Syntax display location server call limit group call limit group1 c
127. ace with specified interface the interface type can only be Ethernet or virtual Ethernet and only the dynamic entries of the interface can be deleted Related command arp static display arp Delete the dynamic entries in the ARP mapping table of the interface Ethernet1 0 lt XE gt reset arp interface Ethernet1 0 Media Server Command Manual Media Server H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Table of Contents Table of Contents Chapter 1 MS Configuration Commande cccssccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeceseeeeneeeeeeeesseseeenseeeeeeeeeseaeseneeeenseees 1 1 1 1 MS Configuration Commande 1 1 1 1 1 display location server Media SeIver coocccccnniccccnnnocccnnnnoncccnnnrrn cnn nr crac 1 1 1 1 2 display media server location server siatus 1 2 1 1 3 heartbeat password oerien e aAA A AEE AEA A ERE A ETA E RRAS 1 3 W314 l nga AA anen ta Sau tas eas eat ase OA 1 3 LOIS MOS iria ita loteria 1 4 1 16 MEA SV ici a ete ieee cian eect 1 4 Ped een e DEE 1 5 TAS State t apa eo debes Ae te ae a rl ee e ee Abela 1 5 US BET sess td ae Adare We A veoh ded da ear ed dant 1 6 Chapter 2 Media Resource Configuration Commands ccsssccsseeceeseeesseeseseeeeeseeeseseesesnenenseees 2 1 2 1 Media Resource Management Configuration Commande 2 1 2 1 1 display media server media reSource oo ee eeeeeeee eee ee ee eeee ee ee tance ee taeeeeeetaeeeettaeeeeeeea 2 1 2 1 2 display media server media resource Predefine ccccccceeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeee
128. acters Description Use the snmp agent group command to configure a new SNMP group that is to specify the authorities for the group Use the undo snmp agent group command to delete a specified SNMP group By default the snmp agent group group name v3 command defines no authentication and no encryption Related command snmp agent mib view snmp agent usm user Example Create an SNMPv3 group known as Johngroup XE snmp agent group v3 Johngroup 6 1 12 snmp agent local engineid Syntax snmp agent local engineid engineid undo snmp agent local engineid View System view Parameter engineid Character string of the engine ID It must be a hexadecimal number within the length from 10 to 64 Description Use the snmp agent local engineid command to configure engine ID for the local SNMP entity Use the undo snmp agent local engineid command to remove the current settings and restore the default By default the engine ID of the device is enterprise number device information of the company Each device determines the device information It can be either the IP address MAC address or the user defined hexadecimal number string Related command snmp agent usm user Example Configure the name of the local device to 12345 6 10 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 6 SNMP Configuration Commands XE snmp agent local engineid 12345 6 1 13 snmp agent mib view Syntax snmp agent mib vi
129. acters up to the cursor CTRL_Y Delete all characters after the cursor CTRL_Z Return to the user view CTRL_ Kill incoming connection or redirect connection KSC S ove the cursor one word back ESC_D Delete remainder of word ESC_F ove the cursor forward one word ESC_N ove the cursor down a line ESC_P ove the cursor up a line ESC_ lt Specify the beginning of clipboard ESC_ gt Specify the end of clipboard 1 1 19 language mode Syntax language mode chinese english View User view Parameter None Description Use the language mode command to toggle the language modes of command line interface CLI The default language mode is English Example Switch from English mode to Chinese mode lt XE gt language mode chinese Change language mode confirm Y N ly 1 1 20 lock Syntax lock View User view Command Manual Basic Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Basic Configuration Commands Parameter None Description Use the lock command to lock the current user interface to prevent unauthorized access User interfaces include CON port AUX port and VTY virtual terminal interface Once the lock command is entered the system will prompt you to enter the password of screen saver and confirm the password if one password is consistent with another the system will be locked If you want to enter the system afterwards you must press lt Enter gt and enter the password
130. address of the MS Heartbeat Password Heartbeat password between the MS and LS Command Manual Media Server H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 MS Configuration Commands Field Description Language Language type supported by the MS Status Status of the MS 1 1 2 display media server location server status Syntax View Parameter display media server location server status Any view None Description Example Use the display media server location server status command to display the status of the LS that manages the current MS Display the status of the LS that manages the current MS XE ls display media server location server status Spach SSS Location Server Information Mode Local Ip address Pel 1 31313579 MS HeartBeat Key phoenix Heartbeat Status Authorized Table 1 2 Description on the fields of the display media server location server status command Field Description Mode LS mode of the MS Ip address IP address of the LS that manages the current MS MS HeartBeat Key Heartbeat password between the MS and LS Heartbeat Status Current MS status Command Manual Media Server H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 MS Configuration Commands 1 1 3 heartbeat password Syntax heartbeat password password undo heartbeat password View MS view Parameter password Heartbeat password between the MS and the LS case sensitive containing 1 to 16 charac
131. aeseseeeneeeeseneseseaeeneneeenees 17 1 17 1 Call Intervention Service Configuration Commande 17 1 TZ A ASSTVESWITCH Clicr A dates ec ate eee tds aed eat ee 17 1 Chapter 18 Dialing Test ServiCe csscccseeeceseeseeeeeeeeeeeeneeseeeseseeeenseeeseesescaeeaseeeeneeeesneaeenseaeeees 18 1 18 1 Dialing Test Operation Commande 18 1 EE ET 18 1 Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Table of Contents Chapter 19 Time Announcement Service cssccceeeeeseeeseeeeeseeeeneeeeeeeeeesneeeenseeeseeeseseaeenseeeeees 19 1 19 1 Time Announcement Service Configuration Commande errereen 19 1 19 1 1 srv switch ANNOUNCE 20 eeee eect ee eeee cece eee aeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeaeeesaaeeseaeeseeeeseaeeseaeeseaeeeeaes 19 1 Chapter 20 MyRing Service ccccscccsseeeeeneeeeeeeesnaeeeeneeeeeeeeseaeseneeeeneeeeseeseseaesaseeeeseeeseseaeenseeeeees 20 1 20 1 MyRing Service Configuration Commande nana nano cc ronca nano nana 20 1 20 11 Callr Qroup ici ai 20 1 20 12 Caller Me MD iii E ata 20 1 20 1 3 default ring iii A Ata 20 2 AE WC e EE 20 3 20 RS TMG DEE 20 3 DT en Rut d lu E 20 4 Chapter 21 CPCP Service iia cc siscasecdeteesnecysttasreccevedsddssuaerssceteened 21 1 21 1 CPCP Service Configuration Commande oooccccnccconocanonoconancnnnonanano nn nnn cnn nr naar rn 21 1 ENER Ne Be SE DEE 21 1 Chapter 22 Automatic Operator Service c csseccseeeeeeseeesseeeeseeeenseeeeeeesseseeeeeseeeseneseseaesneneeeeees 22 1 22 1 Automatic Opera
132. al System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 4 File Management Commands Example Use the undo local user ftp directory to remove the authorization By default the system does not authorize FTP users to use the directory The command can be used with the local user password command Related command local user password Authorize a user XE whose password is h3c in cipher text to access the directory flash h3c lst XE local user XE password cipher h3c XE local user XE ftp directory flash h3c lst 4 3 7 local user password Syntax View Parameter local user ocal user password simple cipher password undo local user ocal user System view local user and password Username and the password By default no password is required Username is up to 80 letters and case insensitive the password is no more than 16 letters simple Displays the password in simple text cipher Displays the password in cipher text Description Example Use the local user password command to add a user and configure the user s password Use the undo local user command to delete a user By default the user database of the system is empty The user database can be used for CHAP authentication and PAP authentication It is recommended to display the password in cipher text If only local user ocal user command is entered there will be no respond and the new user named local user will not be generated so the
133. all limit group service XE 1s gw gw01 1 1001 srv switch group limited call on 4 8 Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 5 Outgoing Call Authority Configuration Commands Chapter 5 Outgoing Call Authority Configuration Commands 5 1 Outgoing Call Authority Configuration Commands 5 1 1 cba Syntax cba View Subscriber number view Parameter None Description Use the cba command to enter outgoing call authority service view Example Enter outgoing call control service view XE 1s gw gw01 1 1001 cba XE 1s gw gw01 1 1001 cba 5 1 2 display location server subscriber role Syntax display location server subscriber role role all View Any view Parameter role User role which is case sensitive and consists of 32 characters at most all Displays all user role information 5 1 Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 5 Outgoing Call Authority Configuration Commands Description Use the display location server subscriber role command to display all the user number types that the user role can call Example Display all the user number types that user role sales can call XE ls ssbr sales display location server subscriber role sales role default role sales mobile Display the user number types that all user roles can call XE ls ssbr rnd display location server subscriber role all role sales mobile role rnd rnd phone Informat
134. all limit group2 callin callout subscriber View Any view Parameter call limit group1 Name of the call limit group which is case sensitive and consists of 16 characters at most call limit group2 Name of the call limit group which is case sensitive and consists of 16 characters at most callin Displays all the groups that can call the current group callout Displays all the groups that the current group can call subscriber Displays all member numbers in the call limit group Description Use the display location server call limit group command to display e All member numbers in the call limit group e All outgoing call limit groups for the current group e All incoming call limit groups for the current group e The call limit relationship between two groups Example Display the call limit relationship between groups beijing and shanghai lt XE gt display location server call limit group beijing shanghai Group beijing CAN T call Group shanghai Group shanghai CAN call Group beijing 4 1 5 display location server call limit group bind Syntax display location server call limit group bind View Any view Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 4 Inter Group Call Restriction Configuration Commands Parameter None Description Use the display location server call limit group bind command to display the call limit relationship between all call limit groups Example Display the
135. aller access number callee access number interval of callee View Notify config view Parameter local Specifies the group notification mode Keyword local is for local group notification remote Specifies the group notification mode Keyword remote is for remote group notification media id Media ID of the media file to be played to called subscribers in the notification receiver group caller access number Access code used by the notification deliverer The maximum length of the access code is 31 characters which can be digits from 0 to 9 letters A B C and D and signs and callee access number Access code used by the receiver group members The maximum length of the access code is 31 characters which can be digits from 0 to 9 letters A B C and D and signs and interval of callee Interval at which the receiver group members are recalled when a call fails ranging from 1 to 30 minutes and defaulting to 1 Description Use the config command to configure basic parameters of a local group notification Being in the local or remote mode a group notification needs to be configured with the following basic parameters e local Media ID of the file that the task plays access code that receivers use to hear the notification and interval at which the notification is sent again if the notification fails Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 23 Group Notification Service Example e remot
136. amp D Hangzhou H3C Technology Co Ltd the information of physical location is Hangzhou China and the version is SNMPv3 Related command display snmp agent sys info Set the system maintenance information as call Operator at 010 82882488 XE snmp agent sys info contact call Operator at 010 82882488 6 1 16 snmp agent target host Syntax View Parameter snmp agent target host trap address udp domain X X X X udp port port number params securityname security string v1 v2c v3 authentication privacy undo snmp agent target host X X X X securityname security string System view trap Specifies the host as the trap host address Specifies the address of the target host to which the SNMP message transmits udp domain Specifies that the transmission domain of the target host is based on UDP X X X X IP address of the host udp port Specifies the port port number Specifies the number of the port that receives the trap packet params Specifies the information of the logging host that generates SNMP messages securityname Specifies the community name of SNMPv1 v2c or the username of SNMPvs security string Community name of SNMPv1 SNMPv2c or the username of SNMPv3 in the range of 1 to 32 characters Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 6 SNMP Configuration Commands v1 SNMPv1 v2c SNMPv2c v3 SNMPv3 authentication Indicates authentication with th
137. ample Enable CFNR service XE 1s gw gw01 1 1001 srv switch cfnr on 10 3 CFC Configuration Commands 10 3 1 cfc Syntax cfc View Subscriber number view Parameter None Description Use the cfc command to enter call forwarding based on the caller number CFC service view Example Enter CFC service view XE 1s gw gw01 1 1001 cfc XE 1s gw gw01 1 1001 cfc 10 3 2 cf caller Syntax cf caller caller number forward number undo cf caller ca ler number all Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 10 Call Forwarding Configuration Commands View Parameter CFC service number caller number Caller number which consists of up to 31 characters which can be digits from 0 to 9 letters A B C and D and signs and forward number Target CFC number which consists of up to 31 characters which can be digits from O to 9 letters A B C and D and signs and all Removes all target CFC items Description Example Use the cf caller command to configure or modify CFC items Up to 5 CFC forward numbers can be configured Use the undo cf caller command to remove specified or all CFC items Set to forward the calls from 1001 to 8801 XE 1s gw gw01 1 1001 cfc cf caller 1001 8801 10 3 3 srv switch cf caller Syntax srv switch cf caller on off View Subscriber number view Parameter on Enables CFC service off Disables CFC service Description Use
138. ample Enter Chinese language view XE ma language Chinese XE ma Chinese 2 1 5 media ability Syntax media ability View System view Parameter None Description Use the media ability command to enter media ability view 2 3 Command Manual Media Server H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 2 Media Resource Configuration Commands Example Enter media ability view XE media ability XE ma 2 1 6 set media Syntax set media media id media file path undo set media media id all View Enter format view Parameter media id Media resource ID in the range of 0 to 2147483647 The range of 0 to 10000 is reserved for system use You are not recommended to change the IDs in this range media file path Path excluding the drive letter and name of the media resource file containing 1 to 255 case sensitive characters all Deletes all the media resource IDs Description Use the set media command to configure the media resource ID supported by the current media resource format Use the undo set media command to delete the specified media resource ID or all the media resource IDs supported by the current media resource format Example Configure a media source in the G711a format in the Chinese mode The media resource ID is 10001 The media resource file is in the flash voice_resource directory The file name is 10001 wav XE ma Chinese G71la set media 10001 voice_resource 10001 wav Command Manua
139. ample Use the modem auto answer command to set the answer mode to auto answer Use the undo modem auto answer command to restore the default answer mode that is manual answer This command is only applicable to the AUX port not to the console port When using modem dial up for connection you must first set the modem parameters on the related user interface Set the answer mode to auto answer XE ui aux0 modem auto answer 1 1 14 modem timer answer Syntax modem timer answer seconds undo modem timer answer View User interface view Parameter seconds Timeout time in the range of 1 to 60 seconds Description Use the modem timer answer command to set the timeout waiting for the carrier signal after off hook when setting up an inbound connection Use the undo modem timer answer command to restore the default setting that is 30 seconds This command is only applicable to the AUX port not to the console port Example Set timeout time to 40 seconds XE ui aux0 modem timer answer 40 1 1 15 parity Syntax parity none even odd mark space 1 10 Command Manual System Management Chapter 1 Terminal Service and User Interface H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Configuration Commands undo parity View User interface view Parameter none No parity check even Even parity check odd Odd parity check mark Mark check space Space check Description Use the parity command to set the parity bit of t
140. and Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 23 Group Notification Service Use the undo member command to delete the specified subscriber or all subscribers from the current group Example Add subscriber number 1001 to group group1 XE ls srv gn gc groupl member 1001 23 1 9 notify config Syntax notify config notify id undo notify config notify id all View Group notify view Parameter notify id ID of the group notification all Deletes all group notifications Description Use the notify config command to enter group notify view or create a group notification and enter its group notify view if the specified ID does not exist Example Create a group notification named notify1 and enter its group notify view XE 1s srv gn notify config notifyl XE 1s srv gn nc notifyl 23 1 10 shutdown Syntax shutdown notify id View Group notify view Parameter notify id ID of the group notification to be cancelled Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 23 Group Notification Service Description Example Use the shutdown command to cancel a started group notification Note A group notification cannot be canceled rightly after it is enabled Specifically the shutdown command can be executed at least five minutes after thee start command is executed Cancel the group notification named notify1 XE 1s srv gn shutdown notifyl 23 1 11 start Syntax
141. and to restore the default maximum ringing duration allowed for each called party Example Configure the maximum ringing duration for a single called party to 50 seconds XE200 ps timeout callee ringing time 50 Command Manual Process Server Configuraiton H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Process Server 1 1 27 timeout caller Syntax timeout caller wait connect time undo timeout caller wait connect View PS view Parameter wait connect Configures the maximum duration that the calling party waits for the called party to pick up the phone time Maximum waiting time in the range of 30 to 100 seconds It defaults to 90 seconds Description Use the timeout caller wait connect command to configure the maximum duration that the calling party waits for the called party to pick up the phone Use the undo timeout caller wait connect command to restore the default Example Set the maximum duration that the calling party waits for the called party to pick up the phone to 60 seconds XE200 ps timeout caller wait connect 60 1 1 28 tracecall Syntax tracecall number undo tracecall View PS view Parameter number Number to be traced ranging within 31 bits Description Use the tracecall command to trace calls related to the specified number and print the debugging information on the caller and callee related to the number Command Manual Process Server Configuraiton H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Process Server
142. annel number 0 channel name console Monitor channel number 1 channel name monitor SNMP Agent channel number 5 channel name snmpagent Log buffer enabled max buffer size 1024 current buffer size 256 current messages 89 channel number 4 channel name logbuffer dropped messages 0 overwrote messages 0 Trap buffer enabled max buffer size 1024 current buffer size 256 current messages 0 channel number 3 channel name trapbuffer dropped messages 0 overwrote messages 0 Information timestamp setting log date trap date debug boot Sent messages 89 Received messages 89 3 2 3 display logbuffer Syntax View Parameter display logbuffer size size value summary level evel number begin include exclude string Any view size Specifies the number of information entries in log buffer size value Displays the number of information entries 3 9 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 3 System Maintenance and Management Commands summary Summary of the log buffer level Displays the specified level of information only level number Specifies the level in the range of 1 to 8 Uses the regular expression to filter the displayed information begin Displays the information beginning with specific string include Displays the information containing the string exclude Displays the information without the string string Regular express
143. apter 1 Number Substitution all Deletes substitute rules Description Use the sscb rule command to configure a substitute rule for the subscriber line Use the undo ssscb rule command to delete the specified or all substitute rules for the subscriber line You can configure up to two substitute rules for one voice subscriber line each serving the purpose of calling number substitution called number substitution or both as shown in the following table Table 1 3 Configure substitute rules Operation Command Substitute the calling numbers that sscb rule rule tag caller input format match the input calling number pattern output format before after Substitute the called numbers that sscb rule rule tag callee input format match the input called number pattern output format before after Substitute both calling and called numbers in a call provided they match the input calling and called number patterns respectively sscb rule rule tag caller input format output format callee input format output format before after Example Configure two substitute rules for subscriber line 1 of gateway gw01 XE2000 1s gw gw01 1 8801 sscb rule 0 callee 63 OS as before XE2000 1s gw gw01 1 8801 sscb rule 1 caller 88 Dis teens pe callee OS Pere ace Es after 1 1 17 substitute LS GW view Syntax substitute table identifier undo substitute table identifier all View L
144. ard command to display the contents of the clipboard Example Display the contents of the system clipboard lt XE gt display clipboard aT Clipboard 5 5 2 3 5 ip route 10 1 0 0 255 0 0 0 eth 0 1 1 7 display clock Syntax display clock View Any view Parameter None Description Use the display clock command to display the current system date and time Command Manual Basic Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Basic Configuration Commands Example If the system time is not correct you can use the clock datetime command to make adjustments Related command clock datetime Display the current system date and time lt XE gt display clock 15 50 45 UTC Mon 2003 02 12 1 1 8 display command alias Syntax display command alias View Any view Parameter None Description Use the display command alias command to view the current command alias settings Note to enable command alias before using this command Related command enable command alias Example Display the current command alias settings XE enable command alias Command alias switch is on XE display command alias index alias commandkey 0 show display 1 1 9 display cpu usage for user Syntax View display cpu usage for user configuration number offset verbose from device Any view Command Manual Basic Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Basic Configuration Command
145. area code LS OFFICEGROUP view 1 1 1 1 3 area code substitute LS GW view 1 2 1 1 4 area code substitute LS OFFICEGROUP view 1 3 1 1 5 display location server number substitute oooocooonnncccnnnnancconnnonccnnnnarccnnanarc conan 1 3 1 1 6 display location server substitute ooononoccccnnnociccnnnocccnnnnorcccnnnrrccn nn rca 1 4 a feet e e EE 1 4 1 1 8 NUMber SUDSTITUTS AA 1 5 1 1 9 policy area code Substitute AA 1 6 1 1 10 policy num substitute 2 eee cece cete eee ee tenet eee ae ee ano cc sae ee eaaeeeeaaeseeeesaeeesaaeeneneeeea 1 6 1 1 11 policy subettte mhert A 1 7 1 1 12 prefix rule Prefix view ooooooconccononcconoccnonnccconccnnnncnn no cnn nncn nana nn 1 8 Tet PB rule LS GWVISW EE 1 9 1 1 14 rule LS OFFICEGROUP view 1 10 1 1 15 rule Substitute table view 1 11 1 1 16 sscb rule Subscriber view 1 12 1 1 17 substitute LS GW view 1 13 1 1 18 substitute LS OFFICEGROUP view 1 14 1 1 19 substitute LS view 1 14 1 1 20 substitute Prefix view 1 15 1 1 21 substitute Subscriber view 1 16 Chapter 2 Backup and Load Sharing ccccscccssecceseeeeeeeeeseeeseseeeeneeeeeseaeseseeeneeeeseseeeseaesaseeneneeees 2 1 2 1 Backup and Load Sharing Configuration Commands cnccccnccnnnnicnnocnnnnccnancnnanrnnnnn cnn 2 1 2 ale NON 2 1 EE 2 1 2 1 3 psgroup id LS GW view 2 2 2 1 4 psgroup id LS PS View ooooocconncconoccnoncccnonccononnnn nn n nano ccnnn cnn rana cnn ran nan 2 3 LO TAS Odia E E 2
146. arm clock This alarm clock rings on the specified date and time The related command syntax is alarm date time If no specified date is configured this type of alarm clock task goes off only once at the specified time on the current day The related command syntax is alarm time once Note that the specified alarm time must be later than the current time e Cyclic alarm clock This type of alarm goes off at the specified time every day The related command line is alarm time cycle Use the undo alarm command to delete the existing alarm clock settings Example Set a one off alarm clock task that goes off at December 30 2005 12 00 for the subscriber 1001 XE 1s gw gw01 1 1001 alarm alarm 2005 12 30 12 00 Set a cyclic alarm clock task that goes off at 12 00 every day for the subscriber 1002 XE 1s gw gw01 1 1002 alarm Jalarm 12 00 cycle Set a one off alarm clock task that goes off at 14 00 in the current day for the subscriber 1003 XE 1s gw gw01 1 1003 alarm alarm 14 00 once 26 1 3 srv switch alarm Syntax srv switch alarm on off View Subscriber number view Parameter on Enables the alarm clock service off Disables the alarm clock service Description Use the srv switch alarm command to enable or disable the alarm clock service By default the alarm clock service is disabled Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 26 Alarm Clock Service Example Enable the alarm
147. ary reservation for CLIR service XE 1s gw gw01 1 1001 srv switch tcir on 8 4 Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 9 Password Call Configuration Commands Chapter 9 Password Call Configuration Commands 9 1 Password Call Configuration Commands 9 1 1 pwd call password Syntax pwd call password password undo pwd call password View Subscriber number view Parameter password Password for making calls when the password call service is enabled It consists of up to eight characters which can be digits from 0 to 9 and letters A B C and D Description Use the pwd call password command to set the password for making password calls Use the undo pwd call password command to restore the default password By default the password for making password calls is 1234 Example Set the password for making password calls to 888888 XE 1s gw gw01 1 1001 pwd call password 888888 9 1 2 srv switch pwd call Syntax srv switch pwd call on off View Subscriber number view Parameter on Enables password call service 9 1 Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 9 Password Call Configuration Commands off Disables password call service Description Use the srv switch pwd call command to enable or disable password call service By default password call service is not enabled Example Enable password call service XE 1s gw gw01 1 1001 srv switch pwd cal
148. as Number 0 Device Priority 10 Registration Circle 180 sec Authentication disable Password GATEWAY Area Code Substitute enable Nation Code Region Code pe ee oe ee Dynamic Information Registration Status offline Registration Transport auto Dynamic Alias Number 0 Dynamic Alias Check Sum 0 Resource Can Use Yes Registration Call Identifier RM handle EFEEFEEF CAI handle LEE EES Notification Bitmap Confirm 1 Reject 1 Blankout 1 Challenge 0 Indication Bitmap Confirm 0 Reject O Blankout D Challenge 0 Attached Process Server Table 1 1 Description on the fields of the display location server gateway all command Field Description Identifier Identifier of the gateway LoadShare Load sharing state Command Manual Location Server Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Location Server Commands Field Description SubsLine Capacity of voice subscriber lines Identifier of the PS group to which the gateway PsGroupID belongs Device Type Type of the gateway Ip address IP address of the gateway Call lp address IP address of call signaling Device Status State of the gateway Device Manufacturer Information about the manufacturer Transport Transport mode of the gateway Multiplex Multiplexing mode Dynamiclp Whether to enable dynamic IP Subscriber count Number of entries for subscriber line numbers Subscriber List List
149. asic Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 2 Ethernet Interface Configuration Commands Note You cannot configure a GE electrical interface to operate at 1000 Mbps and in half duplex mode at the same time Related command duplex display interface Example Set the operating speed of FE interface 1 0 to 10Base T XE Ethernet0 0 speed 10 Command Manual Basic Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 3 Static Route Configuration Commands Chapter 3 Static Route Configuration Commands 3 1 1 delete static routes all Syntax delete static routes all View System view Parameter None Description Use the delete static routes all command to delete all the static routes The system will prompt you to confirm the operation Related command ip route static display ip routing table Example Delete all the static routes XE delete static routes all Are you sure to delete all the static routes Y Nly 3 1 2 display ip routing table Syntax display ip routing table View Any view Parameter None Description Use the display ip routing table command to display the summary of the routing table 3 1 Command Manual Basic Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 3 Static Route Configuration Commands Example Each line of the routing table represents a route in summary which includes destination address mask length protocol privilege cost next hop and outgoing interface Use the displa
150. ation and Mana H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX gement Commands View Parameter LS view gateway Permits prohibits normal administrators right to run commands in gateway view gw ip address Permits prohibits normal administrators right to configure IP addresses including dynamic IP addresses for gateway devices office Permits prohibits normal administrators right to run commands in office group view permit Permits normal administrators operations prohibit Permits normal administrators operations Description Example Use the access command command to permit prohibit normal administrators to configure IP addresses including dynamic IP addresses for gateway devices and permit prohibit them to run commands in office group view By default normal administrators can perform the above operations Prohibit normal administrators from running all commands in gateway view XE2000 1s access command gateway prohibit Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 3 System Maintenance and Management Commands Chapter 3 System Maintenance and Management Commands 3 1 Network Diagnostic Commands 3 1 1 debugging Syntax View Parameter debugging all module name debug option1 debug option2 undo debugging all module name debug option1 debug option2 User view all Enables disables all the debugging module name Module name debug option Deb
151. ation of the undo terminal 3 26 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 3 System Maintenance and Management Commands debugging undo terminal logging and undo terminal trapping commands That means all the debugging log trap information is not displayed on the current terminal In case of enabling the terminal monitor command you can use the terminal debugging undo terminal debugging terminal logging undo terminal logging and terminal trapping undo terminal trapping commands to enable disable debugging log trap information Example Disable the terminal monitor lt XE gt undo terminal monitor 3 2 25 terminal trapping Syntax terminal trapping undo terminal trapping View User view Parameter None Description Use the terminal trapping command to enable the terminal to display trap information Use the undo terminal trapping command to disable the function By default the system is configured to display the trap information Example Disable the terminal from displaying trap information lt XE gt undo terminal trapping 3 2 26 upgrade Syntax upgrade bootrom full View User view 3 27 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 3 System Maintenance and Management Commands Parameter full Upgrades Boot ROM globally Description Use the upgrade command to upgrade Boot ROM Example Upgrade Boot ROM XE upgrade bootrom 3 3 Digital Label Inf
152. aults to on cfo Call forwarding offline CFO service which defaults to on cft Call forwarding based on time range CFT service which defaults to on cfu Call forwarding unconditional CFU service which defaults to on ci Call intervention service clip Calling line identification presentation CLIP service which defaults to on clir Calling line identification restriction CLIR service cp Call pickup service cpcp Call park call pickup service ct Call transfer service do not disturb Do not disturb service group limit call Inter group call restriction service which defaults to on gui Graphical user interface which defaults to on limited time call Time limit call service myring MyRing service pwd call Password call service query self Local number query service rio CLIR override service tcir Temporary reservation for CLIR service Description Use the srv switch command to enable disable the voice service Example Enable the customized ring service for the user 900 under the gateway Owi XE 1s gw gw0 0 900 srv switch myring on Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 2 User Management Configuration Commands Chapter 2 User Management Configuration Commands 2 1 User Management Configuration Commands 2 1 1 sscb manage Syntax sscb manage View Subscriber number view Parameter None Description Use the sscb manage command to enter user management serv
153. ays all office group information officegroup id Identifier of the office group to be displayed list Displays office group information in a list Description Use the display location server office group command to display information about office devices configured on the LS Example Display information about all office groups XE 1s og 0g01 off000jJdisplay location serve office group all Sang te eee Office group Information gt 7 2 55 Identifier og01 Nation Code Region Code Area Code Substitute disable Attached Domain Identifier default domain Static Alias Number 1 Static Alias List prefix Lois Office Number 1 Office List office off000 1 18 Command Manual Location Server Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Location Server Commands acct enable XE ls og og01 of 000 Table 1 2 Description on the fields of the display location server office group all command Field Description Identifier Identifier of the office group Nation Code Country code Region Code Area code State enabled disabled of the location based number Area Code Substitute substitute function EE Domain that the office group belongs to Identifier Static Alias Number Number of static number routes Static Alias List Static route number list Office Number Number of office devices Office List Office device list 1 1 21 display location server process
154. be used in combination with the local user password command Related command local user password Example Add a local user whose username is XE password is h3c displayed in cipher text and priority is 2 XE local user XE password cipher h3c XE local user XE level 2 Command Manual System Management Chapter 1 Terminal Service and User Interface H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Configuration Commands 1 1 12 modem Syntax modem call in both undo modem call in both View User interface view Parameter call in Allows incoming calls both Allows both incoming and outgoing calls Description Use the modem command to set the incoming outgoing call attributes of the modem Use the undo modem command to disable incoming and outgoing calls By default both incoming and outgoing calls are allowed When executed without any parameters the modem command enables both incoming and outgoing calls When executed without any parameters the undo modem command disables both incoming and outgoing calls This command is only applicable to the AUX port not to the CON port Example Set the incoming and outgoing attributes for the modem XE uil modem 1 1 13 modem auto answer Syntax modem auto answer undo modem auto answer View User interface view Parameter None Command Manual System Management Chapter 1 Terminal Service and User Interface H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Configuration Commands Description Ex
155. ber Abbreviated number two characters in length Each character can be a digit O through 9 A B C D or long number Real telephone number for the abbreviated number which consists of up to 31 characters Each character can be a digit 0 through 9 A B C D or Description Use the adi command to create abbreviated call entries If you specify an existing abbreviated number the command modifies the corresponding entry Use the undo adi command to remove specified or all abbreviated call entries Example Create a new abbreviated call entry where abbreviated number 11 stands for long number 8011 XE 1s gw gw01 1 1001 adiladi 11 8011 6 1 2 adi subscriber number view Syntax adi View Subscriber number view 6 1 Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 6 Abbreviated Dialing Configuration Commands Parameter None Description Use the adi command to enter abbreviated dialing service view Example Enter abbreviated dialing service view XE 1s gw gw01 1 1001 adi XE 1s gw gw01 1 1001 adi 6 1 3 srv switch adi Syntax srv switch adi on off View Subscriber number view Parameter on Enables abbreviated dialing service off Disables abbreviated dialing service Description Use the srv switch adi command to enable or disable abbreviated dialing service By default abbreviated dialing service is enabled Example Enable abbreviated dialing service XE 1s gw gw01
156. bles the call intervention service off Disables the call intervention service Description Use the srv switch ci command to enable or disable the call intervention service By default the call intervention service is disabled Example Enable the call intervention service for the subscriber number 1001 XE 1s gw ual 0 1001 srv switch ci on Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 18 Dialing Test Service Chapter 18 Dialing Test Service 18 1 Dialing Test Operation Commands 18 1 1 dial test Syntax dial test number for test View LS SRV view Parameter number for test Subscriber number to be tested The maximum length of the number is 31 characters which can be digits from 0 to 9 letters A B C and D and signs and Description Use the dial test command to check whether a subscriber number is valid through a dialing test The debugging information shown in Table 18 1 is displayed during the test Table 18 1 Description of information displayed during the dialing test Displayed information Description dialing The XE is dialing the called number dial failed The test fails or the called party is busy callee ringing The called phone is ringing test succeed The dialing test succeeds callee release test succeed es Seen GE Example Perform a dialing test on subscriber 1000 XE 1s srv dial test 1000 dialing ies callee ringing callee release test succ
157. bsolute minutes The total minutes should be less than 30 x24 x 60 that is 30 days After you configure the command the system will prompt you to input the correct confirmation The settings take effect only after you type in Y or y If you executed the command before the new configuration overwrites the previous one Moreover if you configure the clock command after you have configured the schedule reboot delay command the previous parameters of schedule reboot delay are invalidated Related command reboot schedule reboot at undo schedule reboot display schedule reboot Example Set the XE IP PBX to reboot in 88 minutes the current time is 21 32 lt XE gt schedule reboot delay 88 Reboot scheduled for 23 00 00 UTC 2002 11 1 in 1 hours and 28 minutes Proceed with reboot Y N y 3 2 21 service modem callback Syntax service modem callback 3 24 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 3 System Maintenance and Management Commands undo service modem callback View System view Parameter None Description Use the service modem callback command to enable the callback function Use the undo service modem callback command to disable the callback function By default the callback function is disabled Example Enable the callback function XE service modem callback 3 2 22 terminal debugging Syntax terminal debugging undo terminal debugging View User view Parameter None Desc
158. cation Server Configuration Feature System Management Media Server 10 2 17 1 8 2 8 2 16 1 1 42 3 3 2 2 1 5 1 42 3 3 2 2 1 6 Command Manual Appendix H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX stop PS view stop PS GK view stop PS SIP view stopbits subscriber subscriber role LS view subscriber role outgoing call control service view subscriber status subscriber type LS view subscriber type user role view subsline sum substitute LS view substitute LS GW view substitute LS OFFICEGROUP view substitute Prefix view substitute Subscriber view super super password sysname system view tcp mss tcp timer fin timeout tcp timer syn timeout tcp window telnet tel number terminal debugging A 17 Appendix A Command Index Process Server Configuration Process Server Configuration Process Server Configuration System Management Location Server Configuration Call Services Call Services Call Services Call Services Call Services Feature Feature Feature Feature Feature Feature Basic Configuration Basic Configuration Basic Configuration Basic Configuration IP Performance and Application IP Performance and Application IP Performance and Application IP Performance and Application System Management Call Services System Management 1 19 1 15 1 43 5 4 5 4 2 1 5 5 5 5 2 6 1 14 1 13 1 14 1 15 1 16 1 19 1 20 1 21 1 22 1 20 1 1
159. cation Server Configuration 1 14 Process Server Configuration 1 3 System Management 3 28 Basic Configuration 1 10 System Management 3 2 IP Performance and Application 1 5 IP Performance and Application 1 6 IP Performance and Application 1 7 IP Performance and Application 1 8 System Management 4 22 System Management 4 23 System Management 2 4 Basic Configuration 1 11 System Management 3 8 Basic Configuration 2 1 IP Performance and Application 1 8 IP Performance and Application 2 3 Basic Configuration 3 1 IP Performance and Application 1 11 IP Performance and Application 1 12 Command Manual Appendix H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX display location server 3pcc display location server call limit group display location server call limit group display location server call limit group bind display location server call list display location server domain display location server gateway display location server media server display location server notify config display location server notify group display location server number substitute display location server office group display location server process server display location server statistics display location server subscriber role display location server subscriber type display location server substitute display location server tunnelpeer display logbuffer display media server location server status display media server media resource
160. ckup boot file If the boot attempts using all these files fail the system prompts the boot failure This command is only supported by the XE IP PBXs For the related commands see dir bootfile dir and bootfile backup A Caution Only XE IP PBX 200 supports this command 4 3 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 4 File Management Commands Example Specify the backup boot file XE bootfile backup router bin Set backup boot file successfully Display information on the boot files in the Flash XE bootfile dir Aviliable boot file s M MAIN B BACKUP S SECURE No Type Date Time Size Name 1 N A Mar 15 2004 18 09 00 5556068 Main bin 1 B Mar 15 2004 18 09 00 5556068 Backup bin 1 S Mar 15 2004 18 09 00 5556068 Secure bin 4 1 4 cd Syntax cd directory flash View User view Parameter directory Name of the destination directory flash Device name Description Use the cd command to change the current operating directory of the XE IP PBX to a specified existing directory By default it is flash Example Change the current operating directory of the XE IP PBX to test lt XE gt pwd flash lt XE gt cd test lt XE gt pwd 4 4 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX flash test Return the upper directory lt XE gt pwd flash lt XE gt cd test lt XE gt pwd flash test Chapter 4 File Mana
161. command to display the current configuration CTRL_L corresponds to the display ip routing table command to display information on routing table CTRL_O corresponds to the undo debugging all command to disable the display of all debugging information You can customize the hot key combination as needed Associate the display tcp status command with the hot key CTRL_T XE hotkey ctrl_t display tcp status XE display hotkey HOTKEY Defined hotkeys Hotkeys Command CTRL_G display current configuration CTRL_L display ip routing table CTRL_O undo debug all CTRL_T display tcp status Undefined hotkeys Hotkeys Command CTRL_U NULL System hotkeys Hotkeys Function CTRL_A ove the cursor to the beginning of the current line CTRL_B ove the cursor one character left CTRL_C Stop current command function CTRL_D Erase current character CTRL_E ove the cursor to the end of the current line CTRL_F ove the cursor one character right CTRL_H Erase the character left of the cursor CTRL_K Kill outgoing connection CTRL_N Display the next command from the history buffer CTRL_P Display the previous command from the history buffer CTRL_R Redisplay the current line Command Manual Basic Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Basic Configuration Commands CTRL_V Paste text from the clipboard CTRL_W Delete the word left of the cursor CTRL_X Delete all char
162. command can be regarded as the automatic process of manual execution line by line The command does not guarantee the execution of each command nor does it perform hot backup The forms and contents of the commands are not restricted in the batch file Example Execute the batch file test bat in the directory of flash XE execute test bat 4 1 9 file prompt Syntax file prompt alert quiet 4 8 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX View System view Parameter alert Enables interactive acknowledgement in case of data loss or destruction due to user operation e g deleting a file quiet No prompt appears in case of data loss or destruction due to user operation e g deleting a file Description Use the file prompt command to modify the prompt mode of file operation By default the prompt mode is alert When the prompt mode of file operation is set to quiet no prompt appears in case of risky operation e g deleting a file although such operation may cause data loss Example Set the prompt mode of the file operation to quiet XE file prompt quiet Set the prompt mode of the file operation to alert XE file prompt alert 4 1 10 format Syntax View Parameter format device name User view device name Name of the device Description Example Use the format command to format the storage device Formatting will cause permanent loss of all t
163. configuration Is Displays the configuration of Location Server ps Displays the configuration of Process Server system Displays the system configuration user interface Displays the configuration of user interface Uses the regular expression to filter and display the configuration of the XE IP PBX begin Displays the configuration beginning with specified string include Displays the configuration including specified string exclude Displays the configuration without specified string string Regular expression characters Description Example Use the display current configuration command to display the current configuration of the XE IP PBX Some parameters configured currently are not displayed when they are the same with default When a set of configuration is completed and requires verification you can use the display current configuration command to check the currently effective parameters Some parameters are not displayed if the related functions are not available Related command save reset saved configuration display saved configuration Display the currently effective PS configuration parameters of the XE IP PBX lt XE gt display current configuration configuration ps process server ps config ps0 interface GigabitEthernet0 0 heartbeat password key start gatekeeper start 4 15 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 4 File Management Commands sip
164. contents Description on function entry calling and the returned value Example Debug the SM module and output the debugging information at levels 1 through 5 lt XE gt debugging process server sm level 5 1 1 2 display debugging process server Syntax display debugging process server View Any view Parameter None Description Use the display debugging process server command to display information about PS debugging levels Example Display information about PS debugging levels lt XE2000 gt display debugging ADPT STACK debugging debugging debugging debugging 1 debugging 1 debugging 1 debugging 1 debugging 1 debugging 1 debugging 1 process server Level tevel Level W Ww Ww Ww U U U U U WwW Command Manual Process Server Configuraiton H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Process Server HADPT debugging level 3 HSTACK debugging level 3 CSM debugging level 3 BKM debugging level 3 1 1 3 display process server call information Syntax display process server call information View Any view Parameter None Description Use the display process server call information command to display information about the calls being processed on the PS Example Display information about the calls being processed on the PS XE display process server call information NO CCB mode CM CCB Information Caller Callee 0 NORMAL 0 TYPE H323 DEVICE H323 DEVICE
165. ction is disabled Example Disable overload protection XE olp stop Overload Protection stopped XE olp Chapter 3 Overload Protection Command Manual Feature H3C XE 200 2 000 IP PBX Chapter 4 VoIP RADIUS Accounting Configuration Chapter 4 VoIP RADIUS Accounting Configuration 4 1 VoIP RADIUS Accounting Configuration Commands 4 1 1 aaa enable Syntax aaa enable View Parameter Description Example undo aaa enable System view None Use the aaa enable command to enable AAA Use the undo aaa enable command to disable AAA By default AAA is disabled Enable AAA XE aaa enable 4 1 2 radius server Syntax View Parameter radius server radius server name radius server ip accounting port accounting port undo radius server System view radius server name Host name of the RADIUS accounting server radius server ip IP address of the RADIUS accounting server 4 1 Command Manual Feature H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 4 VolP RADIUS Accounting Configuration accounting port Port through which the RADIUS accounting server receives accounting request messages The default port number is 1813 Description Use the radius server command to configure the information of the RADIUS accounting server used by the XE IP PBX Use the undo radius server command to delete the RADIUS accounting server Example Set the IP address of the RADIUS accounting server
166. cvbuf 4096 sb_cc 0 rb_cc 0 socket option SO_ACCEPTCONN socket state SS_PRIV SS_ASYNC SOCK_DGRAM Task ROUT 6 socketid 1 Proto 17 LA 0 0 0 0 0 FA 0 0 0 0 0 sndbuf 9216 rcvbuf 41600 sb_cc 0 rb cc 0 socket option SO_UDPCHECKSUM socket state SS_PRIV SS_ASYNC SOCK_RAW Task ROUT 6 socketid 2 Proto 2 LA 0 0 0 0 FA 0 0 0 0 sndbuf 32767 rcvbuf 32767 sb_cc 0 rb_cc 0 socket option 0 socket state SS_PRIV SS_NBIO SS_ASYNC Following are the descriptions of the displayed information SOCK_STREAM Type of the socket Proto The protocol number used by the socket sndbuf The size of the send buffer of the socket rcvbuf The size of the receive buffer of the socket sb_cc The size of current data in the send buffer This value is useful only when TCP buffers data rd_cc The size of current data in the receive buffer Display information of the socket with whose task ID is 8 and socket ID is 4 lt XE gt display ip socket 8 4 Task VTYD 8 socketid 4 Proto 6 LA 0 0 0 0 23 FA 0 0 0 0 0 sndbuf 4096 rcvbuf 4096 sb_cc 0 rb_cc 0 socket option SO_ACCEPTCONN socket state SS_PRIV SS_ASYNC 1 1 12 display ip statistics Syntax View display ip statistics Any view Command Manual IP Performance and Application H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 IP Performance Configuration Commands Parameter None Descripti
167. d A to Z number 0 to 9 hyphen and dot Note that at least an English letter should be in the hostname By default the static domain name table is empty that is there is no host name corresponding to any IP address Example Configure the IP address corresponding to the host name router1 to 10 110 0 1 XE ip host routerl 10 110 0 1 Configure the IP address corresponding to the host name router2 to 10 110 0 2 XE ip host router2 10 110 0 2 Configure the IP address corresponding to the host name router3 to 10 110 0 3 XE ip host router3 10 110 0 3 Remove the mapping between the host name router2 and the IP address 10 110 0 2 XE undo ip host router2 10 110 0 2 2 4 Command Manual IP Performance and Application H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 2 IP Application Configuration Commands 2 1 6 reset arp Syntax View Parameter reset arp all dynamic static interface interface type interface number User view static Indicates to clear the static ARP entries dynamic Indicates to clear the dynamic ARP entries all Indicates to clear all the ARP entries interface Indicates the selected interface interface type Interface type interface number Interface number Description Example Use the reset arp command to clear the ARP entries in the ARP mapping table By default if slot number is not specified all ARP entries are cleared When the operation is performed on the interf
168. d5 authentication debugging lt XE gt debugging tcp md5 1 1 4 debugging tcp packet Syntax debugging tcp packet task_id socket_id undo debugging tcp packet task_id socket_id View User view Parameter task_id Task ID socket_id Socket ID Description Use the debugging tcp packet command to enable TCP connection packet debugging The number of debugging you can enable is limited that is you can enable debugging of fixed number the combination of task ID and socket ID at one time Use the undo debugging tcp packet command to disable TCP connection debugging Example Enable TCP connection debugging lt XE gt debugging tcp packet 1 1 5 debugging udp packet Syntax debugging udp packet task_id socket_id undo debugging udp packet Geck d socket_id View User view Parameter task_id Task ID socket_ID Socket ID Command Manual IP Performance and Application H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 IP Performance Configuration Commands Description Example Use the debugging udp packet command to enable UDP connection debugging The number of debugging you can enable is limited that is you can enable debugging of fixed number the combination of task ID and socket ID at one time Use the undo debugging udp packet command to disable UDP connection debugging Enable UDP connection debugging lt XE gt debugging udp packet 1 1 6 display fib Syntax display fib View Any view Parameter
169. debug Telnet state machine negotiate Enables to debug VTY option negotiation Command Manual System Management Chapter 1 Terminal Service and User Interface H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Configuration Commands Description Use the debugging vty command to enable VTY debugging Use the undo debugging vty command to disable VTY debugging Example Enable VTY option negotiation debugging lt XE gt debugging vty negotiate 1 1 5 display user interface Syntax display user interface type name number View Any view Parameter type name Specifies a user interface by its type number Specifies a user interface by its number Description Use the display user interface command to view the details of one or all user interfaces Example Display information of user interface 0 lt XE gt display user interface 0 Idx Type Tx Rx Modem Privi Auth ZS OD CON 0 9600 3 N Current user interface is active I Current user interface is active and work in async mode Idx Absolute index of user interface Type Type and relative index of user interface Privi The privilege of user interface Auth The authentication mode of user interface Authenticate use AAA Authenticate use local database GD Current user interface need not authentication P Authenticate use current UI s password Command Manual System Management Chapter 1 Terminal Service and User Interface H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Configuration Command
170. ds Use the undo cft command to remove specified or all CFT items Example Set to forward calls within the time range of 07 00 00 to 23 00 00 to 8888 XE 1s gw gw01 1 1001 cft cft 07 00 00 23 00 00 8888 10 4 3 srv switch cft Syntax srv switch cft on off View Subscriber number view Parameter on Enables CFT service off Disables CFT service Description Use the srv switch cft command to enable or disables CFT service By default CFT service is enabled Example Enables CFT service XE 1s gw gw01 1 1001 srv switch cft on 10 5 CFO Configuration Commands 10 5 1 cfo Syntax cfo View Subscriber number view Parameter None Description Use the cfo command to enter call forwarding offline CFO service view 10 7 Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 10 Call Forwarding Configuration Commands Example Enter CFO service view XE 1s gw gw01 1 1001 cfo XE 1s gw gw01 1 1001 cfo 10 5 2 cfo number Syntax cfo number forward number undo cfo number forward number all View CFO service view Parameter forward number Target CFO number which consists of up to 31 characters which can be digits from 0 to 9 letters A B C and D and signs and all Removes all target CFO numbers Description Use the cfo number command to add target CFO numbers Up to 2 target CFO numbers can be added Use the undo cfo number command to remove specified or all target CFO n
171. ds involved in IP PBX Media Server configuration 8 Call Services Describes the commands involved in the configuration on call services 9 Appendix Lists the indexes of the commands involved in this manual Conventions The manual uses the following conventions L Command conventions Convention Description Boldface The keywords of a command line are in Boldface italic Command arguments are in italic Items keywords or arguments in square brackets are optional txlyl Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars One is selected xl y Optional alternative items are grouped in square brackets and separated by vertical bars One or none is selected txlyl Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars A minimum of one or a maximum of all can be selected xly Optional alternative items are grouped in square brackets and separated by vertical bars Many or none can be selected amp lt 1 n gt The argument s before the ampersand amp sign can be entered 1 to n times A line starting with the sign is comments ll GUI conventions Convention Description Window names button names field names and menu Boldface items are in Boldface For example the New User window appears click OK Multi level menus are separated by angle
172. e Access code that the deliverers use to send the notification access code that receivers use to hear the notification and interval at which the receiver numbers are redialed Configure the basic parameters for local group notification named notify1 Set the played media file ID to 4100 receiver group access code to 111 and redial interval to two minutes XE ls srv gn nc notifyl config local 4100 111 2 Configure the basic parameters for remote group notification named notify2 Set the deliverer access ID to 112 receiver group access code to 111 and redial interval to two minutes XE 1s srv gn nc notify2 config remote 112 111 2 23 1 2 display location server notify config Syntax display location server notify config notify id active allowable config all View Any view Parameter notify id ID of the group notification active Displays information of the current playing group notifications all Displays information of all group notifications allowable Displays information of group notifications that are started but not sent yet config Displays information of the group notifications that are in the configuration state that is configured but not activated Description Use the display location server notify config command to display information about the existing group notifications Example Display information of group notification named gn01 XE 1s srv gn gc gc01 display location server
173. e H 323 stack rm Clears statistics about the RM module sm Clears statistics about the SM module stack Clears statistics about the SIP protocol stack tucl Clears statistics about the TUCL module Description Use the reset process server statistics command to clear statistics for the PS such as SIP and H 323 messages sent and received messages exchanged between internal modules and timer messages Example Clear all statistics for the PS lt XE gt reset process server statistics all 1 1 17 response irr Syntax response irr off on undo response irr View PS GK view 1 15 Command Manual Process Server Configuraiton H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Process Server Parameter off Disables the gatekeeper to respond with IACK messages to IRR messages on Enables the gatekeeper to respond with IACK messages to IRR messages Description Use the response irr command to disable or enable the gatekeeper to respond with IACK messages to IRR messages Use the undo response irr command to restore the default setting of the IRR response switch By default the on parameter applies Example Disable the gatekeeper to respond with IACK messages to IRR messages XE ps gk response irr off 1 1 18 sip Syntax sip View PS view Parameter None Description Use the sip command to enter SIP view Example Enter SIP view XE ps sip XE ps sip 1 1 19 sip config Syntax sip config port s
174. e packet without encryption privacy Indicates both authentication and encryption with the packet Description Use the snmp agent target host command to set the target host that receives the SNMP notification Use the undo snmp agent target host command to remove the current settings e The snmp agent target host command is used in combination with the snmp agent trap enable command e Use the snmp agent trap enable command to enable devices to send trap packets If one host is configured to send notification message the host should be configured at least the snmp agent target host and snmp agent trap enable commands Related command snmp agent trap enable snmp agent trap source snmp agent trap life Example Enable to send SNMP trap packets to 10 1 1 1 with the community name of comaccess XE snmp agent trap enable standard XE snmp agent target host trap address udp domain 10 1 1 1 params securityname comaccess Enable to send SNMP trap packets to 10 1 1 1 with the community name of public XE snmp agent trap enable standard XE snmp agent target host trap address udp domain 10 1 1 1 params securityname public 6 1 17 snmp agent trap enable Syntax snmp agent trap enable trap type trap list undo snmp agent trap enable trap type trap list View System view 6 14 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 6 SNMP Configuration Commands Parameter trap type E
175. e physical link and the operating parameters of the protocol with the remote device The general format for Modem script is as follow send string1 receive string1 send string2 receive string2 Where send string represents to send character string receive string represents to receive character string send string and receive string appear in pairs a script must begin with a send string For example send string1 receive string1 represents this execution flow First the system sends send string1 to the Modem and expects to receive receive string1 If it receives a string matching receive string1 before timing out it continues the execution of subsequent script contents otherwise it terminates the execution of this script If the last string is a send string it indicates that once this string is sent the execution of the script is terminated without waiting for any other receive string If it is unnecessary to send a string at the beginning of a script and the system directly waits for a receive string you can set the first send string to which will be explained later Except for ended with e the send string will be automatically appended with a carriage return when it is sent The received content needs not exactly match the receive string That is the match is considered successful as long as the received content contains the expected string One receive string can includes many character strings
176. e system will save the configuration file slowly but the file will be saved in Flash if the device is rebooted or powered off Description Example Use the save command to save the current configuration to the storage device Confirmation is required when you use this command When a set of configuration completes and the functions are available the current configuration file should be saved in the storage device By default quick save mode is applied which is recommended in a stable power condition In an unstable power or remote maintenance condition however you are recommended to execute the command with the safely keyword Related command reset saved configuration display current configuration display saved configuration Save the current configuration files to the default storage device lt XE gt save The configuration will be written to the device Are you sure Y N y Now saving current configuration to the device Saving configuration flash config cfg Please wait Current configuration has been saved to the device successfully 4 2 7 save now Syntax View Parameter save now Any view None 4 19 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 4 File Management Commands Description Example Use the save now command to save the current configuration to the storage device without confirmation Related command save Save the current configuration files
177. e the relay number Description Use the otapc command to configure the attribute of a static route number of a gateway Use the undo otapc command to restore the default attribute of a static route number By default the static route number is the subscriber number Example Configure the static router number 9 to be the relay number on gateway gw01 XE ls gateway gw02 XE 1s gw gw02 prefix 9 XE 1s gw gw02 9 otapc relay 1 1 38 password LS GW view Syntax password password undo password View LS GW view Parameter password Authentication password consisting of 1 to 16 characters Command Manual Location Server Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Location Server Commands Description Use the password command to set the authentication password for a gateway registered with the LS Use the undo password command to restore the default password By default the authentication password for a gateway is GATEWAY Example Set the authentication password of the gateway gw001 to pass1 XE 1s gw gw001 password passl 1 1 39 policy random selection Syntax policy random selection enable disable View LS view Parameter random selection Configures random selection of numbers enable Enables random selection disable Disables random selection Description Use the policy random selection enable command to enable random selection Use the policy random selection disable command to disable
178. eans the system can have 10 channels channel name Channel name facility Recording facility of the log host local number Recording facility of the log host within the range of localo to local7 language Language which is used by the log chinese english Log language You can shift between Chinese and English Description Use the info center loghost command to configure the system to send output to log host Use the undo info center loghost command to remove the current configuration Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 3 System Maintenance and Management Commands Example By default the system does not send output to log host If not specified the channel of log host uses channel 2 which is named loghost The local number uses local7 and the language is english This command is effective only after the information center function is enabled By configuring the IP address of a log host you can send information to this log host Up to four log hosts can be configured Related command info center enable display info center Enable the XE IP PBX to send information to UNIX station with an IP address of 202 38 160 1 XE info center loghost 202 38 160 1 3 2 11 info center loghost source Syntax info center loghost source interface type interface number subinterface type undo info center loghost source View System view Parameter interface type Interface type inte
179. ed or all substitute rules for the gateway You can configure up to eight substitute rules for one gateway each serving the purpose of calling number substitution called number substitution or both as shown in the following table Table 1 1 Configure substitute rules Operation Command Substitute the calling numbers that rule rule tag caller input format match the input calling number pattern output format before after Substitute the called numbers that rule rule tag callee input format match the input called number pattern output format before after Command Manual Feature H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Number Substitution Example Operation Command Substitute both calling and called numbers in a call provided they match the input calling and called number patterns respectively rule rule tag caller input format output format callee input format output format before after Configure three substitute rules for gateway device gw01 XE2000 1s gw gw01 rule 1 caller 88 Lee after XE2000 1s gw gw01 rule 2 callee 63 Se Ghee before XE2000 1s gw gw01 rule 3 caller 88 is calles 6370 bd OS Lashes after 1 1 14 rule LS OFFICEGROUP view Syntax rule rule tag caller input format output format callee input format output format callee input format output format before after undo rule rule tag all View LS OFFICEGROUP view
180. eed Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 19 Time Announcement Service Chapter 19 Time Announcement Service 19 1 Time Announcement Service Configuration Commands 19 1 1 srv switch announce Syntax srv switch announce on off View LS GW PREFIX view Subscriber number view Parameter on Enables the time announcement service off Disables the time announcement service Description Use the srv switch announce command to enable or disable the time announcement service By default the time announcement service is disabled Example Enable the time announcement service for subscriber 1001 XE 1s gw gw01 1 1001 srv switch announce on Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 20 MyRing Service Chapter 20 MyRing Service 20 1 MyRing Service Configuration Commands 20 1 1 caller group Syntax caller group caller group id undo caller group caller group id all View MyRing view Parameter caller group id Caller group ID Description Use the caller group command to enter caller group configuration view or create a caller group and enter its caller group view if the specified group ID does not exist Use the undo caller group command to delete the specified caller group or all caller groups When a caller group is deleted all its configurations are deleted as well Example Create a caller group named friend for subscriber 1001 and then enter its caller group
181. elated command display tcp status Example Display TCP traffic statistics lt XE gt display tcp statistics Received packets Total 0 packets in sequence 0 0 bytes window probe packets 0 window update packets 0 checksum error 0 bad offset 0 too short 0 duplicate packets 0 0 bytes partially duplicate packets 0 0 bytes out of order packets 0 0 bytes packets with data after window 0 0 bytes packets after close 0 ack packets 0 0 bytes duplicate ack packets 0 ack packets with unsend data 0 Sent packets Total 0 urgent packets 0 control packets 0 0 RST window probe packets 0 window update packets 0 data packets 0 0 bytes data packets retransmitted 0 0 bytes ack only packets 0 0 delayed Total retransmit timeout 0 connections dropped in retransmit timeout 0 Keepalive timeout 0 keepalive probe 0 dropped connections in keepalive 0 Initiated connections 0 accepted connections 0 established connections 0 Closed connections 0 dropped 0 embryonic dropped 0 Dropped packets with MD5 authentication 0 Permitted packets with MD5 authentication 0 1 1 14 display tcp status Syntax display tcp status View Any view Command Manual IP Performance and Application H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 IP Performance Configuration Commands Parameter None Description Use the display tcp status command to display the TCP connection status through
182. ement Basic Configuration Call Services Basic Configuration IP Performance and Application Basic Configuration Location Server Configuration Location Server Configuration Process Server Configuration Call Services 1 7 3 12 3 13 3 13 3 14 3 15 3 16 3 17 3 17 3 18 3 20 3 21 2 3 15 1 2 4 2 4 3 2 1 27 23 6 Command Manual Appendix H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Appendix A Command Index L language Media Server 1 3 language Media Server 2 3 language LS MS view Media Server 3 1 language mode Basic Configuration 1 17 Icd System Management 4 34 limited call group call limit group view Call Services 4 6 limited call group subscriber number view Call Services 4 6 limited call time Call Services 13 1 limited group Call Services 4 7 limited time call Call Services 13 2 load share Feature 2 1 local user ftp directory System Management 4 25 local user level System Management 1 8 local user password System Management 4 26 local user service type System Management 4 27 lock Basic Configuration 1 17 loopback Ethernet Gigabitethernet Interface Basic Configuration 2 5 Process Server Irq mode Configuration 1 10 Is System Management 4 34 Is back Feature 2 1 Location Server Is config Configuration 1 28 Process Server Is mode Configuration 1 11 Is mode Media Server 1 4 M Location Server manufacturer Configuration 1 29 media ability Media Server 2 3 media server Media Server 1 4 media server Media Server
183. er Configuraiton H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Process Server Pre Setup Pre Ack BW Request O O e ET 3 O O EH H e O O O O Co O O O Co DS O Y BW Response dd gt Er St 3 Invalid Q931 The following table describes the fields on the display process server statistics sm command Table 1 2 Description on the fields of display process server statistics sm Field Description SAI Message Stack application interface SAI messages RINGING Ringing messages REDIRECT Redirect messages OK OK messages REGISTER Register messages INVITE Call request messages ACK Acknowledgement messages Bye Call ending messages CANCEL Call cancel messages INFO Information messages PRACK Provisional response acknowledgement messages INVALID SAI Invalid SAl messages Q931 Message Q 931 messages Setup Call setup messages Setup Ack Call setup acknowledgement messages Callproceeding Callproceeding messages Progress Progress messages Alerting Alerting messages Connect Connect messages Connect Ack Connect acknowledgement messages Release Release messages Release Complete Release complete messages Information Information messages Facility Facility messages Status Status messages Command Manual Process Server Configuraiton H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Process Server Field De
184. er interface view command key Command to be set Description Use the command privilege command to set the privilege level of a command in a specified view Use the undo command privilege view command to remove the current setting There are four levels of command privilege visit monitor system and manage which are identified as 0 1 2 and 3 respectively The administrator can assign permissions for users to access the corresponding view A user can run the commands according to the privilege level associated with the user name Also the user can perform operations according to the permission granted through the user interface If there is a conflict between these two privileges the one with the lower level is adopted By default the commands ping tracert and telnet are of the visit level with identifier 0 the commands display debugging are of the monitor level with identifier 1 the Command Manual Basic Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Basic Configuration Commands configuration commands are of the system level with identifier 2 and commands of user key setting FTP XMODEM TFTP and file system operation are of the manage level with identifier 3 Example Set the privilege level of the interface command to 0 XE command privilege level 0 view system interface 1 1 6 display clipboard Syntax display clipboard View Any view Parameter None Description Use the display clipbo
185. erface NULLO user interface con 0 user interface aux 0 user interface vty 0 4 return 1 1 14 display this Syntax display this View Any view Parameter None Description Use the display this command to display the current configuration of the active view Example Display the current configuration of the active view XE display this sysname XE Command Manual Basic Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX tcp window 8 1 1 15 display version Syntax View Parameter display version Any view None Description Example Chapter 1 Basic Configuration Commands Use the display version command to display the system version This command displays the information about the software version main control board interface board and so on Display the system version of XE 2000 IP PBX lt XE gt display version H3C Comware Platform Software Comware software Version 3 30 ESS 0122P01 Copyright c 2004 2007 Hangzhou H3C Technology Co Ltd All rights reserved H3C XE 200 uptime is 0 week 1 day CPU type PowerPC 8241 200MHz 256M bytes SDRAM Memory 32M bytes Flash Memory Pcb Version 3 0 Logic Version 1 0 BootROM Version 9 16 SLOT 0 AUX Hardware 3 0 SLOT 0 1FE Hardware 3 0 SLOT 0 1FE Hardware 3 0 1 1 16 enable command alias Syntax enable command alias undo enable command alias D hour 14 minutes Driver 1 0 Cpld 1 0 Driver 2
186. error status Maximum packet size 2000 MIB objects retrieved successfully MIB objects al tered successfully GetRequest PDU accepted and processed GetNextRequest PDU accepted and processed GetBulkRequest PDU accepted and processed GetResponse PDU accepted and processed SetRequest PDU accepted and processed 6 5 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 6 SNMP Configuration Commands O Trap PDUs accepted and processed 6 1 7 display snmp agent sys info Syntax display snmp agent sys info contact location version View Any view Parameter contact Displays the contact information of local device node location Displays the physical location of the local device node version Displays the SNMP version running in the local agent Description Use the display snmp agent sys info command to display the system information of the local SNMP device Example Display the system information of the device lt XE gt display snmp agent sys info The contact person for this managed node R amp D Hangzhou H3C Technology Co Ltd The physical location of this node Hangzhou China SNMP version running in the system SNMPv3 6 1 8 display snmp agent usm user Syntax display snmp agent usm user engineid engineid username user name group group name View Any view 6 6 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 6 SNMP Configuration Command
187. es Description If the office mapping device id does not exist use the office command to create a new office on the LS and enter the LS OFFICEGROUP OFFICE view If the office mapping device id exists use the office command to enter the LS OFFICEGROUP OFFICE view directly Use the undo office command to delete the office You need to enter the LS OFFICE view first to configure an office Example Enter the view of the office of1 XE ls og og01 office of1 XE 1s og 0g01 of1 1 1 36 office group Syntax office group office group id undo office group office group id all View LS view Parameter office group id Office group ID It is case sensitive all Deletes all office groups configured on the LS Description Use the office group command to create an office group and enter its LS OFFICEGROUP view or directly enter the LS OFFICEGROUP view if an office group with the specified name exists Use the undo office group command to delete the specified or all office groups Example Create an office group 0901 and then enter its LS OFFICEGROUP view XE2000 1s office group og01 1 32 Command Manual Location Server Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Location Server Commands XE2000 1s o0g 0901 1 1 37 otapc Syntax otapc undo otapc fxs relay View Prefix view Parameter fxs Specifies the static route number to be the subscriber number relay Specifies the static route number to b
188. es from 1 to 18 in units of 10 ms video Sets the video codec type h263 Sets the video codec type as H263 h261 Sets the video codec type as H261 data Sets the data codec type t38fax Sets T38 faxing support Description Use the codec command to configure the codec type used when the gatekeeper initiates capability negotiation to an office device Use the undo codec command to restore the default codec type By default G 729 is adopted for audio codec the packetization time length is 30 ms and video codec and data faxing is not supported Example Set the codec type to G729 so that the gatekeeper uses to initiate capability negotiation to an office device to G 722 Set the packetization time length to 40 ms and video codec to H261 XE ls og og01 off000 1codec audio g729 packet length 4 XE ls og og01 off000 codec video h261 Command Manual Location Server Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Location Server Commands 1 1 11 codec LS OFFICEGROUP PREFIX view Syntax View Parameter codec audio g7231 g729 pcma pemu packet length packet lengih video h261 h263 data t38fax undo codec audio video data LS OFFICEGROUP PREFIX view audio Sets the audio codec type 97231 Sets the audio codec type as G 723 1 g729 Sets the audio codec type as G 729 pcma Sets the audio codec type as G 711 A law 64K pcmu Sets the audio codec type as G 711 u law 64K packet len
189. esirssiresrissrissrnnsrnnsrnnsnnnsnntenn e 3 28 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Table of Contents 3 3 1 display device manuirto eeaeeeeaaeseeeeeseaeeesaeeseaeeseeeees 3 28 Chapter 4 File Management Commands ccccccccinnnninncncnnnnnnnannc crac 4 1 4 1 Flo System COMMANAS iia na aid 4 1 4 1 bootfile b ck p EE 4 1 eene TEE 4 2 41 300 MS Maita an 4 3 ATACA A a A ad 4 4 NA 4 5 AAO a dais 4 6 Ge Te 4 7 NEE 4 8 44 9 Oe tee 4 8 AO OM crepe EE 4 9 o EE 4 10 ATIM E E 4 10 ALARM uti AA ela anid Gel aa 4 11 zs ek e EE 4 11 E at 4 12 41 10 reset ECV CIO liinda 4 13 ASA SAMOA AAA A E AE 4 13 KAN Mi EE 4 14 4 2 Configuration File Management Commandes e 4 14 4 2 1 display current configuration ceeeeeeeeee sete eect eeeneececaeeesaaeeeeaaeseeeeeseaeeesaeeneaeees 4 14 4 2 2 display Save configuration non rana nn nnnc crac narran cnn 4 16 4 2 3 0ISplay STAUTU coi a a RAI ia 4 17 E EK AE 4 17 4 2 5 reset Save configuraton eee esika ahn gaino aai na aaa a aina aeaa aoaaa ANa 4 18 BEE 4 18 e 4 19 4 2 8 startup SAVEC CONFIQUIATION ooooocinncncnncccnonccnnonnnnnanc conc cnnnn nn anno nana nc cra nana rana cc nan 4 20 A LEE E TE gehen nike 4 21 4 3 FTP Server Configuration Commande rca cnn cnn rca ran 4 22 4 31 display Tp SV E 4 22 4 3 2 display pur A ee a detects ee eat 4 23 ue RE imei italiana 4 23 ARAU O Un A a ae era ee ee 4 24 AS om Be 4 24 4 3 6 local user ftP GireCtOry ooocncccncniconnccnn
190. esponding only service view XE lLs Jonly 800123456 XE 1s only 800123456 12 1 2 tel number Syntax tel number number undo tel number number all Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 12 ONLY Service Configuration Commands View Only service view Parameter number Number information corresponding to the user ID which consists of up to 31 characters which can be digits from 0 to 9 letters A B C and D and signs and all Removes all number information corresponding to the user ID Description Use the tel number command to add a number user telephone number or route number corresponding to the user ID You can add five number information pieces for a user ID Use the undo tel number command to specified or all number information for the user ID Example Add number information 118 for the user 800123456 XE 1s only 800123456 tel number 118 Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 13 Time Limit Call Configuration Commands Chapter 13 Time Limit Call Configuration Commands 13 1 Time Limit Call Configuration Commands 13 1 1 default limit call time Syntax default limit call time default limited time undo default limit call time View LS view Parameter default limited time Sets the default time limit for calls ranging from 60 to 65535 seconds Description Use the default limit call time command to set the default time limit for calls If
191. essfully Use the undo script trigger login command to cancel the specification By default no script is specified The system executes the specified script when an outgoing call connection is set up successfully You can define a script for example with the login strings and password to log into a remote UNIX server then use this command to enable the successful connection between this system and the remote system to trigger the execution of this script to log into the remote system Related command script string script trigger connect script trigger logout script trigger dial script trigger init Example Specify example as the automatically executed Modem script when an outgoing call connection is set up successfully XE uil script trigger login example 7 1 8 script trigger logout Syntax script trigger logout script name undo script trigger logout Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 7 Modem Management Configuration Commands View Parameter User interface view script name Name of a script in the script set Description Example Use the script trigger logout command to specify the automatically executed Modem script when a line is reset By default no script is specified Use the undo script trigger logout command to cancel the specification The system executes the specified script when a line is reset For example you can use the command to specify a script to res
192. et command to download the remote files and store them locally By default if no local file name is specified the downloaded file will have the same name with the one on the remote FTP server Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 4 File Management Commands Example Download the file temp1 c and save it as temp c ftp get templ c temp c 4 4 13 Icd Syntax Icd View FTP client view Parameter None Description Use the Icd command to get the local operating directory of the FTP client Example Display the local operating directory ftp lcd Local directory now flash 4 4 14 Is Syntax Is remotefile localfile View FTP client view Parameter remotefile Name of the remote file to be queried localfile Name of the file to be saved locally Description Use the Is command to query a specified file By default all files are displayed if the command has no parameters Example Query the file temp c 4 34 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX ftp ls temp c 4 4 15 mkdir Syntax mkdir pathname View FTP client view Parameter pathname Directory name Description Chapter 4 File Management Commands Use the mkdir command to establish a directory on the remote FTP server Example Establish the directory named test on the remote FTP server ftp mkdir test 4 4 16 open Syntax open padar port a ip address
193. et the Modem when a call is dropped Related command script string script trigger login script trigger connect script trigger dial script trigger init Specify example as the automatically executed Modem script when a line is reset XE script string drop line OK ATH OK ATSO 1 OK XE uil script trigger logout drop line 7 1 9 script string Syntax View Parameter script string scripi name script content undo script string script name System view script name Script name script content Script content Description Use the script string command to define a Modem script Use the undo script string command to delete a Modem script By default no Modem script is defined Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 7 Modem Management Configuration Commands Using the Modem scripts written with the script language provided by the XE IP PBX you can make the system Flexibly control different models of Modems Through executing different initialization AT command set the XE IP PBX can well cooperate with a variety of Modems produced by different manufacturers with different models Log into a remote system in interactive mode Interactive negotiation of script can turn the system into different connection states For example after the AUX port on the XE IP PBX set up a connection with the remote device through the Modem it negotiates the protocol to be encapsulated on th
194. ew XE 1s srv cb XE 1s srv cb 15 1 2 interval LS SRV CB view Syntax interval time length undo interval View LS SRV CB view Parameter time length Time interval of the callback on busy service It ranges from 1 to 10 minutes Description Use the interval command to set the time interval of the callback on busy service This setting applies to all subscribers for whom the callback on busy service is enabled 15 1 Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 15 Callback On Busy Service Use the undo interval command to restore the default interval of the callback on busy service By default the interval of the callback on busy service is 1 minute Example Set the interval of the callback on busy service to 2 minutes XE 1s srv cb interval 2 15 1 3 retry LS SRV CB view Syntax retry times undo retry View LS SRV CB view Parameter times Number of retry times that are performed if the callback fails lt ranges from 1 to 10 times Description Use the retry command to set the number of retry times that are performed if the callback fails This setting applies to all subscribers for whom the callback on busy service is enabled Use the undo retry command to restore the default retry times of the callback on busy service By default the retry times of callback on busy is 10 Example Set the retry times of callback on busy to 3 XE 1s srv cb retry 3 15 1 4 srv switch cb
195. ew FTP client view Parameter username Name of a logon user password Logon password Description Use the user command to register with the FTP Example Log onto the FTP server with the username tom and password h3c ftp user tom h3c 4 4 24 verbose Syntax verbose undo verbose View FTP client view Parameter None Description Use the verbose command to enable the verbose to display the return information of the FTP server Use the undo verbose command to disable the verbose from displaying the return information of the FTP server By default the verbose is disabled Example Enable the verbose ftp verbose Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 4 File Management Commands 4 5 TFTP Configuration Commands 4 5 1 tftp Syntax tftp p address get sget put source filename destination filename a jp address View User view Parameter jjp address IP address of the TFTP server source filename Name of the source file destination filename Name of the destination file get Indicates a normal downloading operation In the get operation the XE IP PBX receives a user file and writes it into Flash simultaneously So when the destination filename is system the new system file will overwrite the old one in real time When the downloading fails e g the network is disconnected the XE IP PBX cannot start up because the old file is overwritten Therefore it is not safe t
196. ew included excluded view name oid tree undo snmp agent mib view view name View System view Parameter view name Name of the view oid tree OID MIB subtree of the Mib object subtree which can be a character string of the variable OID or of variable name For example it can be character strings such as 1 4 5 3 1 and system or use as wildcard for example 1 4 5 1 included Includes the MIB subtree excluded Exclude the MIB subtree Description Use the snmp agent mib view command to create or update the view information Use the undo snmp agent mib view command to delete the current settings By default the view name is ViewDefault and the OID is 1 3 6 1 Currently this command supports the parameter input of both the character string of the variable OID and the node name Related command snmp agent group Example Create a view that includes all MIB II objects XE snmp agent mib view included mib2 1 3 6 1 6 1 14 snmp agent packet max size Syntax snmp agent packet max size byte count undo snmp agent packet max size View System view 6 11 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Parameter Chapter 6 SNMP Configuration Commands byte count Maximum length of the SNMP packets that Agent can receive or send in the range of 484 bytes to 17940 bytes The default value is 2000 Description Example Use the snmp agent packet max size command to set the maxi
197. ew Parameter None Description Use the reset trapbuffer command to clear the information in trap buffer Example Clear the information in trap buffer lt XE gt reset trapbuffer 3 2 19 schedule reboot at Syntax schedule reboot at hh mm yyyy mm dd 3 22 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 3 System Maintenance and Management Commands View Parameter User view hh mm Time when the XE IP PBX reboots hhranges from 0 to 23 and mmranges from 0 to 59 yyyy mm dd Date when XE IP PBX reboots yyyy ranges from 2000 to 2099 mm can be from 1 to 12 and dd relies on the exact month Description Example Use the schedule reboot at command to schedule the reboot of the XE IP PBX and set the specific data and time By default the reboot of the XE IP PBX is not scheduled If you set the specific date parameter which represents a future time using the schedule reboot at command the XE IP PBX will reboot at the specified time within an error of one minute If no particular date is specified two cases are involved e lfthe configured time is later than the current time the XE IP PBX reboots at the time on that day e Ifthe configured time is earlier than the current time the XE IP PBX reboots at the time on the next day It should be noted that the configured date must not exceed the current date more than 30 days Additionally after you have configured the command the system
198. ew Type included View status active View name ViewDefault MIB Subtree snmpUsmMIB Subtree mask Storage type nonVolatile View Type excluded View status active View name ViewDefault MIB Subtree snmpVacmMIB Subtree mask Storage type nonVolatile View Type excluded View status active Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 6 SNMP Configuration Commands View name ViewDefault MIB Subtree snmpModules 18 Subtree mask Storage type nonVolatile View Type excluded View status active 6 1 6 display snmp agent statistics Syntax display snmp agent statistics View Any view Parameter None Description Use the display snmp agent statistics command to display the state and statistics of SNMP Example Display the statistics of SNMP communication lt XE gt display 0 CO oOo OO oO oOo OO OO OO 8 OO OO ON CO 0 0 0 Messages Messages Messages snmp agent statistics delivered to the SNMP entity which which were for an unsupported version used a SNMP community name not known Messages which represented an illegal operation for the community supplied AS Me SN SN SN SN P P P P PDUs PDUs PDUs PDUs whic whic whic whic 1 or BER errors in the process of decoding ssages passed from the SNMP entity h had badValue error status h had genErr error status h had noSuchName error status h had tooBig
199. eway GWO XE2000 ls gw GWO access prohibit 2 1 9 access LS OFFICEGROUP view Syntax access permit prohibit View LS OFFICEGROUP view 2 5 Command Manual System Management Chapter 2 GUI Server Configuration and Mana H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX gement Commands Parameter permit Permits normal administrators operations prohibit Prohibits normal administrators operations Description Use the access command to permit prohibit normal administrators operations on a specific office device By default normal administrators can operate office devices Example Prohibit normal administrators operations on office device og01 XE2000 1s og og01 access prohibit 2 1 10 access list Syntax access list gateway office permit prohibit View LS view Parameter gateway Gateway device office Office device permit Permits normal administrators operations prohibit Prohibits normal administrators operations Description Use the access list command to permit prohibit normal administrators to add delete gateway office devices By default normal administrators can add delete gateway office devices Example Prohibit normal administrators to add delete office devices XE2000 1s access list office prohibit 2 1 11 access command Syntax access command gateway gw ip address office group permit prohibit 2 6 Command Manual System Management Chapter 2 GUI Server Configur
200. example 1 9 stands for the range of 1 to 9 when they appear in i Character range For example 1 36A stands for optional characters 1 2 3 6 or A A group of characters For example 123A stands for string 123A Note The brackets and parentheses must be in complete form A bracket pair cannot include another bracket or parenthesis pair a parenthesis pair cannot include another parenthesis pair but a parenthesis pair can include another bracket pair Description Use the emergency call number command to add an emergency call number a number or a number regular expression Up to 16 emergency call numbers can be added Use the undo emergency call number command to remove the specified or all emergency call numbers 3 2 Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 3 Emergency Call Configuration Commands Example Add emergency call regular expression 11 XE 1s emgc emergency call number 11 3 3 Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 4 Inter Group Call Restriction Configuration Commands Chapter 4 Inter Group Call Restriction Configuration Commands 4 1 Inter Group Call Restriction Configuration Commands 4 1 1 call limit group Syntax call limit group View LS view Parameter None Description Use the call limit group command to enter call limit group view Example Enter call limit group view XE ls call limit group
201. f a PS is the voice service processing capability of the PS relative to other PSs in the same group This capability is set considering hardware performance bandwidth and number of allowed subscriber lines available with each PS in the same group Example Set the relative capability of a PS named ps0 to 10 XE 1s ps ps0 relative capability 10 2 1 8 sip port Syntax View Parameter sip port number undo sip port LS PS view number Specifies the port where the PS receives transmits SIP signaling as a backup PS or the PS in a redirect lt is in the range of 1 to 65535 and defaults to 5060 Description Use the sip port command to configure the port where the PS receives transmits SIP signaling as a backup PS or as the PS in a redirect 2 5 Command Manual Feature H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 2 Backup and Load Sharing Use the undo sip port command to restore the default Example Configure the PS named ps0 to transmit receive SIP signaling on port 1000 when functioning as a backup PS or the PS in a redirect XE 1s ps ps0 sip port 1000 2 1 9 subsline sum Syntax subsline sum value undo subsline sum View LS GW view Parameter value Number of subscriber lines an integer in the range of 1 to 1000 lt defaults to 4 Description Use the subsline sum command to set the number of subscriber lines that can be accommodated by the gateway Use the undo subsline sum command to restore the default This set
202. fied for all the RADIUS packets the RADIUS server will only need to contact the XE IP PBX using that IP address instead of registering the IP addresses of all the interfaces that are likely to send RADIUS packets Example Use 192 168 80 1 as the source IP address of all the RADIUS packets XE radius source address 192 168 80 1 4 1 5 radius timer response timeout Syntax radius timer response timeout seconds undo radius timer response timeout View System view Parameter seconds Timeout value for the RADIUS server ranging from 1 to 300 seconds The default value is 5 seconds Description Use the radius timer response timeout command to configure the timeout value of the RADIUS server Use the undo radius timer response timeout command to restore the default value 4 3 Command Manual Feature H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 4 VoIP RADIUS Accounting Configuration When replies are required for sent packets like authenticating request packets the timeout value should be configured and packets will be retransmitted in case of timeout Example Configure the timeout value for the RADIUS server to 5 seconds XE radius timer response timeout 5 4 1 6 acct Syntax acct enable disable View LS OFFICEGROUP OFFICE view Parameter enable Enables accounting on calling users on office devices disable Disables accounting on calling users on office devices Description Use the acct command to enable disable
203. figuration Call Services Process Server Configuration Feature Feature System Management System Management System Management Call Services Basic Configuration System Management Feature Feature Feature Feature Feature System Management System Management Feature Feature System Management System Management Process Server Configuration IP Performance and Application IP Performance and Application Location Server Configuration System Management 2 6 22 2 4 36 4 11 4 37 9 1 1 18 4 37 4 1 4 2 4 2 4 3 1 41 3 22 Command Manual Appendix H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX reset process server statistics reset recycle bin reset saved configuration reset tcp statistics reset trapbuffer reset udp statistics reset ual response irr retry LS SRV CB view return ring rmdir rmdir rule LS GW view rule LS OFFICEGROUP view rule Substitute table view S save save now schedule reboot at schedule reboot delay screen length script trigger connect script trigger dial script trigger init script trigger login script trigger logout script string send service service modem callback A 14 Appendix A Command Index Process Server Configuration System Management System Management IP Performance and Application System Management IP Performance and Application System Management Process Server Configuration Call Services Basic Configuration
204. filename View User view Parameter unreserved Deletes the specified file permanently and the deleted file can never be restored filename Name of the file to be deleted Description Use the delete command to delete the specified file restored in the storage device of the XE IP PBX The delete command supports the wildcard Using the delete command without parameters is to removed a file to recycle bin and you can be restore it with the undelete command If you want to delete the file from the recycle bin use reset recycle bin filename command Note that if you delete two files with same name but under different directories only the last file maintained in the recycle bin 4 6 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 4 File Management Commands If the delete command is used with the parameter unreserved the specified file will never be restored The dir command does not display the information of deleted files However by using the dir all command the information of all files including the files in recycle bin will be displayed A Caution If there is only one application file system file in the system you are not allowed to delete the file Example Delete the file flash test test txt lt XE gt delete flash test test txt Delete flash test test txt Y N y lt XE gt 4 1 7 dir Syntax dir all string flash View User view Parameter all Displays all
205. fix all View Emergency call service view Parameter all Removes all emergency call numbers emergency prefix Emergency call number or the corresponding regular expression It consists of 31 characters at most and these characters can be used A 1 O 9SABCD 4 3 1 Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 3 Emergency Call Configuration Commands The system judges an emergency call number by comparing it with all other emergency call numbers and their regular expressions A regular expression is a character string in formula form For example 1 6 means matching all four digit call numbers starting with 1 Table 3 1 describes the special characters used in regular expression Table 3 1 Special characters in regular expressions Character Description Indicates to match any single character including a blank space Indicates that the subset of the regular expression can be repeated for zero times or once Indicates that the subset of the regular expression can be repeated e id for zero or multiple times Indicates that the subset of the regular expression can be repeated once or for multiple times A Indicates that the regular expression can be matched only when it is at the beginning of a line Indicates that the regular expression can be matched only when it is at the end of a line Connects the maximum and minimum of a range For
206. gatekeeper to transmit and receive RAS signaling the backup port used by the gatekeeper to transmit or receive RAS signaling and the port used by the PS to listen the TCP connection requests for call control signaling channel that is the Q931 port Use the undo gk config rasport command to restore the default port used to transmit and receive RAS signaling Use the undo gk config q931port command to restore the default port used to transmit and receive Q931 signaling Use the undo gk config 2nd port command to delete the backup RAS port configuration of the gatekeeper Example Configure the gatekeeper to use port 1111 for transmitting and receiving RAS signaling XE ps gk gk config rasport 1111 1 1 8 heartbeat password Syntax heartbeat password password Command Manual Process Server Configuraiton H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX undo heartbeat password Chapter 1 Process Server View PS view Parameter password Heartbeat password 1 to 16 characters It defaults to XEngine Description Use the heartbeat password command to configure a password for heartbeat authentication Use the undo heartbeat password command to restore the default heartbeat password Example Set the heartbeat password for the PS to hb1234 XE ps heartbeat password hb1234 1 1 9 Irq mode Syntax Irq mode forward terminated undo Irq mode View PS GK view Parameter forward LRQ forward mode Terminated LRQ terminated mode Description Use
207. gement Commands If the name of destination file is same with that of an existing directory the file will be copied to the directory If the name of the destination file is the same with that of an existing file a prompt will appear asking whether to overwrite the existing file lt XE gt cd lt XE gt pwd flash 4 1 5 copy Syntax copy filename_source filename_dest View User view Parameter filename_source Name of the source file filename_dest Name of the destination file or directory Description Use the copy command to copy a file Example lt XE gt pwd flash lt XE gt dir Directory of flash 0 rw 8429335 Oct Iw 4 Sep 2 drw Sep 3 Iw 957 Nov 4 drw Mar 10 11 19 06 17 2002 2052 2052 2052 2005 4 5 10 20 11 14 1 5 10 48 38 04 03 10 59 56 08 42 system snmpboots anchun config cfg gg Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 4 File Management Commands 5 drw Mar 7 2005 15922551 backup 15621 KB total 1611 KB free Copy the config cfg from Flash to backup lt XE gt copy config cfg backup Copy flash config cfg to flash backup Y N y 100 complete SCopy file flash config cfg to flash backup Done lt XE gt cd backup lt XE gt dir Directory of flash backup 0 rw 957 Mar 17 2005 16 15 40 config cfg 15621 KB total 1610 KB free 4 1 6 delete Syntax delete unreserved
208. group name of SNMP and security mode lt XE gt display snmp agent group Group name v3r2 Security model v3 noAuthnoPriv Readview ViewDefault Writeview lt no specified gt Notifyview lt no specified gt Storage type nonvolatile Table 6 1 Description on the fields of the display snmp agent group command Item Description Groupname SNMP group name corresponding to the user Name of the MIB view with the read only authority the SNMP Readview group corresponds to Writeview Name of the MIB view with the write read authority the SNMP group corresponds to Notifyview Name of the MIB view with the notify authority the SNMP group corresponds to storage type Storage type 6 3 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 6 SNMP Configuration Commands 6 1 5 display snmp agent mib view Syntax display snmp agent mib view exclude include viewname view name View Any view Parameter exclude Specifies not to display the specific SNMP MIB view attributes include Specifies to display the specific SNMP MIB view attributes viewname Specifies the view name to be displayed Description Use the display snmp agent mib view command to display the information of the current MIB view Example Display the information of the current MIB view lt XE gt display snmp agent mib view View name ViewDefault MIB Subtree internet Subtree mask Storage type nonVolatile Vi
209. gth Packetization time length in 10 milliseconds in the range of 1 to 18 video Sets the video codec type h263 Sets the video codec type as H263 h261 Sets the video codec type as H261 data Sets the data codec type t38fax Sets T38 faxing support Description Example Use the codec command to configure the codec type used when the gatekeeper initiates capability negotiation to an office device Use the undo codec command to restore the default codec type By default the codec type configured on the office device is adopted For subscriber 8801 set codec type to G 729 so that the gatekeeper uses to initiate capability negotiation to an office device to G 729 Set the packetization time length to 40 ms and video codec to H261 XE ls og og01 8801 codec audio g729 packet length 4 XE ls og og01 8801 codec video h261 Command Manual Location Server Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Location Server Commands 1 1 12 debugging location server Syntax debugging location server call heartbeat register all level eve number undo debugging location server call heartbeat register all View User view Parameter call Enables call debugging heartbeat Enables heartbeat backup management and tunnel debugging register Enables registration debugging all Enables all debugging options level evel number Sets the debugging level of LS ranging from 0 to 7 Debugging is disabled when the le
210. guil web start WEB Server is started XE2000 gui 2 1 7 display gui user Syntax display gui user all online View Any view Parameter all Displays all GUI administrators online Displays the current login administrartors Description Use the display gui user command to display administrator information Example Display the current login administrators XE2000 guildisplay gui user online User Name User Level IP Address Port XEAdmin Super 192 168 1 88 1675 User Number 1 XE2000 gui 2 4 Command Manual System Management Chapter 2 GUI Server Configuration and Mana H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX gement Commands Table 2 1 Description on the fields of the display gui user command Item Description User Name User name User Level User level IP Address The IP address of the GUI client that the user uses Port The port of the GUI client that the user uses User Number User number 2 1 8 access LS GW view Syntax access permit prohibit View LS GW view Parameter permit Permits normal administrators operations prohibit Prohibits normal administrators operations Description Use the access permit prohibit command to permit prohibit normal administrators operations on a specific gateway device By default normal administrators can operate gateway devices Example Prohibit normal administrators operations on gateway GWO XE2000 1s gat
211. gw gw01 1 1001 srv switch clip on 8 1 4 srv switch clir Syntax srv switch clir on off View Subscriber number view Parameter on Enables CLIR service off Disables CLIR service Description Use the srv switch clir command to enable or disable CLIR service By default CLIR service is not enabled 8 2 Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 8 Calling Line Identification Configuration Commands Example Enable CLIR service XE 1s gw gw01 1 1001 srv switch clir on 8 1 5 srv switch rio Syntax srv switch rio on off View Subscriber number view Parameter on Enables CLIR override service off Disables CLIR override service Description Use the srv switch rio command to enable or disable CLIR override service By default CLIR override service is not enabled Example Enable CLIR override service XE 1s gw gw01 1 1001 srv switch rio on 8 1 6 srv switch tcir Syntax srv switch tcir on off View Subscriber number view Parameter on Enables temporary reservation for CLIR service off Disables temporary reservation for CLIR service Description Use the srv switch tcir command to enable or disable temporary reservation for CLIR service By default temporary reservation for CLIR service is not enabled 8 3 Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 8 Calling Line Identification Configuration Commands Example Enable tempor
212. he PS group that the gateway device belongs to ps id ID of the primary PS for gateway registration Description Use the psgroup id command to assign the gateway to a PS group as well as the primary PS 2 2 Command Manual Feature H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 2 Backup and Load Sharing Use the undo psgroup id command to restore the default By default the gateway does not belong to any PS group Example Assign gateway gw0 to a PS group named group1 and specify that the primary PS is masterProcessServer XE 1s gw gw0 psgroup id groupl master ps masterProcessServer 2 1 4 psgroup id LS PS view Syntax psgroup id group id undo psgroup id View LS PS view Parameter group id PS group identifier 1 to 32 characters Description Use the psgroup id command to assign the PS to a PS group Use the undo psgroup id command to restore the default By default the PS does not belong to any PS group Example Assign ps0 to PS group named group1 XE 1s ps ps0 psgroup id groupl 2 1 5 ras port Syntax ras port number undo ras port View LS PS view 2 3 Command Manual Feature H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 2 Backup and Load Sharing Parameter number Specifies the port where the PS receives transmits RAS signaling as a backup PS or the PS in a redirect It is in the range of 1 to 65535 and defaults to 1719 Description Use the ras port command to configure the port where the PS receives transmits RA
213. he files on a specified storage device Format Flash lt XE gt format flash All sectors will be erased proceed Y N y Chapter 4 File Management Commands Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 4 File Management Commands Format flash completed 4 1 11 mkdir Syntax mkdir directory View User view Parameter directory Name of directory Description Use the mkdir command to create a directory under the specified directory on the specified storage device The name of the directory to be created cannot be the same with that of any other directory or file under the specified directory Example Create a directory named dd lt XE gt mkdir dd Created dir flash dd 4 1 12 more Syntax more filename View User view Parameter filename Name of the file Description Uses the more command to display the contents of a specified file By default the file system displays the file in the form of text that is the contents of the file 4 10 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 4 File Management Commands Example Display the content of the file test txt lt XE gt more test txt AppWizard has created this test application for you This file contains a summary of what you will find in each of the files that make up your test application Test dap This file the project file contains information at the project level and is used to build a si
214. he interface is Ethernet 0 0 for XE 200 IP PBX and GigabitEthernet 0 0 for XE 2000 IP PBX Example Specify the interface and port number of the LS XE200 ls ls config interface ethernet 0 0 port 12345 1 1 31 manufacturer Syntax manufacturer other h3c undo manufacturer View LS GW view Parameter other Sets the manufacturer of a gateway to other h3c Sets the manufacturer of a gateway to H3C Description Use the manufacturer command to set the manufacturer for a gateway registered with the LS Use the undo manufacturer command to restore the default manufacturer By default the manufacturer is h3c Note e f you use the manufacturer command to set the manufacturer of the gateway to other the system will disable the dynamic update of the gateway s IP address e f you use the dynamic ip command to enable the dynamic update of the gateway s IP address you cannot use the manufacturer command to change the manufacturer setting of the gateway 1 29 Command Manual Location Server Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Location Server Commands Example Set the manufacturer of the gateway gw001 to other XE 1s gw gw001 manufacturer other 1 1 32 multiplex LS GW view Syntax multiplex disable enable undo multiplex View LS GW view Parameter disable Disables multiplexing enable Enables multiplexing Description Use the multiplex command to specify the multiplexing mode of
215. he number query service off Disables the number query service Description Use the srv switch query self command to enable or disable the number query service By default the number query service is disabled Example Enable the number query service for subscriber 1001 XE 1s gw gw01 0 1001 srv switch query self on Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 26 Alarm Clock Service Chapter 26 Alarm Clock Service 26 1 Alarm Clock Service Configuration Commands 26 1 1 alarm subscriber number view Syntax alarm View Subscriber number view Parameter None Description Use the alarm command to enter alarm clock view Example Enter alarm clock view XE 1s gw gw01 1 8801 alarm XE 1s gw gw01 1 8801 alarm 26 1 2 alarm alarm clock view Syntax alarm date time time once cycle undo alarm View Alarm clock view Parameter date Date to execute the alarm clock task in the format of YYYY MM DD time Time to execute the alarm clock task in the format of HH MM where HH is optional once Specifies the type of the alarm as once that is the alarm is executed only once at the specified time Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 26 Alarm Clock Service cycle Specifies that the alarm clock goes off at the set time every day Description Use the alarm command to set an alarm clock task which can be any of the two types e One off al
216. he start configuration file if it exists if the file does not exist the system starts with null configuration Set the configuration file to be used for the next boot to master cfg lt XE gt startup saved configuration master cfg Display the configuration file used for the next boot lt XE gt display startup Startup saved configuration file flash config cfg Next startup saved configuration file flash master cfg The config cfg file is the system default configuration file and the master cfg is the specified configuration file used for next startup 4 2 9 upgrade Syntax View Parameter upgrade bootrom full User view bootrom Updates the Boot ROM program full Updates all of the Boot ROM Description Use the upgrade command to upgrade the Boot ROM program 4 21 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 4 File Management Commands Example Boot ROM program of XE IP PBX supports online upgrade You can upgrade the Boot ROM online by extracting the Boot ROM program from the upgrade software package and writing it into the Boot ROM When executing this command make sure that the upgrade software package named bootromfull is in the root directory of the Flash Upgrade the Boot ROM program of R1760 XE IP PBX Suppose the upgrade software package has been stored in the root directory of the Flash and the file name is bootromfull lt XE gt upgrade bootrom full
217. he user interface Use the undo parity command to restore the default check mode that is none The configuration is effective only when the AUX interface works in asynchronous flow mode Example Set the transmission parity bit on the AUX interface to odd parity XE ui aux0 parity odd 1 1 16 redirect Syntax redirect undo redirect View User interface view Parameter None Description Use the redirect command to enable redirection on the asynchronous port Use the undo redirect command to disable redirection on the asynchronous port By default redirection is disabled This command is only applicable to AUX user interfaces 1 11 Command Manual System Management Chapter 1 Terminal Service and User Interface H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Configuration Commands Related command telnet display tcp status Example Enable redirect on the user interface AUXO XE ui aux0 redirect 1 1 17 screen length Syntax screen length screen length undo screen length View User interface view Parameter screen length Number of lines displayed on the screen in the range of 0 to 512 Description Use the screen length command to set the number of lines displayed on the terminal screen Use the undo screen length command to restore the default 24 lines Setting the screen length to 0 disables multiple screen output Example Set the number of lines on the terminal screen to 30 XE ui console0 screen length 30 1 1 18 send
218. he user role can call Description Use the subscriber type command to add the user number type that the user role can call Use the undo subscriber type command to remove specified or all the user number types that the user role can call Example Add the user number type mobile that the user role sales can call XE ls subscriber role sales XE 1s ssbr sales subscriber type mobile 5 1 9 type Syntax type prefix undo type prefix all View User number type view Parameter prefix Matching regular expression which consists of 31 characters at most all Removes all regular expressions Description Use the type command to configure the regular expression matching the user number type Use the undo type command to remove specified or all regular expression You can define up to 16 regular expressions Example Configure user numbers with prefix 133 as type mobile Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 5 Outgoing Call Authority Configuration Commands XE 1s subscriber type mobile XE 1s ssbt mobile type 133 5 7 Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 6 Abbreviated Dialing Configuration Commands Chapter 6 Abbreviated Dialing Configuration Commands 6 1 Abbreviated Dialing Configuration Commands 6 1 1 adi abbreviated dialing service view Syntax adi ab number long number undo adi ab number all View Abbreviated dialing service view Parameter ab num
219. he video codec type as H261 data Sets the data codec type t38fax Sets T38 faxing support Description Use the codec command to configure the codec type when the gatekeeper initiates capability negotiation with a gateway device If anumber is not configured with a codec type the codec type configured for the gateway will be used instead Use the undo codec command to restore the default codec type By default the codec type configured on the gateway is adopted Example For subscriber 8801 set codec type to G 729 so that the gatekeeper uses it to initiate capability negotiation to a gateway device Set the packetization time length as 40 ms and video codec type as H261 XE ls gw gw000 8801 codec audio g729 packet length 4 XE ls gw gw000 8801 codec video h261 Command Manual Location Server Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Location Server Commands 1 1 8 codec LS GW SUBSCRIBER view Syntax codec audio g7231 g729 pcma pemu packet length packet length video h261 h263 data t38fax undo codec audio video data View LS GW SUBSCRIBER view Parameter audio Sets the audio codec type 97231 Sets the audio codec type as G 723 1 g729 Sets the audio codec type as G 729 pcma Sets the audio codec type as G 711 A law 64K pemu Sets the audio codec type as G 711 u law 64K packet length Packetization time length that ranges from 1 to 18 in units of 10 ms video Sets the video c
220. hedule reboot command to view the parameters of the terminal service of schedule reboot Related command reboot schedule reboot at schedule reboot delay undo schedule reboot Example Display the parameters of schedule reboot set on XE IP PBX lt XE gt display schedule reboot Reboot system at 16 00 00 2002 11 1 in 2 hours and 5 minutes 3 2 5 display trapbuffer Syntax View Parameter display trapbuffer size sizeval Any view size Specifies the number of the information entries in the log buffer sizeval Number of the information entries to be displayed Description Use the display trapbuffer command to display the trap buffer information By default the command without any parameter displays all the trap buffer information If the size of the current trap buffer is smaller than the user specified sizeval all of the current trap information will be displayed Related command info center enable info center trapbuffer display info center 3 11 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 3 System Maintenance and Management Commands Example Display the trap buffer information lt XE gt display trapbuffer Trapping Buffer Configuration and contents enabled allowed max buffer size 1024 actual buffer size 256 channel number 3 channel name trapbuf dropped messages 0 overwrote messages 0 current messages 0 Display 23 entries of information
221. her either inside or between groups The undo forbid all call all command removes multiple call limit entries and restore the default call limit relationship The call limit relationship is unidirectional Although the src call limit group cannot call the dst call limit group the dst call limit group still can call the src call limit group 4 5 Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 4 Inter Group Call Restriction Configuration Commands By default any two groups can make calls to each other Example Configure that group beijing cannot call group shanghai XE ls clg forbid beijing call shanghai 4 1 7 limited call group subscriber number view Syntax limited call group View Subscriber number view Parameter None Description Use the limited call group command to enter call limit group service view Example Enter call limit group service view XE 1s gw curcfggw 1 1000 limited call group XE 1s gw curcfggw 1 1000 1cg 4 1 8 limited call group call limit group view Syntax limited call group imited call group undo limited call group View Call limit group view Parameter limited call group Name of the call limit group for the current user which is case sensitive and consists of 16 characters at most Description Use the limited call group command to add a user to a call limit group Use the undo limited call group command to remove a user from a call limit group 4 6 Command
222. hop Flag TimeStamp Interface 192 168 80 0 24 192 168 80 40 U t 0 Ethernet0 0 Display FIB table entries whose destinations ranges from 169 254 0 0 16 to 169 254 0 6 16 lt XE gt display fib 169 254 0 0 255 255 0 0 169 254 0 6 255 255 0 0 Destination Mask Nexthop Flag TimeStamp Interface 169 254 0 1 16 Dele E U t 0 Ethernet1 0 1 1 9 display fib statistics Syntax display fib statistics View Any view Parameter None Description Use the display fib statistics command to display the total number of the FIB table entries Example Display the total number of the FIB table entries lt XE gt display fib statistics Route Entry Count 30 1 1 10 display ip interface Syntax display ip interface interface type interface number brief interface type interface number View Any view Parameter interface type Type of the interface interface number Number of the interface Command Manual IP Performance and Application H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX brief Description Example Displays summary information Chapter 1 IP Performance Configuration Commands Use the display ip interface command to display information of IP interface By default information of all IP interfaces will be displayed if no interface is specified Running this command will display all IP related information of the specified interface which can help error diagnosing Related command display interface Display I
223. icDomain map to firewall IP 192 168 1 22 map to firewall port 9600 Table 1 5 Description on the fields of the display location server tunnelpeer command Field Description Tunnelpeer Identifier ID of the tunnel end pair current state The status of the tunnel end pair Private Domain Process Server Information The domain that the private network PS of pelongtodomaimn this tunnel end pair belongs to The destination IP address that the public network PS uses to send IP packets to the map to firewall IP private network PS Usually it is the public IP address on the firewall that corresponds to the private network PS The destination port that the public network map to firewall port PS uses to send IP packets to the private network PS Public Domain Process Server Information The domain that the public network PS of this being comal tunnel end pair belongs to The destination IP address that the private map to firewall IP network PS uses to send IP packets to the public network PS The destination port that the private network map to firewall port PS uses to send IP packets to the public network PS Command Manual Location Server Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Location Server Commands 1 1 24 dynamic ip Syntax dynamic ip disable enable undo dynamic ip View LS GW view Parameter enable Enables the dynamic update of the gateway s IP addres
224. ice view Example Enter user management service view XE 1s gw gw02 1 1001 ssch manage 2 1 2 subscriber status Syntax subscriber status normal callout callin forbid View User management service view Parameter normal The user is in normal status and can make incoming or outgoing calls after startup or rebooting callout The user can only make outgoing calls but no incoming calls callin The user can only make incoming calls but no outgoing calls forbid The user can make neither incoming calls nor outgoing calls 2 1 Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 2 User Management Configuration Commands Description Use the subscriber status command to configure user status The user status defaults to normal Example Configure the user in callin status XE 1s gw gw02 1 1001 ssbm subscriber status callin 2 2 Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 3 Emergency Call Configuration Commands Chapter 3 Emergency Call Configuration Commands 3 1 Emergency Call Configuration Commands 3 1 1 emergency call Syntax emergency call View LS view Parameter None Description Use the emergency call command to enter emergency call service view Example Enter emergency call service view XE 1s emergency call XE 1s emgc 3 1 2 emergency call number Syntax emergency call number emergency prefix undo emergency call number emergency pre
225. iew Parameter on Enables time limit call service 13 2 Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 13 Time Limit Call Configuration Commands off Disables time limit call service Description Use the srv switch limited time call command to enable or disable time limit call service By default time limit call service is not enabled Example Enable time limit call service XE 1s gw gw01 1 1001 srv switch limited time call on 13 3 Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 14 Third Party Call Control Service Chapter 14 Third Party Call Control Service 14 1 Third Party Call Control Service Configuration Commands 14 1 1 3pcc Syntax 3pcc View LS SRV view Parameter None Description Use the 3pcc command to enter 3PCC view Example Enter 3PCC view XE ls srv 3pcc XE 1s srv 3pcc 14 1 2 display location server 3pcc Syntax display location server 3pcc participant number active all View Any view Parameter participant number Phone numbers of participants of the third party call control task active Displays information about the ongoing third party call control task all Displays information about all existing third party call control tasks Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 14 Third Party Call Control Service Description Example Use the display location server 3pcc command to display information ab
226. ime file size and file name This command is supported only by the XE200 For the related commands see dir bootfile main and bootfile backup A Caution Only XE IP PBX 200 supports this command Example Display the information about all the boot files in the Flash XE bootfile dir 4 2 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Aviliable boot file s Chapter 4 5556068 5556068 File Management Commands Main bin Backup bin M MAIN B BACKUP S SECURE No Type Date Time 1 M Mar 15 2004 18 09 S B Mar 15 2004 18 09 1 S Mar 15 2004 18 09 5556068 Secure bin 4 1 3 bootfile main Syntax bootfile main main bootfile name View System view Parameter main bootfile name Main boot file for booting the XE IP PBX Description Using the bootfile main command you can specify the main boot file Three bootfiles are defined in the system by default main boot file backup boot file and secure boot file The system uses them in the following order e Main boot file with the default name being main bin and file type being M is the default file for system boot e Backup boot file with the default name being backup bin and file type being B is the boot file used in case of the boot failure using the main boot file e Secure boot file with the default name being secure bin and file type being S is the boot file used in case of the boot failure using the ba
227. in the non promiscuous mode When the Ethernet interface operates in the promiscuous mode it receives all correct Ethernet packets without checking their MAC addresses This mode is applied to traffic monitoring on the network Example Enable the interface Ethernet 0 0 to operate in the promiscuous mode XE Ethernet0 0 promiscuous 2 1 8 speed Syntax speed 10 100 1000 negotiation undo speed View Ethernet interface view Parameter 10 Forces the Ethernet interface to operate at 10 Mbps 100 Forces the Ethernet interface to operate at 100 Mbps 1000 Forces the Ethernet interface to operate at 1000 Mbps only for GE interfaces negotiation Sets the Ethernet interface to operate in auto negotiation mode Description Use the speed command to set the operating speed of the Ethernet interface Use the undo speed command to restore the default mode or auto negotiation Before setting the Ethernet interface to auto negotiation mode you must ensure the remote interface also operates in this mode If this is uncertain you are recommended to manually set the same operating mode on the two sides For an FE electrical interface you can set its speed to 10 Mbps 100 Mbps or auto negotiation and for a GE electrical interface 1000 Mbps in addition However the speeds of FE fiber optic interfaces and GE fiber optic interfaces are fixed to 100 Mbps and 1000 Mbps respectively allowing no modification 2 7 Command Manual B
228. ing a leading in a script it means that no string needs to be sent and the system directly waits for a receive string If locates in any other locations in the script it is regarded as the content of a string You can insert ABORT receive string anywhere in a script to change the execution flow of this script Its presence in the script indicates that the script execution will be terminated if a received string exactly matches the receive string set by ABORT receive string You can set more than one ABORT receive string in a script all of they will take effect that is once a received string matches any one of them the script execution is terminated Wherever an ABORT receive string is placed it takes effect in the whole script execution process You can insert escape characters in a script to further control the script and increase its flexibility In addition all the escape characters also play the role of delimiters in strings as well Table 7 2 Escape characters used in script Escape ache charactor Description Represents that the system does not automatically append a ic carriage return to the string it sends only the specified characters in the string The c character is valid only when it is located at the end of the send string d Represents a two second pause n Represents the new line character r Represents the carriage return character s Represents the space character 7 8
229. ing arp packet command to disable ARP packets debugging Example Enable ARP packets debugging lt XE gt debugging arp packet 2 1 3 display arp Syntax display arp static dynamic all begin fext exclude text include text View Any view Parameter static Indicates to display the static ARP entries dynamic Indicates to display the dynamic ARP entries all Indicates to display all the ARP entries Indicates to display the entries that match the string text begin Indicates to display the entries that start with the string text exclude Indicates to display the entries that do not contain the string text include Indicates to display the entries that contain the string text text Regular expression Command Manual IP Performance and Application H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 2 IP Application Configuration Commands Description Use the display arp command to display the ARP mapping table By default all ARP entries are displayed Related command arp static reset arp Example Display all the ARP entries lt XE gt display arp Type S Static D Dynamic IP Address MAC Address Type Interface 192 168 80 30 00e0 c20 2180 D GEO 0 192 168 80 100 00b0 d0bc f323 D GE0 0 There are two mapping entries in the example above Take the first entry as an example It displays the IP address 192 168 80 30 and MAC address 00e0 fc20 2180 which is acquired through configuring static
230. ing the and operation with the IP address and the mask you can get the number 129 9 0 0 of the network where the router Ethernet interface is located In addition any two IP addresses of the interfaces on the XE IP PBX can be located in the same subnet Related command ip route static display interface 2 4 Command Manual Basic Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 2 Ethernet Interface Configuration Commands Example Set the primary IP address of the interface GigabitEthernet0 0 to 129 102 0 1 with the subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 XE2000 GigabitEthernet0 0 ip address 129 102 0 1 255 255 255 0 2 1 5 loopback Ethernet Gigabitethernet Interface Syntax loopback undo loopback View Ethernet interface view Parameter None Description Use the loopback command to enable local loopback on the Ethernet interface Use the undo loopback command to disable local loopback on the interface By default local loopback is disabled on the Ethernet interface Local loopback is only intended for test purpose Note An Ethernet interface with loopback enabled is operating in full duplex mode After loopback is disabled the original operating mode is resumed For a GE electrical interface that operates at 1000 Mbps or in auto negotiation mode its rate is forcibly switched to 100 Mbps after local loopback is enabled and resumed after local loopback is disabled Example Enable local loopback on the FE interface 0 0
231. io port number 1 16 Command Manual Process Server Configuraiton H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Process Server View PS SIP view Parameter port Specifies the SIP signaling port of the PS sip port number Port number It defaults to 5060 Description Use the sip config command to configure the port where the PS receives transmits SIP signaling Example Set the SIP signaling port number of the PS to 2222 XE ps sip sip config port 2222 1 1 20 start PS view Syntax start View PS view Parameter None Description Use the start command to enable the PS Enabling the PS will enable the gatekeeper and the SIP server By default the PS is disabled Example Start the PS XE ps start 1 1 21 start PS GK view Syntax start 1 17 Command Manual Process Server Configuraiton H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX View PS GK view Parameter None Description Use the start command to enable the gatekeeper By default the gatekeeper is disabled Example Start the gatekeeper XE ps gk start 1 1 22 start PS SIP view Syntax start View PS SIP view Parameter None Description Use the start command to enable the SIP server By default the SIP server is disabled Example Enable the SIP server XE ps sip start 1 1 23 stop PS GK view Syntax stop View PS GK view 1 18 Chapter 1 Process Server Command Manual Process Server Configuraiton H3C XE 200 2000 I
232. ion Description Example Use the display logbuffer command to display the log buffer information By default the system displays all the log buffer information using the command without any parameter If the size of the current log buffer is smaller than the user specified sizevalue all of the current log will be displayed Related command info center enable info center logbuffer display info center Display the log buffer information lt XE gt display logbuffer Logging buffer configuration and contents enabled Allowed max buffer size 1024 Actual buffer size 512 Channel number 4 Channel name logbuffer Dropped messages 0 Overwritten messages 0 Current messages 18 SApr 21 12 38 08 2006 H3C IC 7 SYS_RESTART System restarted H3C Comware Software Copyright c 2004 2007 Hangzhou H3C Technology Co Ltd SApr 21 12 38 17 2006 H3C PHY 2 PHY Ethernet0 0 change status to up SApr 21 12 39 57 2006 H3C SHELL 5 LOGIN Console login from con0 SApr 21 12 49 58 2006 H3C HWCM 5 EXIT exit from configure mode SApr 21 12 49 58 2006 H3C SHELL 5 LOGOUT Console logout from con0 SApr 21 13 40 19 2006 H3C SHELL 5 LOGIN Console login from con0 3 10 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 3 System Maintenance and Management Commands 3 2 4 display schedule reboot Syntax display schedule reboot View Any view Parameter None Description Use the display sc
233. ion displays as follows role rolel typell typel2 role role2 type21 type22 role1 and role2 represent the user role type11 and type12 represent the user number role1 supports type21 and type22 represent the user number type role2 supports 5 1 3 display location server subscriber type Syntax display location server subscriber type subscriber type View Any view Parameter subscriber type User number type which is case sensitive and consists of 32 characters at most Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 5 Outgoing Call Authority Configuration Commands Description Use the display location server subscriber type command to display all user number types configured in the system Use the display location server subscriber type subscriber type command to display the regular expressions that correspond to the specified user number type Example Display all user number types configured in the system lt XE gt display location server subscriber type mobile Display the regular expressions that correspond to user number type mobile lt XE gt display location server subscriber type mobile 136 137 138 139 From information above we can see the user number type mobile matches regular expressions 136 137 138 and 139 5 1 4 srv switch cba Syntax srv switch cba on off View Subscriber number view Parameter on Enables outgoing call control service off Disables outgoing
234. iption Use the display media server media resource predefine command to display the predefined media resource values Example Display the predefined language type XE display media server media resource predefine language Chinese English 2 1 3 format Syntax format format string undo format format string all View Language view Parameter format string Media format The value is G711a G711u G7231 or G729 all Deletes all the media formats Description Use the format command to configure the media resource format supported by the language type and enter format view Use the undo format command to delete all the media resource formats supported by the language type Example Enable G711a support in the Chinese mode XE ma Chinese format G lla 2 2 Command Manual Media Server H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 2 Media Resource Configuration Commands 2 1 4 language Syntax language anguage undo language language all View Media ability view Parameter language Language type The value is Chinese or English e Chinese Enters Chinese language view e English Enters English language view all Deletes all the configuration supported by the language type Description Use the language command to enter the specified language view Use the undo language command to delete all the configuration supported by the corresponding language type or delete all the configuration supported by all the language types Ex
235. isconnects the user connection upon completion of execution Acommon approach is to issue a Telnet command using the auto execute command command on the terminal so that the user may automatically connect to the specified host Use this command with cautions as it may make you unable to use this user interface to configure the system A Caution Before configuring the auto execute command command and saving the configuration by executing the save command make sure that you can access the system to remove the configuration by other means Execute the telnet 10 110 100 1 command automatically at login on the AUX interface Command Manual System Management Chapter 1 Terminal Service and User Interface H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Configuration Commands XE ui aux0 auto execute command telnet 10 110 100 1 1 1 3 databits Syntax databits 5 6 7 8 undo databits View User interface view Parameter 5 Data bits are 5 6 Data bits are 6 7 Data bits are 7 8 Data bits are 8 Description Use the databits command to set data bits for the user interface Use the undo databits command to restore the default data bits that is eight The configuration takes effect only when the AUX interface works in asynchronous flow mode Example Set data bits to 5 XE ui aux0 databits 5 1 1 4 debugging vty Syntax debugging vty fsm negotiate undo debugging vty fsm negotiate View User view Parameter fsm Enables to
236. isplay process server location Server status 1 4 1 1 5 display process server StatiStiCS oooooooonnnnccnoninicconnancccnn narco narrar rr 1 5 US Re EE cece tee ine a ie nein 1 8 VALOR CONO EE 1 9 1 1 8 heartbeat pasSWolO ooocccnnccinocicoccccconnnononcnnnoccnnnnannnnn nana n cnn nn r arrancan 1 9 US BC Rit Bue 1 10 UE elei Oe 1 11 gfe eal E ue 1 11 1 1 12 policy call interrupt by lONg tiMe 00 2 2 eee eeeeee cece eeeeeeeeaeeeeeee teense saeeeteaeeeeeeessaees 1 12 1 1 13 policy e HIE Tune e oi dire 1 13 RS at Me en e DEE 1 13 dido CET oy cos a aa 1 14 1 1 16 reset process server statstce 1 14 ASTM 7 FESPONSE I A244 tick beet te ae te id tie 1 15 EN De TEE ad et 1 16 dl RSC a ds ioe ad baa dana ca e al 1 16 EN BR TE 1 17 141 21 stat PS2 GK ViOW EE 1 17 1 1 22 start PS SIP VIEW vicio a A idi evade 1 18 1 1 23 stop PS GK view 1 18 1 1 24 stop PS SIP view 1 19 1125 Stop PS VOW teeta ania tan tite than Wie r lee 1 19 1 1 26 timeout Gelee euer EENEG aiai a at 1 20 TAs2 7 TIMEOUT Call tac sight hss a ai 1 21 11 28 ee UE 1 21 Command Manual Process Server Configuraiton H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Process Server Chapter 1 Process Server 1 1 Process Server Commands 1 1 1 debugging process server Syntax View Parameter debugging process server adapter all bkm cdp cm csm hadpt hrm hsm hstack om rm sm stack tucl level eve undo debugging process server adapter
237. its nation num Country code of the number resource region num Area code of the number resource The total length of nation num and region num should be within eight bits Description Use the display subscriber command to display information about the device the specified number belongs to Example Display information about the device subscriber number 3301 belongs to lt XE gt display subscriber 3301 Long number 3301 Device type Gateway Device identifier gw03 Device ip address 192 168 80 30 Device port 1719 Device route type Dynamic route Device Priority 10 1 1 8 number substitute Syntax number substitute tab e identifier undo number substitute table identifier all View LS view Parameter table identifier Substitute table identifier 1 to 7 characters all All substitute tables Description Use the number substitute command to create a substitute table Command Manual Feature H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Number Substitution Use the undo number substitute command to delete the specified or all substitute tables You can create up to 64 substitute tables each containing up to eight rules By default no substitute table exists Example Create a substitute table named table1 XE ls number substitute tablel XE 1s sst tablel 1 1 9 policy area code substitute Syntax policy area code substitute enable disable undo policy area code substitute
238. ity LS OFFICEGROUP OFFICE view Configuration 1 2 Location Server belongto Configuration 2 1 binary System Management 4 28 bootfile backup System Management 4 1 bootfile dir System Management 4 2 bootfile main System Management 4 3 break Call Services 11 1 bye System Management 4 29 C caller group Call Services 20 1 caller member Call Services 20 1 call limit group Call Services 4 1 Location Server call mode Configuration 1 2 Location Server call signal ip address Configuration 1 3 Location Server call signal port Configuration 1 4 cb Call Services 15 1 cba Call Services 5 1 cd System Management 4 4 cd System Management 4 29 cdup System Management 4 30 cfb Call Services 10 9 cfb number Call Services 10 9 cfc Call Services 10 4 cf caller Call Services 10 4 cfnr Call Services 10 2 cfnr number Call Services 10 3 cfo Call Services 10 7 A 2 Command Manual Appendix H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Appendix A Command Index cfo number Call Services 10 8 cft CFT service view Call Services 10 6 cft subscriber number view Call Services 10 6 cfu Call Services 10 1 cfu number Call Services 10 1 change Call Services 4 1 clir CLIR service view Call Services 8 1 clir subscriber number view Call Services 8 1 clock datetime Basic Configuration 1 1 clock summer time Basic Configuration 1 1 clock timezone Basic Configuration 1 2 close System Management 4 30 Location Server codec LS GW view Configuration 1 7 Location Server codec LS GW
239. l Media Server H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 3 LS Side MS Configuration Commands Chapter 3 LS Side MS Configuration Commands 3 1 MS Configuration Commands on the LS 3 1 1 heartbeat password LS MS view Syntax heartbeat password password undo heartbeat password View LS MS view Parameter password Heartbeat password between the MS and the LS containing 1 to 16 characters case insensitive Description Use the heartbeat password command to configure the heartbeat password between the MS and LS on the LS Use the undo heartbeat password command to restore the default heartbeat password By default the heartbeat password is XEngine Example Set the heartbeat password between the LS and the MS media01 to xe2000 on the LS XE 1s ms media01 heartbeat password xe2000 3 1 2 language LS MS view Syntax language language undo language View LS MS view 3 1 Command Manual Media Server H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 3 LS Side MS Configuration Commands Parameter language Language type supported by the MS The value is Chinese or English Description Use the language command to configure the current language type on the LS for the MS to play voice prompt Use the undo language command to remove the current language type By default no language type supported by the MS is configured Example Configure the MS media01 to use English as the current language type for playing voice
240. l on 9 2 Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 10 Call Forwarding Configuration Commands Chapter 10 Call Forwarding Configuration Commands 10 1 CFU Configuration Commands 10 1 1 cfu Syntax cfu View Subscriber number view Parameter None Description Use the cfu command to enter call forwarding unconditional CFU service view Example Enter CFU service view XE 1s gw gw01 1 1001 cfu XE 1s gw gw01 1 1001 cful 10 1 2 cfu number Syntax cfu number forward number undo cfu number forward number all View CFU service view Parameter forward number Target CFU number which consists of up to 31 characters which can be digits from O to 9 letters A B C and D and signs and all Removes all target CFU numbers Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 10 Call Forwarding Configuration Commands Description Use the cfu number command to add target CFU numbers Up to 2 target CFU numbers can be added Use the undo cfu number command to remove specified or all target CFU numbers Example Add target CFU number 8888 XE 1s gw gw01 1 1001 cfu cfu number 8888 10 1 3 srv switch cfu Syntax srv switch cfu on off View Subscriber number view Parameter on Enables CFU service off Disables CFU service Description Use the srv switch cfu command to enable or disable CFU service By default CFU service is enabled Example Enable
241. layer protocol status of the interface Internet Address is 192 168 80 50 24 IP address of the interface where 24 means that the length of the mask is 24 Broadcast address The broadcast address of the interface The Maximum Transmit Unit The maximum transmit unit input packets bytes multicasts The number of the received packets bytes and multicast packets output packets bytes multicasts The number of the sent packets bytes and multicast packets Directed broadcast packets e Received packets The number of the received broadcast packets that belong to local interface broadcast domain Sent packets The number of the sent broadcast packets that belong to local interface broadcast domain Forwarded packets The number of broadcast packets forwarded by the interface 0 means the broadcast forwarding of the interface is not enabled Dropped packets The number of broadcast packets dropped by the interface ARP packet input number Statistics of the received ARP packets including the following e Total number of ARP packets The number of ARP request packets The number of ARP response packets The number of ARP packets of unknown types As for non Ethernet interfaces the ARP statistics information is zero TTL is invalid packet input number The number of the received packets with invalid TTL value A TTL packet is regarded as invalid when its TTL
242. le An encrypted password however must be of 24 characters in length and must be in cipher text _ TT8F Y 5SQ Q MAF 4 lt 1 for example Description Use the set authentication password command to set a local authentication password Use the undo set authentication password command to remove the local authentication password 1 13 Command Manual System Management Chapter 1 Terminal Service and User Interface H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Configuration Commands Regardless of whether the password format is set to plain text or cipher text you must input plain text password at authentication time When configuring a password you must specify its format either to simple or to cipher If the former is specified the password is saved in plain text in the configuration file If the latter is specified however the password is displayed in cipher text regardless of whether the password you enter is a plain text password of 1 to 16 characters or a cipher text password of 24 bytes By default Telnet users are required to provide passwords at login that is the authentication mode password command applies If no password is configured the following information appears password required but none set Related command authentication mode Example Set the local authentication password to h3c for the user interfaces VTYs 0 through 4 XE ui vty0 4 authentication mode password XE ui vty0 4 set authentication password simple h
243. le command to configure a rule in the substitute table Use the undo rule command to delete the specified or all rules from the substitute table You can configure up to eight rules in one substitute table each serving the purpose of calling number substitution called number substitution or both as shown in the following table Configure three rules in substitute table 1 XE2000 1s sst 1 rule 1 caller 88 ii after XE2000 1s sst 1 rule 2 callee 63 OS A before XE2000 1s sst 1 rule 3 caller 88 e BEE calles E erh E DR after 1 1 16 sscb rule Subscriber view Syntax View Parameter sscb rule rule tag caller input format output format callee input format output format callee input format output format before after undo sscb rule rule tag all Subscriber view rule tag Substitute rule tag in the range of 0 to 1 caller Sets input output calling number pattern callee Sets input output called number pattern input format Input number pattern consisting of characters NI O SABCD The number should be within 31 digits in length output format Output number pattern using regular expression A I 0 9ABCD The number should be within 31 digits in length before Performs number substitution before number analysis after Performs number substitution after number analysis 1 12 Command Manual Feature H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Ch
244. ll signal port command to restore the default call signaling setting Ifthe gateway does not support dynamic IP address report function or the administrator has disabled the function using the dynamic ip disable command in LS GW view and the gateway is in normal or forever up status you need to manually configure the call signaling port number of the gateway on the XE IP PBX Then during registration the gateway reports its call signaling port number to match the configured one By default the call signaling port number is reported dynamically by the gateway The port parameter is 1720 by default Example Set the call signaling port number of the gateway gw001 to 2000 XE 1s gw gw001 call signal port 2000 Command Manual Location Server Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Location Server Commands 1 1 7 codec LS GW PREFIX view Syntax codec audio g7231 g729 pcma pemu packet length packet length video h261 h263 data t38fax undo codec audio video data View LS GW PREFIX view Parameter audio Sets the audio codec type 97231 Sets the audio codec type as G 723 1 g729 Sets the audio codec type as G 729 pcma Sets the audio codec type as G 711 A law 64K pemu Sets the audio codec type as G 711 u law 64K packet length Packetization time length that ranges from 1 to 18 in units of 10 ms video Sets the video codec type h263 Sets the video codec type as H263 h261 Sets t
245. lling and called numbers in a call provided they match the input calling and called number patterns respectively rule rule tag caller input format output format callee input format output format before after Configure three substitute rules for office group og XE2000 1s og og1 rule 1 caller 88 ii after XE2000 1s og og1 rule 2 callee 63 BB eerie before XE2000 1s og og1 rule 3 caller 88 Misato calles Be A after 1 1 15 rule Substitute table view Syntax View Parameter rule rule tag caller input format output format callee input format output format callee input format output format before after undo rule rule tag all Substitute table view rule tag Substitute rule tag in the range of 0 to 7 caller Sets input output calling number pattern callee Sets input output called number pattern input format Input number pattern consisting of characters NI O SABCD The number should be within 31 digits in length output format Output number pattern consisting of characters NW 1 1 0 9IABCD H 1 5 1 The number should be within 31 digits in length 1 11 Command Manual Feature H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Number Substitution before Performs number substitution before number analysis after Performs number substitution after number analysis all Deletes substitute rules Description Example Use the ru
246. llowing order e Main boot file with the default name being main bin and file type being M is the default file for system boot e Backup boot file with the default name being backup bin and file type being B is the boot file used in case of the boot failure using the main boot file e Secure boot file with the default name being secure bin and file type being S is the boot file used in case of the boot failure using the backup boot file If the boot attempts using all these files fail the system prompts the boot failure This command is supported only by the XE200 For the related commands see dir bootfile dir and bootfile main A Caution Only XE IP PBX 200 supports this command Example Specify the backup boot file 4 1 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 4 File Management Commands XE bootfile backup router bin Set backup boot file successfully Display information on the boot files in the Flash XE bootfile dir Aviliable boot file s M MAIN B BACKUP S SECURE No Type Date Time Size Name 1 N A Mar 15 2004 18 09 00 5556068 Main bin 1 N A Mar 15 2004 18 09 00 5556068 Backup bin 1 S Mar 15 2004 18 09 00 5556068 Secure bin 4 1 2 boottfile dir Syntax boottfile dir View System view Parameter None Description Using the bootfile dir command you can view the information about all the boot files in the Flash including file type date t
247. log information is sent to the console The command is effective only after the system log function is enabled Related command info center enable display info center Example Send information to console and specify the channel to be used XE info center console channel console 3 2 8 info center enable Syntax info center enable undo info center enable View System view Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 3 System Maintenance and Management Commands Parameter None Description Example Use the info center enable command to enable the information center Use the undo info center enable command to disable the information center By default the information center is enabled The system can send system information to log host and console after enabling the information center Related command info center loghost info center logbuffer info center trapbuffer info center console channel info center monitor channel display info center Enable the information center XE info center enable S information center is enabled 3 2 9 info center logbuffer Syntax View Parameter info center logbuffer channel channel number channel name size buffersize undo info center logbuffer channel size System view channel Specifies the channel through which the log buffer sends information channel number Channel number from 0 to 9 which means the s
248. lt By default accepting requests from unknown devices is enabled Command Manual Location Server Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Location Server Commands Example Disable to accept requests from unknown devices XE 1s policy unknown device admission disable XE ls 1 1 42 port LS GW view Syntax port port undo port View LS GW view Parameter port Port number ranging from 1 to 65535 By default it is 5060 Description Use the port command to set the port number of a gateway registered with the LS Use the undo port command to restore the default port By default For an H 323 device port 1719 is used For a SIP device User Agent port 5060 is used Example Set the port number of the gateway gw001 to 1234 XE 1s gw gw001 port 1234 1 1 43 port LS OFFICEGROUP OFFICE view Syntax port port undo port View LS OFFICEGROUP OFFICE view Parameter port Port number ranging from 1 to 65535 By default it is 5060 Command Manual Location Server Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Location Server Commands Description Use the port command to set the port number of an office device configured on the LS Use the undo port command to restore the default port By default the port number of an office device is 5060 CQ Note By default the port number is 5060 When the dynamic ip disable command is used and the type of the gateway is SIP you can keep this number
249. main to be created deleted or ID of the domain whose view you want to enter It is case sensitive all Removes all domains no confirm Removes a domain without user confirmation Description Use the domain command to create a domain if the domain identified by the domain id argument does not exist or enter the corresponding domain view if the domain identified by the domain id argument already exists Use the undo domain command to remove a specified domain or all domains as well as the office devices belonging to the domain Example Create a domain with an ID of domain001 XE ls domain domain001 Delete a domain XE 1s undo domain domain001 NOTICE This command will delete all offices belonged to Continue Y N y Delete Domain domain001 Delete a domain directly without user confirmation XE 1s undo domain domain002 no confirm Delete Domain domain002 XE ls 2 1 5 nat amp fw Syntax View Parameter nat amp fw LS view None 2 3 the domain Command Manual Location Server Configuration Chapter 2 NAT FW Tunnel Traversal Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Commands Description Use the nat amp fw command to enter LS NAT8 FW view Example Enter LS NAT amp FW view XE 18 nat fw 2 1 6 tunnel Syntax tunnel enable disable undo tunnel View LS PS view Parameter enable Enables NAT FW tunnel traversal on current PS disable Disables NAT FW tunnel traversal on current PS
250. mation indicates multiple choices can be selected ranging from one to all Description Use the info center source command to add information entries to a channel Use the undo info center source command to delete the information entries in the channel By default for a particular module The status of log information is on and the permitted information level is informational The status of the trap information is on and the permitted information level is informational The state of debugging information is off At present system allocates one channel for each output direction as shown in the following table Output direction Channel number Default channel name Console 0 console Monitor terminal 1 monitor Log host 2 loghost Command Manual System Management Example H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 3 System Maintenance and Management Commands Trap buffer 3 trapbuffer Log buffer 4 logbuffer snmp 5 snmpagent Each channel has a default information entry for which the default name and number are default and Oxffff0000 The default setting log trap and debugging information may vary with channels If a module has no specific configuration entry in a channel it uses this default configuration entry Enable the log information of IP module in SNMP channel and specify the permitted highest level of output information as emergence XE info center source ip channel snmpagent log level emergencies Remove the se
251. mer is set to 75 seconds When sending syn packets the synwait timer is started If no response packet is received before synwait times out the TCP connection will be terminated It is recommended that you configure this parameter under the guidance of technicians Related command tcp timer fin timeout tcp window Set the value of the TCP synwait timer to 70 XE tcp timer syn timeout 70 1 1 23 tcp window Syntax tcp window window size undo tcp window View System view Parameter window size The size of the receive send buffer of a connection oriented socket in kilobytes in the range from 1 to 32 Description Use the tcp window command to set the size of the receive send buffer of a connection oriented socket Use the undo tcp window command to restore the size of socket receive send buffer to its default value By default the receive send buffer size of a connection oriented socket is 8 KB It is recommended that you configure this parameter under the guidance of technicians Related command tcp timer fin timeout tcp timer syn timeout Example Set the receive send buffer size of a connection oriented socket to 4 KB XE tcp window 4 Command M anual IP Performance and Application H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 2 IP Application Configuration Commands Chapter 2 IP Application Configuration Commands 2 1 IP Application Configuration Commands 2 1 1 arp static Syntax View Parameter De
252. minal and specify the channel to be used Use the undo info center monitor channel command to remove the current configuration By default the system sends information to the Telnet terminal or dumb terminal This command is effective only after the information center function is enabled Related command info center enable display info center Example Configure the system to send information to the Telnet terminal or dumb terminal and specify the channel to be used XE info center monitor channel monitor 3 2 13 info center snmp channel Syntax info center snmp channel channel number channel name undo info center snmp channel 3 17 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 3 System Maintenance and Management Commands View Parameter System view channel number Channel number from 0 to 9 which means the system can have 10 channels channel name Channel name Description Example Use the info center snmp channel command to configure the channel for SNMP Use the undo info center snmp channel command to remove the current configuration By default channel 5 is used Related command display snmp agent statistics Configure channel 6 to send SNMP information XE info center snmp Channel 6 3 2 14 info center source Syntax View Parameter info center source module name default channel channel number channel name log state on off
253. mmand to start the LS The LS is not started by default Example Start the LS XE ls start 1 1 53 stop Syntax stop View LS view Parameter None 1 42 Command Manual Location Server Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Location Server Commands Description Example Use the stop command to disable the LS Disable the LS XE ls stop 1 1 54 subscriber Syntax subscriber short number long number undo subscriber short number long number all View LS GW view Parameter short number Short number of a voice subscriber line number entry corresponding to a long number which starts with a and consists of two to three characters including the The value of this number ranges from 0 to 31 long number Long number corresponding to the short number of the voice subscriber line number which contains one to 31 digits The long number can be numbers from 0 to 9 signs and letters A B C or D all Deletes all voice subscriber line number entry Description Use the subscriber command to create a number entry for a voice subscriber line of a gateway registered with the LS Use the undo subscriber command to delete all subscriber line number entries of the gateway Example Create a number entry for a voice subscriber line of the gateway gw001 with 31 as the short number and 68835641 as the long number XE 1s gw gw001 subscriber 31 68835641 XE 1s gw gw01 31 68835641 Create
254. mple cipher line is set The password entered is not displayed for security The system will switch to a higher level if the user has entered the correct password within 3 attempts otherwise the user level remains unchanged Related command super password lt XE gt super 3 Password User privilege changes to 3 level just equal or less this level s commands can be used Privilege note O VISIT 1 MONITOR 2 SYSTEM 3 MANAGE 1 1 24 super password Syntax View super password level user level simple cipher password undo super password level user level System view Command Manual Basic Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Basic Configuration Commands Parameter user level User level in the range 0 to 3 simple Specifies that the password be displayed in simple text by corresponding display commands cipher Specifies that the password be displayed in cipher text by corresponding display commands password Password with up to 16 characters If you set to display the password in simple text corresponding display commands display it as a string of up to 16 characters with no space such as 1234567 If you set to display the password in cipher text corresponding display commands display it as 24 characters such as _ TT8F Y 5SQ Q MAF4 lt 1 Description Use the super password command to set the password which is used when switching to a higher user level Use the
255. mum length of the SNMP message packets that Agent can receive or send Use the undo snmp agent packet max size command to remove the current settings Set the maximum length of the SNMP packet that agent can receive or send to 1042 bytes XE snmp agent packet max size 1042 6 1 15 snmp agent sys info Syntax View Parameter snmp agent sys info contact sysContact location sysLocation version v1 v2c v3 all undo snmp agent sys info contact location version v1 v2c v3 all System view contact Contact information of the system maintenance sysContact Character string describing the system maintenance contact information location Physical location of the device node sysLocation Device location information version Specifies the SNMP version number used by the system v1 SNMP vi v2c SNMP v2c v3 SNMP v3 Indicates selection of one to three items from the three options of v1 v2c and v3 all SNMP v1 SNMP v2c and SNMP v3 6 12 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 6 SNMP Configuration Commands Description Example Use the snmp agent sys info command to set the system information including the system maintenance information physical location of the device and the SNMP version in use Use the undo snmp agent sys info command to remove the current settings By default the contact information for system maintenance is R
256. n script trigger connect script trigger logout script trigger init Specify example as the automatically executed Modem script when a DCC dialup is made XE uil script trigger dial example 7 1 6 script trigger init Syntax View Parameter script trigger init script name undo script trigger init User interface view script name Name of a script in the script set Description Use the script trigger init command to specify the automatically executed Modem script when the system is powered on or rebooted Use the undo script trigger init command to cancel the specification The system executes the specified script when the system is powered on or rebooted By default no script is specified Related command script string script trigger login script trigger connect script trigger dial script trigger logout 7 4 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 7 Modem Management Configuration Commands Example Specify example as the automatically executed Modem script when the system is powered on or rebooted XE uil script trigger init example 7 1 7 script trigger login Syntax script trigger login script name undo script trigger login View User interface view Parameter script name Name of a script in the script set Description Use the script trigger login command to specify the automatically executed Modem script when an outgoing call connection is set up succ
257. n Commands Example By default no command alias is configured Related command enable command alias Configure an alias of show for the keyword display XE command alias show display The relationship between the commandkey and the alias is established Cancel the alias of show XE undo command alias show The relationship between the commandkey and the alias is canceled 1 1 5 command privilege Syntax View Parameter command privilege level evel view view command key undo command privilege view view command key System view level eve Command privilege level in the range 0 to 3 view view View and view keyword The following table lists the primary views and view keywords available in the XE IP PBX Table 1 1 Privilege keywords Keyword View analogmodem Analogmodem interface view aux AUX interface view diagnose Diagnose view ftp client Ftp client view ethernet Ethernet interface view gigabitethernet Gigabitethernet interface view gui GUI view hidecmd Hidecmd view loopback Loopback view Is LS view Command Manual Basic Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Basic Configuration Commands Keyword View Ls clg LS CLG view Is domain LS DOMAIN view Is emgc LS EMGC view Is gw LS GW view Is gw prf LS GW PRF view Is gw ssb LS GW SSB view Is gw ssb adi LS GW SSB ADI view Is gw ssb alarm LS GW
258. nable the load sharing capability of gateway gw0 XE 1s gw gw0 load share enable 2 1 2 Is back Syntax Is back disable enable 2 1 Command Manual Feature H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 2 Backup and Load Sharing View PS view Parameter disable Disables the PS from sending interrogation messages to the LS with higher priority levels enable Enables the PS to send interrogation messages to the LS with higher priority levels so that once an LS with higher priority is available the PS ends the connection with the current LS and establishes a connection with the LS with higher priority Description Use the Is back command to configure the LS backup policy namely specify whether to enable the PS if the LS connected with which is not the LS with the highest priority to probe for the LS with the highest priority by polling the LS If the PS is enabled to poll the LS and if a high priority LS is available the PS will end the connection with the current LS and start a connection with the high priority LS If the polling function is disabled the PS will keep using the current LS By default the polling function is disabled Example Enable the polling function of the PS XE ps 1s back enable 2 1 3 psgroup id LS GW view Syntax psgroup id group id master ps ps id undo psgroup id View LS GW view Parameter group id process server PS group identifier 1 to 32 characters master ps The primary PS in t
259. nables the trap packet of trap type trap list Parameter list corresponding to the trap packets of trap type Description Example Use the snmp agent trap enable command to enable the device to send trap packets and set the trap or notification parameters Use the undo snmp agent trap enable command to remove the current settings By default sending trap packets is disabled The snmp agent trap enable command without parameters indicates sending all types of SNMP trap packets of all the modules The snmp agent trap enable command is used in combination with the snmp agent target host command Use the snmp agent target host command to specify the hosts to which the trap packets are sent To send trap packets you must configure at least one snmp agent target host command The module trap type sending the trap packets can be configuration flash standard and system Types of packets that standard modules can send include authentication coldstart linkdown linkup and warmstart Related command snmp agent target host and snmp agent trap source Enable to send all types of BGP trap packets to 10 1 1 1 in the v3 packet format with the super community name and being authenticated but not encrypted XE snmp agent trap enable bgp XE snmp agent target host trap address udp domain 10 1 1 1 params securityname super v3 authentication 6 1 18 snmp agent trap life Syntax View snmp agent trap life seconds undo snm
260. ncccnonccncnrnnn ancora cnn 4 25 4 3 7 local uSer password it 4 26 4 3 8 local user service type ooo eee ee eeteeeeeente ee ee tance ee taae ee ee eeaaeeeeetaaeeeeeeaaeeeeetaeeeeeeaeeeene 4 27 4 4 FTP Client Configuration Commande 4 28 GEET 4 28 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Table of Contents AAO BINARY EE 4 28 o etre rece corr creator caterer 4 29 AAA RER 4 29 AAS COUD tau tik te A E 4 30 4 4 6 ClOSG enee SEENEN ENNEN 4 30 AA CO DUG e e iii ita 4 31 GENEE 4 31 Ce EE 4 32 Elend 4 32 Kure errr sect a diia RL 4 33 AAT 2 QO ich di tar 4 33 Bras BCC tee tanith tts enti abate at aes te e tha a 4 34 EE 4 34 Kuul 4 35 FAO ODM EEN 4 35 BANE PAS ia id ale edit 4 36 We EE 4 36 KENE 4 37 ACA AO EE EE 4 37 4 4 21 remotehelp sete nti idee te ht tA a te alee 4 38 A APD le 4 38 GEET 4 38 AACA ll 4 39 4 5 TFTP Configuration Commande 4 40 ABA Tt saison A A Ri eee en a ene i A EAE LEA a 4 40 Chapter 5 User Management Commands cesccsseceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeensneeeeeeeeseaesaseeeenseeeseeeseseaeeneenees 5 1 5 1 AAA Configuration Commande eee eeaeee a a a a taa er aa aE a Ca AE aE a a UnA REA 5 1 TES nennen 5 1 5 1 2 debugging Aaa priMitiVe erasiga Een eea E Ena EEEE E E AE EEEE TS 5 1 Chapter 6 SNMP Configuration Commands ccsscceseeeeeseeeseeeeesneeeeeeeeeseaesesneeenseeeseeeseseeeenseeees 6 1 6 1 SNMP Configuration Commande 6 1 6 1 1 debugging SNMP AGEN coooocccccnnocccccanoncnonanoncncnnnno nc
261. nce mode number substitution Use the undo policy substitute inherit command to restore the default state of inheritance mode number substitution By default inheritance mode number substitution is enabled Example Disable inheritance mode number substitution Command Manual Feature H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Number Substitution XE ls policy substitute inherit disable 1 1 12 prefix rule Prefix view Syntax View Parameter prefix rule rule tag caller input format output format callee input format output format callee input format output format before after undo prefix rule rule tag all Prefix view rule tag Substitute rule tag in the range of 0 to 1 caller Sets input output calling number pattern callee Sets input output called number pattern input format Input number pattern consisting of characters AA O SABCD The number should be within 31 digits in length output format Output number pattern consisting of characters A I 1 0 IABCD H 1 5 1 5 The number should be within 31 digits in length before Performs number substitution before number analysis after Performs number substitution after number analysis all Deletes all substitute rules Description Example Use the prefix rule command to configure a substitute rule for the static route number Use the undo prefix rule command to delete the specified or all substitute rule
262. nd any configuration command of snmp agent can also enable SNMP agent However the undo command does not have the functions When the SNMP agent is disabled you cannot execute the undo command Otherwise you can use the undo snmp agent command to disable the SNMP agent Disable the active SNMP agent XE undo snmp agent SNMP Agent disabled 6 1 10 snmp agent community Syntax View Parameter snmp agent community read write community name mib view view name undo snmp agent community community name System view read Indicates that the community has the read only authority in the specified view write Indicates that the community has the read and write authorities in the specified view community name Character string of community name mib view Sets the name of the MIB view available for community name view name MIB view name Description Use the snmp agent community command to configure the read and write attribute of a certain community corresponding MIB views 6 8 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 6 SNMP Configuration Commands Example Use the undo snmp agent community command to remove the settings of community access name lf you perform configuration on a community repeatedly the last configured attribute takes effect Related command snmp agent group snmp agent usm user Set the community name to comaccess and allow the read only access with
263. nd time end date The end time and date of the daylight saving time with time in HH MM SS format and date in YYYY MM DD format add time The daylight saving time offset Description Example Use the clock summer time command to set the name of daylight saving time and the beginning and end dates Use the undo clock summer time command to remove the current configuration After the setting takes effect you can use the display clock command to view the information The system uses the local time with daylight saving time and time zone adjustment to display the log and debug information Related command clock timezone Specify that the daylight saving time z2 starts from 06 00 00 on June 8 2002 to 06 00 00 on September 1 2002 and set the system clock ahead one hour lt XE gt clock summer time z2 one off 06 00 00 2002 06 08 06 00 00 2002 09 01 01 00 00 Specify that the daylight saving time z2 starts from 06 00 00 on June 8 to 06 00 00 on September 1 starting from the year 2002 and set the system clock ahead one hour lt XE gt clock summer time z2 repeating 06 00 00 2002 06 08 06 00 00 2002 09 01 01 00 00 1 1 3 clock timezone Syntax View clock timezone time zone name add minus HH MM SS undo clock timezone User view Command Manual Basic Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Basic Configuration Commands Parameter time zone name Name of the time zone from 1 to 32 charac
264. nect script name undo script trigger connect View User interface view Parameter script name Name of a script in the script set Description Use the script trigger connect command to specify the automatically executed Modem script when an incoming call connection is set up successfully By default no script is specified Use the undo script trigger connect command to cancel the specification The system executes the specified script when an incoming call connection of the Modem is set up Related command script string script trigger login script trigger logout script trigger dial script trigger init Example Specify example as the automatically executed Modem script when an incoming connection is set up successfully XE uil script trigger connect example 7 1 5 script trigger dial Syntax script trigger dial script name undo script trigger dial View User interface view Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 7 Modem Management Configuration Commands Parameter script name Name of a script in the script set Description Example Use the script trigger dial command to specify the automatically executed Modem script when a DCC dialup is made Use the undo script trigger dial command to cancel the specification By default no script is specified The system executes the specified script when a DCC dialup is made Related command script string script trigger logi
265. ned Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 5 Outgoing Call Authority Configuration Commands Example Define the user role as sales XE 1s gw gw01 1 1001 cba subscriber role sales 5 1 7 subscriber type LS view Syntax subscriber type subscriber type name undo subscriber type subscriber type name all View LS view Parameter subscriber type name Name of the user number type which is case sensitive and consists of 32 characters at most all Removes all user number types Description Use the subscriber type command to enter user number type view If the specified user number type does not exist the system first creates the user number type and then enters the corresponding view Use the undo subscriber type command to remove specified or all user number types You can define up to eight user number types Example Create user number type mobile and enter the corresponding view XE 1s subscriber type mobile XE 1s ssbt mobile 5 1 8 subscriber type user role view Syntax subscriber type subscriber type name undo subscriber type subscriber type name all View User role view Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 5 Outgoing Call Authority Configuration Commands Parameter subscriber type name Name of the user number type which is case sensitive and consists of 32 characters at most all Removes all the user number types that t
266. neeeee 2 1 2ko edu EEN 2 2 2314 ANQUAQG id care tes Say dade A ea aa eee 2 3 2 1 DMedia aDill Aee EE E EEA A EEE A ATE 2 3 2 16 Sei ON 2 4 Chapter 3 LS Side MS Configuration COMMands ccesccssseeeseeeeeseeeseeseseeeenseeeeseeeseseeeenenees 3 1 3 1 MS Configuration Commands on the L 3 1 3 1 1 heartbeat password LS MS view 3 1 3 1 2 language LS MS view 3 1 SAME SV acia 3 2 Command Manual Media Server H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 MS Configuration Commands Chapter 1 MS Configuration Commands 1 1 MS Configuration Commands 1 1 1 display location server media server Syntax display location server media server ms all list View Any view Parameter ms id 1D of the MS to be displayed 32 character string length limitation all Displays the information of all the MSs managed by the LS list Lists all the MSs managed by the LS Description Use the display location server media server command to display the information of one or all the MSs managed by the LS Example Display the MS media001 managed by the LS XE 1s display location server media server media001 E Media Server Information Identifier media001 Ip address Ld eB Heartbeat Password phoenix Language Chinese Status Authorized Table 1 1 Description on the fields of the display location server media server command Field Description Identifier ID of the displayed MS Ip address IP
267. ngle project or subproject Other users can share the project dsp file but they should export the makefiles locally 4 1 13 move Syntax move filename_source filename_dest View User view Parameter filename_source Name of the source file filename_dest Name of the destination file Description Use move command to move a file If the name of the destination file is the same with that of an existing directory the file will be moved into the directory If the name of the destination file is the same with that of an existing file a prompt will appear asking whether to overwrite the existing file Example Move the file from flash test sample txt to flash sample txt lt XE gt move flash test sample txt flash sample txt Move flash test sample txt to flash sample txt Y N y Moveded file flash test sample txt flash sample txt 4 1 14 pwd Syntax pwd Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 4 File Management Commands View Parameter User view None Description Example Use the pwd command to display the current directory If the current directory has not been set the operation will fail Display the current directory lt XE gt pwd flash test 4 1 15 rename Syntax View Parameter rename filename source filename dest User view filename source Name of the source file file dest Name of the destination file Description Use the rename command to
268. nn 26 1 Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Table of Contents 26 1 1 alarm subscriber number view EE 26 1 26 1 2 alarm alarm clock view 26 1 26 1 3 SIV SWITCH alamm ooo cece ceee eee i sete a ai e a E 26 2 Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Voice Service Configuration Commands Chapter 1 Voice Service Configuration Commands 1 1 Voice Service Configuration Commands 1 1 1 service Syntax service View LS view Parameter None Description Use the service command to enter LS service view Example Enter LS service view XE 1s service XE 1s srv 1 1 2 srv switch Syntax srv switch adi alarm announce cb cba cf caller cfb cfnr cfo cft cfu ci clip clir cp cpcp ct do not disturb group limited call gui limited time call myring pwd call query self rio tcir on off View Subscriber number view Parameter adi Dialing test service which defaults to on alarm Alarm clock service announce Time announcement service cb Callback on busy service Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Voice Service Configuration Commands cba Call out restriction service which defaults to on cf caller Call forwarding by the caller number service which defaults to on cfb Call forwarding on busy CFB service which defaults to on cfnr Call forwarding no reply CFNR service which def
269. not disturb duplex dynamic ip E emergency call emergency call number enable command alias A 7 Appendix A Command Index System Management System Management System Management System Management System Management System Management System Management System Management System Management Feature IP Performance and Application System Management IP Performance and Application Basic Configuration System Management System Management IP Performance and Application System Management System Management Basic Configuration System Management Call Services Location Server Configuration Call Services Basic Configuration Location Server Configuration Call Services Call Services Basic Configuration 3 11 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6 6 6 4 17 1 4 1 13 1 18 1 14 1 12 4 17 3 11 2 2 1 25 Command Manual Appendix H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX execute extension F file prompt flow control forbid format format format free user interface ftp ftp server enable ftp timeout ftp update gatekeeper gateway LS view get gk config group config group notify view group notify LS SRV view gui gui config H header heartbeat password heartbeat password heartbeat password LS MS view heartbeat password LS PS view A 8 Appendix A Command Index System Management Call Services System Management System Management Call Services Call Services
270. o delete the basic information about the process server By default the identifier of the process server is PS Example Configure a gatekeeper setting its ID to ps1 Wh3c and its interface to Ethernet0 0 XE ps ps config psl h3c interface ethernet 0 0 1 1 15 repair tcp Syntax repair tcp enable disable undo repair tcp View PS SIP view Parameter enable Enables TCP connection repair disable Disables TCP connection repair Description Use the repair tcp command to enable or disable TCP connection repair Use the undo repair tcp command to restore the default By default TCP connection repair is enabled Example Enable TCP connection repair XE ps sip repair tcp enable 1 1 16 reset process server statistics Syntax reset process server statistics adapter all bkm cdp cm csm hadpt hrm hsm hstack rm sm stack tucl 1 14 Command Manual Process Server Configuraiton H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Process Server View User view Parameter adapter Clears statistics about the adapter layer all Clears all statistics bkm Clears statistics about the BKM module cdp Clears statistics about the CDP module cm Clears statistics about the CM module csm Clears statistics about the CSM module hadpt Clears statistics about the H 323 adapter module hrm Clears statistics about the HRM module hsm Clears statistics about the HSM module hstack Clears statistics about th
271. o not disturb on Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 8 Calling Line Identification Configuration Commands Chapter 8 Calling Line Identification Configuration Commands 8 1 Calling Line Identification Configuration Commands 8 1 1 clir subscriber number view Syntax clir View Subscriber number view Parameter None Description Use the clir command to enter calling line identification restriction CLIR service view Example Enter CLIR service view XE 1s gw gw01 1 1001 clir XE 1s gw gw01 1 1001 clir 8 1 2 clir CLIR service view Syntax clir disable enable View CLIR service view Parameter disable Deregisters CLIR service enable Registers CLIR service To use the service you must enable it first Description Use the clir command to register or deregister CLIR service 8 1 Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 8 Calling Line Identification Configuration Commands By default CLIR service is not registered Example Register CLIR service XE 1s gw gw01 1 1001 clir clir enable 8 1 3 srv switch clip Syntax srv switch clip on off View Subscriber number view Parameter on Enables calling line identification presentation CLIP service off Disables CLIP service Description Use the srv switch clip command to enable or disable CLIP service By default CLIP service is enabled Example Enable CLIP service XE 1s
272. o perform password authentication scheme Specifies to perform AAA authorization and authentication default Uses the default authentication scheme scheme name Specifies an authentication scheme none No authentication Description Example Use the authentication mode command to set the mode used to authenticate users at login Use the authentication mode none command to skip authentication at user login By default the authentication mode is set to password for the VTY user interface and none for other user interfaces Related command set authentication password Enable local password authentication XE ui0 authentication mode password Command Manual System Management Chapter 1 Terminal Service and User Interface H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Configuration Commands 1 1 2 auto execute command Syntax View Parameter auto execute command command undo auto execute command User interface view command The command to be automatically executed Description Example Use the auto execute command command to set a command to be automatically executed Use the undo auto execute command command to disable the setting By default the auto execution command is disabled Note that the auto execute command command can be configured on all interfaces except for the console port The system automatically executes the command specified by the auto execute command command at each login on the terminal and d
273. o use this command to upgrade files sget Indicates a downloading operation with protection In the sget operation the XE IP PBX receives a user file and saves it into memory simultaneously After the file is completely downloaded the file is written into Flash The old file is not overwritten when the system file downloading fails e g the network is disconnected therefore it is relatively safe to use this command to upgrade files However this operation requires more memory space put Uploads a file a p address Source address of a specified TFTP client Description Use the tftp command to upload a file to TFTP server or download a file to the local hard disk Related command tftp server acl Example Download the file config txt from the root directory of the TFTP server to the local hard disk IP address of the TFTP server is 1 1 254 2 The file is saved as config bak after downloading lt XE gt tftp 1 1 254 2 get config txt flash config bak 4 40 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 4 File Management Commands Upload the text file config txt from the root directory of the Flash to the default directory of the TFTP server IP address of the TFTP server is 1 1 254 2 The file is saved as config bak in the TFTP server lt XE gt tftp 1 1 254 2 put flash config txt config bak 4 41 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2 000 IP PBX Chapter 5 User Management Command
274. odec type h263 Sets the video codec type as H263 h261 Sets the video codec type as H261 data Sets the data codec type t38fax Sets T38 faxing support Description Use the codec command to configure the codec type used when the gatekeeper initiates capability negotiation to a gateway device If a number is not configured with a codec type the codec type configured for the gateway will be used instead Use the undo codec command to restore the default codec type By default the codec type configured on the gateway is adopted Example For subscriber 8801 set codec type to G 729 so that the gatekeeper uses to initiate capability negotiation to a gateway device Set the packetization time length as 40 ms and video codec type as H261 XE 1s gw gw000 1 8801 codec audio g729 packet length 4 XE 1s gw gw000 1 8801 codec video h261 Command Manual Location Server Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Location Server Commands 1 1 9 codec LS GW view Syntax codec audio g7231 g729 pcma pemu packet length packet length video h261 h263 data t38fax undo codec audio video data View LS GW view Parameter audio Sets the audio codec type 97231 Sets the audio codec type as G 723 1 g729 Sets the audio codec type as G 729 pcma Sets the audio codec type as G 711 A law 64K pemu Sets the audio codec type as G 711 u law 64K packet length Packetization time length that ranges from
275. of FE interfaces This parameter is available on XE 200 IP PBX gigabitethernet Displays state information of GE interfaces This parameter is available on XE 2000 IP PBX Aux Displays the status information of the backup interface NULL Displays the status information of the null interface interface number Specifies an interface If it is not specified the configuration and state information of all interfaces is displayed Description Use the display interface command to view information on one or all Ethernet interfaces such as the configuration parameters and current running status Example Display state information of Ethernet interface 0 0 XE display interface Ethernet 0 0 Ethernet0 0 current state UP Line protocol current state UP Description Ethernet0 0 Interface The Maximum Transmit Unit is 1500 Hold timer is 10 sec Internet Address is 192 168 80 40 24 IP Sending Frames Format is PKTFMT_ETHNT_2 Hardware address is 00e0 fc46 cbhca Media type is twisted pair loopback not set promiscuous mode not set 10Mb s Half duplex link type is autonegotiation 2 1 Command Manual Basic Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Output Output Output Output 2 1 2 duplex Syntax Input Output queue queue queue Last 300 Last 300 0 O SL Ooo Q Oo E Chapter 2 Ethernet Interface Configuration Commands flow control is disabled input flow control is disabled Urgent queue Size
276. on Use the display ip statistics command to display IP traffic statistics IP sending and receiving and packet encapsulating and decapsulating which can help error diagnosing Related command display interface display ip interface reset ip statistics Example Display IP traffic statistics lt XE gt display ip statistics Input sum 7120 local 112 bad protocol 0 bad format 0 bad checksum 0 bad options 0 Output forwarding 0 local 27 dropped 0 no route 2 compress fails 0 Fragment input 0 output 0 dropped 0 fragmented 0 couldn t fragment 0 Reassembling sum 0 timeouts 0 1 1 13 display tcp statistics Syntax display tcp statistics View Any view Parameter None Description Use the display tcp statistics command to display TCP traffic statistics This command displays traffic statistics of all current TCP connections Statistics is composed of two parts the sending part and the receiving part Each part can be divided into different types of packets such as repeatedly received packets checking packets error packets and so on The command can also display statistics closely 1 13 Command Manual IP Performance and Application H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 IP Performance Configuration Commands related to the connection such as the number of connection received number of packets retransferred number of keepalive probe packets and so on Most of them are counted in packets a few of them are in bytes R
277. on undo substitute table identifier all View LS view Parameter table identifier Substitute table identifier 1 to 7 characters all Removes the binding of all substitute tables Description Use the substitute command to bind a substitute table to the LS globally Use the undo substitute command to unbind the specified or all substitute tables from the LS You can bind up to 16 substitute tables to the LS globally By default no substitute table is bound Example Bind a substitute table named table1 to the LS globally XE 1s substitute tablel 1 1 20 substitute Prefix view Syntax substitute table identifier undo substitute table identifier all View Prefix view Parameter table identifier Substitute table identifier 1 to 7 characters all Removes the binding of all substitute tables Description Use the substitute command to bind a substitute table to a number Use the undo substitute command to unbind the specified or all substitute tables from the prefix You can bind up to two substitute tables to a static route number By default no substitute table is bound 1 15 Command Manual Feature H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Number Substitution Example Bind a substitute table named table1 to the number 01067689445 XE 1s gw gw01 01067689445 substitute tablel 1 1 21 substitute Subscriber view Syntax substitute table identifier undo substitute table identifier all
278. or country code of the gateway Use the undo area code command to delete the country and area codes of the gateway XE supports a combination of country code area code subscriber number within 31 bits By default the gateway is not configured with any country or area code Example Set the area code and country code of gateway gw01 to 010 and 0086 respectively XE 1s gw gw01 area code 010 0086 1 1 2 area code LS OFFICEGROUP view Syntax area code region code nation code undo area code View LS OFFICEGROUP view Command Manual Feature H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Number Substitution Parameter region code Area code nation code Country code Description Use the area code command to configure the country and or area codes of the office group Use the undo area code command to delete the country and area codes of the office group By default the office device is not configured with any country or area code Example Set the area code and country code of office group og01 to 020 and 0086 respectively XE ls og og01 area code 020 0086 1 1 3 area code substitute LS GW view Syntax area code substitute enable disable View LS GW view Parameter enable Enables the location server LS to perform location based number substitution before sending a number to the gateway disable Disables the LS to perform location based number substitution before sending a number to the ga
279. ormation Commands 3 3 1 display device manuinfo Syntax display device manuinfo View Any view Parameter None Description Use the display device manuinfo command to display the digital label information of a device Refer to Table 3 3for description on the fields of digital label information Table 3 3 Description on the digital label information Field Description DEVICE_NAME Device name DEVICE_SERIAL_NUMBER OEM serial number MAC_ADDRESS Starting MAC address MANUFACTURING_DATE Manufacturing date VENDOR_NAME Vendor name Example Display the digital label information of a device XE display device manuinfo DEVICE_NAME S3600 28P HI Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 3 System Maintenance and Management Commands DEVICE_SERIAL_NUMBER 210235A045B05B004350 MAC_ADDRESS 00e0 fc00 5600 MANUFACTURING_DATE 2006 04 13 3 29 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 4 File Management Commands Chapter 4 File Management Commands 4 1 File System Commands 4 1 1 bootfile backup Syntax bootfile backup backup booifile name View System view Parameter backup bootfile name Backup boot file for booting the XE IP PBX Description Use the bootfile backup command to specify the backup boot file Three bootfiles are defined in the system by default main boot file backup boot file and secure boot file The system uses them in the fo
280. out third party call control tasks Display information about all existing third party call control tasks XE 1s srv 3pcc display location server 3pcc all Index participant start time 1 8801 2005 12 30 12 00 7701 2 8801 2005 12 23 12 00 9901 Table 14 1 Description on the fields of the display location server 3pcc command Field Description Index Index of the third party call control task participant Call participants start time Time to initiate the third party call control task 14 1 3 participant Syntax View Parameter participant identify num1 num2 start time undo participant identify all LS SRV 3PCC view identify Unique identifier of a third party call control task ranging from 0 to 65535 num1 Number of the first participant of the third party call control task It must be a long number and contains 1 to 31 digits with the maximum length of 31 characters It can be digits from 0 to 9 letters A B C and D and signs and num2 Number of the second participant of the third party call control task It must be a long number and contains 1 to 31 digits with the maximum length of 31 characters It can be digits from 0 to 9 letters A B C and D and signs and start time Start time of the third party call control It is in the format of YYYY MM DD HH MM SS HH MM SS or INTEGER that is the countdown time in minutes before 14 2 Command Manual Call Services H3
281. outgoing calls of the Modem are inhibited You can use the commands here to configure the incoming and outgoing access of the Modem connected with the AUX port Enable only the AUX port to receive incoming calls XE ui aux0 modem call in 7 1 3 modem auto answer Syntax View Parameter modem auto answer undo modem auto answer User interface view None Description Use the modem auto answer command to configure the answer mode for the Modem connected with the AUX port to auto Use the undo modem auto answer command to configure the answer mode for the Modem to non auto By default the answer mode on the system for the Modem is non auto You should perform this configuration based on the answer mode state of the connected Modem If the Modem is in auto answer mode AA LED of the Modem lights you should execute the modem auto answer command before dial up The commands cannot change the state of the Modem they are only used to reflect the answer mode state of the Modem So whether to execute the modem auto answer command depends on the answer mode state state of the AA LED of the Modem Related command modem 7 2 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 7 Modem Management Configuration Commands Example Configure the answer mode for the mode connected with the AUX port to auto XE ui aux0 modem auto answer 7 1 4 script trigger connect Syntax script trigger con
282. p agent trap life System view Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 6 SNMP Configuration Commands Parameter seconds Timeout time in seconds ranging from 1 to 2 592 000 with the default value 120 Description Use the snmp agent trap life command to set the hold time of the trap packet Any trap packets exceeding the time are dropped Use the undo snmp agent trap life command to remove the current settings The trap packets over the hold time which is specified by the second parameter are discarded without being resent or conserved Related command snmp agent trap enable snmp agent target host Example Set the timeout time of the trap packet to 60 seconds XE snmp agent trap life 60 6 1 19 snmp agent trap queue size Syntax snmp agent trap queue size size undo snmp agent trap queue size View System view Parameter size Length of the message queue ranging from 1 to 1000 Description Use the snmp agent trap queue size command to set the length of the message queue for the trap packet sent to the target host Use the undo snmp agent trap queue size command to cancel the current setting By default the length is 100 Related command snmp agent trap enable snmp agent target host snmp agent trap life Example Set the length of the message queue for the trap packet to 200 XE snmp agent trap queue size 200 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Cha
283. pdate 4 24 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 4 File Management Commands View System view Parameter fast Fast update mode normal Normal update mode Description Use the ftp update command to set the update mode By default the FTP update is in fast mode When a user logs onto FTP server to upload files using the put command two modes for FTP server file update are available fast update mode and normal update mode e In fast update mode the FTP Server starts to write a user s uploaded file into the Flash after the file has been uploaded and received by the server The existing files in the XE IP PBX will not be damaged although the abnormal case such as power off happens during the transmission e In normal update mode the FTP Server receives the user files and writes them in the Flash at the same time The current XE IP PBX files might be damaged due to exceptions such as power off Compared with fast update mode the normal update mode needs less memory in the XE IP PBX Example Set the FTP update mode to normal VPN GW ftp update normal 4 3 6 local user ftp directory Syntax local user ocal user ftp directory directory undo local user oca user ftp directory View System view Parameter local user Username directory Accessible directory Description Use the local user ftp directory command to authorize FTP users to use the directory 4 25 Command Manu
284. pter 6 SNMP Configuration Commands 6 1 20 snmp agent trap source Syntax snmp agent trap source interface type interface number subinterface type undo snmp agent trap source View System view Parameter interface type Interface type interface number Interface number subinterface type Subinterface type Description Use the snmp agent trap source command to specify the source address from which trap packets are sent Use the undo snmp agent trap source command to cancel the current settings There is always a trap address when the SNMP trap packet is being sent from a server no matter from which interface it is sent This command can be used to trace a specific event Related command snmp agent trap enable snmp agent target host Example Specify the IP address of the Ethernet interface 1 0 as the source address of trap packet XE snmp agent trap source ethernet 1 0 6 1 21 snmp agent usm user Syntax snmp agent usm user v1 v2c user name group name undo snmp agent usm user v1 v2c user name group name snmp agent usm user v3 user name group name authentication mode mab sha auth password privacy des56 priv password undo snmp agent usm user v3 user name group name local engineid engineid string y 6 17 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 6 SNMP Configuration Commands View Parameter System view v1 Security mode of v1 in use v2c Securi
285. put The following table describes levels of debugging information Table 1 1 Debugging information levels Level Description 0 No debugging information Memory block request failures 1 DEBUG_LEVEL_EMERGENCY Timer request failures Void pointer invalid memory operation 2 DEBUG_LEVEL_ALERT PS LS connection state switch Control block state anomalies mismatches Invalid unexpected control block index 3 DEBUG_LEVEL_ERROR Invalid unexpected PID module ID Function returns failure affecting the main calling function Invalid message type Function returns failure without affecting the main calling function Header information of the received 4 DEBUG_LEVEL_WARNING messages Abnormal timer timeout State transition Environment anomalies without affecting operation 5 DEBUG_LEVEL_NOTIFICATION Key service procedures Header information of the sent messages Key processing procedures of the module function Memory block request release 6 DEBUG_LEVEL_INFORMATIONAL Normal timer timeout Crucial information in the MD5 algorithm Crucial information in the Hash algorithm Command Manual Process Server Configuraiton H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Process Server Level Description 7 DEBUG_LEVEL_DEBUGGING Generic procedures Related processing functions such as extraction and addition of optional IE Contents of the IE list in messages message
286. r None Description Use the display diagnostic information command to display the current system information of all the modules 3 2 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 3 System Maintenance and Management Commands You can use the display diagnostic information command to collect all ofthe running information on each active module making it easy to locate problems Example Display the diagnostic information lt XE gt display diagnostic information 3 1 4 ping Syntax ping a X X X X c count d h til_value i interface type interface number ip n p pattern q r s packetsize t timeout v tos value host View Any view Parameter a X X X X The Source IP address configured to send the ICMP ECHO REQUEST packet c count Number of times an IC MP ECHO REQUEST packet is sent in the range of 1 to 4294967295 d Sets DEBUG as the mode of socket h ttl_value TTL_value within the range of 1 to 255 i Sets the interface that sends the ICMP ECHO REQUEST packet and specifies the TTL value to 1 which is used for testing directly connected devices interface type Interface type interface number Interface number n Uses the host name directly as the IP address without domain name resolution p pattern The padding byte of the ICMP ECHO REQUEST packet in hex It is in the range of 0 to FFFFFFFF for example p ff means padding the packet all with ff
287. rap UE 6 16 6 1 20 snmp agent trap source 6 17 6 1 21 SNMPp Agent USM USO cooococcccconoccncnononcncnnnoncnnnn EAEE EOE EENKEER EEA A EKIA E 6 17 Chapter 7 Modem Management Configuration COMMANGAS csecssseeeseeeeeseeeseeesesneeeeeeeees 7 1 7 1 Modem Management Configuration Commandes ooococinoccnnnccnocccnnonana nana nanr nana nnnn carac 7 1 A ON 7 1 The MOJEM n 7 1 Tt 3 modem AUTO ANS WE ceria dd odds ets 7 2 7 1 4 Tevdeid dekfEde ll 7 3 7 1 5 SCHIPLTINIOGSF Olalla laa anos 7 3 A A eaa ece Pastas era A tee eee tee PP eee 7 4 FAH SCHPUIMOGS OGM EE 7 5 7 1 8 Eivdeid tefdele LEE 7 5 TEI SCO SN asia dela daa 7 6 KE ak Ree E 7 9 Chapter 8 License Management Command sssccsceeceeeeeeseeeseseeeeneeeeeseaeseseeeenseeeseeeseseaeenseeees 8 1 8 1 License Management Commands ococcccccoccconocanonocononcnnnoncnnnnnnnnnc can nn nn anar nn nn can rca nr ranma ceci 8 1 ee EE 8 1 Bi 122 display xo SeNi Eei eet EE E 8 2 Command Manual System Management Chapter 1 Terminal Service and User Interface H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Configuration Commands Chapter 1 Terminal Service and User Interface Configuration Commands 1 1 User Interface Configuration Commands 1 1 1 authentication mode Syntax View Parameter authentication mode local password scheme scheme name default authentication mode none User interface view local Specifies to perform local authentication password Specifies t
288. rational code The maximum length of the phone number is 31 characters which can be digits from 0 to 9 letters A B C and D and signs and all Removes all the operational code phone number bindings Description Example Use the extension command to configure the operational code phone number bindings Use the undo extension command to delete the specified or all operational code phone number bindings Configure the binding between the operational code 1 and the phone number 1000 XE 1s srv ao 6666 extension 1 1000 22 1 3 prompt Syntax View Parameter prompt media id undo prompt LS SRV AO view media id Media ID of the access voice prompt of the automatic operator service Description Use the prompt command to configure the access voice prompt of the automatic operator service The prompt cannot be null Use the undo prompt command to delete the access voice prompt of the automatic operator service Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 22 Automatic Operator Service Example Specify the media resource whose ID is 10001 as the access voice prompt of the automatic operator service XE 1s srv ao 6666 prompt 10001 Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 23 Group Notification Service Chapter 23 Group Notification Service 23 1 Group Notification Service Configuration Commands 23 1 1 config Syntax config local media id remote c
289. re the default transport mode By default auto mode is selected Example Specify the office device of1 to transport using UDP XE ls og og01 of1 transport tcp 1 1 57 ttl Syntax ttl time length undo ttl View LS GW view Parameter time length TTL time length in seconds ranging from 10 to 65535 It defaults to 180 seconds Description Use the ttl command to set the time to live value of the registration information of a gateway registered with the LS Use the undo ttl command to restore the default value Example Set the time to live value of the registration information of the gateway gw001 to 200 seconds XE 1s gw gw001 ttl 200 1 45 Command Manual Location Server Configuration Chapter 2 NAT FW Tunnel Traversal Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Commands Chapter 2 NAT FW Tunnel Traversal Configuration Commands 2 1 NAT FW Tunnel Traversal Configuration Commands 2 1 1 attribute Syntax attribute private public undo attribute View LS domain view Parameter private Specifies that the domain belongs to a private network public Specifies that the domain belongs to a public network Description Use the attribute command to configure the attribute of a domain to specify the type public network or private network of the domain Use the undo attribute command to cancel the attribute configuration of the domain Example Specify that domain001 belongs to a private network XE 1s domain domain001
290. re the system to discard all voice call request messages when CPU load reaches 90 XE olp cpu 90 discard 100 3 1 2 display overload Syntax display overload 3 1 Command Manual Feature H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX View Any view Parameter None Description Chapter 3 Overload Protection Use the display overload command to display the overload protection configuration Example Display the overload protection configuration lt XE gt display overload Overload Protection is currently on Protection Config Table cpu cpu cpu cpu cpu 90 80 70 60 50 discard discard discard discard discard 90 40 30 20 10 3 1 3 overload protection Syntax overload protection View System view Parameter None Description Use the overload protection command to enter overload protection view Example Enter overload protection view XE XE olp overload protection 3 2 Command Manual Feature H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX 3 1 4 start Syntax start View Overload protection view Parameter None Description Use the start command to enable overload protection By default overload protection is disabled Example Enable overload protection XE olp start Overload Protection started XE olp 3 1 5 stop Syntax stop View Overload protection view Parameter None Description Use the stop command to disable overload protection By default overload prote
291. rface number Interface number subinterface type Subinterface type Description Use the info center loghost source command to specify the source address of the packet destined to log host Use the undo info center loghost source to remove the current configuration The default address of log information from an XE IP PBX is the IP address of the interface that sends the log information If you want to change the source address use the info center loghost source command You can judge from which XE IP PBX the log information is sent by setting different source addresses for different XE IP PBXs which is convenient for searching the received log information Example Use the IP address of the Loopback 0 interface as the source address of the log information packet Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 3 System Maintenance and Management Commands XE interface loopback 0 XE LoopBack0 ip address 1 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 XE LoopBack0 quit XE info center loghost source loopback 0 3 2 12 info center monitor channel Syntax info center monitor channel channel number channel name undo info center monitor channel View System view Parameter channel number Channel number from 0 to 9 which means the system can have 10 channels channel name Channel name Description Use the info center monitor channel command to configure the system to send information to the Telnet terminal or dumb ter
292. ription Use the history command max size command to set the size of the history command buffer Use the undo history command max size command to restore the default setting Example Set the size of the history command buffer to 20 XE ui console0 history command max size 20 1 1 10 idle timeout Syntax idle timeout minutes seconds undo idle timeout View User interface view Parameter minutes Number of minutes in the range of 0 to 35791 seconds Number of seconds in the range of 0 to 59 Command Manual System Management Chapter 1 Terminal Service and User Interface H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Configuration Commands Description Example Use the idle timeout command to set time interval for scheduled disconnection Use the undo idle timeout command to restore the default setting The time interval for scheduled disconnection defaults to 10 minutes Setting the time value to 0 disables scheduled disconnection that is the connection is always up Set the timeout to one minute and thirty seconds XE ui console0 idle timeout 1 30 1 1 11 local user level Syntax local user ocal user level level undo local user local user level View System view Parameter local user Name of a local user level User priority in the range of O to 3 Description Use the local user level command to assign a priority to a local user Use the undo local user level command to restore the default setting This command can
293. ription Use the terminal debugging command to enable debugging for terminal display Use the undo terminal debugging command to disable the debugging By default the terminal display function is disabled Related command debugging Example Enable the debugging for terminal display lt XE gt terminal debugging Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX 3 2 23 terminal logging Syntax terminal logging undo terminal logging View User view Parameter None Description Chapter 3 System Maintenance and Management Commands Use the terminal logging command to enable the terminal to display log information Use the undo terminal logging command to disable the function By default the system is configured to enable the terminal to display log information Example Disable the terminal from displaying log information lt XE gt undo terminal logging 3 2 24 terminal monitor Syntax terminal monitor undo terminal monitor View User view Parameter None Description Use the terminal monitor command to enable the terminal to display the debugging log trap information sent by information center Use the undo terminal monitor command to disable the function By default the function is enabled for console users but disabled for the terminal users This command only affects the current terminal where the command is input The undo terminal monitor command is equivalent to the combin
294. s lt XE gt debugging aaa primitive 5 2 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 6 SNMP Configuration Commands Chapter 6 SNMP Configuration Commands 6 1 SNMP Configuration Commands 6 1 1 debugging snmp agent Syntax debugging snmp agent header packet process trap undo debugging snmp agent header packet process trap View User view Parameter header Enables debugging for packet headers packet Enables debugging for packets process Enables debugging for SNMP packet processes trap Enables debugging for trap packets Description Use the debugging snmp agent command to enable debugging for SNMP agents and specify the debugging output of the SNMP module Use the undo debugging snmp agent command to disable the debugging output By default debugging for SNMP agents is disabled Example Enable debugging for packet headers of the SNMP agent module lt XE gt debugging snmp agent header 6 1 2 display snmp agent Syntax display snmp agent local engineid View Any view 6 1 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 6 SNMP Configuration Commands Parameter None Description Use the display snmp agent command to display the engine ID of local SNMP devices The SNMP engine the only identification of the SNMP management uniquely identifies an SNMP entity in one management domain The SNMP engine is an important component of the SNMP entity
295. s disable Disables the dynamic update of the gateway s IP address Description Use the dynamic ip command to enable or disable the dynamic update of the gateway s IP address Use the undo dynamic ip command to restore the default setting By default the dynamic update of the gateway s IP address is disabled Note e f you use the manufacturer command to set the manufacturer of the gateway to other the system will disable the dynamic update of the gateway s IP address e After enabling the dynamic update of the gateway s IP address with the dynamic ip command you cannot use the manufacturer command to change the manufacturer setting of the gateway in addition the ip port call signal ip and call signal port commands become invalid Example Enable the dynamic update of the gateway s IP address XE 1s gw gw001 dynamic ip enable 1 1 25 gateway LS view Syntax gateway device id undo gateway device id all 1 25 Command Manual Location Server Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Location Server Commands View LS view Parameter device id The identifier of the gateway It is case sensitive all Deletes all gateways Description Use the gateway command to add a gateway or enter the device view of a gateway Use the undo gateway command to remove one or all gateways Example Add a gateway named gw001 XE ls gateway gw001 XE 1s gw gw001 1 1 26 heartbeat pa
296. s 1 1 6 display users Syntax View Parameter display users all Any view all Displays information on the users of all the user interfaces Description Example Use the display users command to view the login information of all the user interface Users Execute the display users command on the console and you will get the following results lt XE gt display users UL Delay Type Ipaddress Username 0 CONO 00 00 00 34 VIY 0 00 00 09 TEL 10 110 101 39 dd Table 1 1 Description on the fields Field Description The user interface in use UI The first number and the second number are the absolute number and relative number of the user interface respectively Delay The interval since the last input in minutes Type The type of the user using the user interface The starting connection location namely IP address of the SE connected host Name of the user using this user interface namely the user s login Username name This field is void now because AAA authentication is not required 1 1 7 flow control Syntax flow control hardware software none 1 5 Command Manual System Management Chapter 1 Terminal Service and User Interface H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Configuration Commands undo flow control View User interface view Parameter none No flow control software Software flow control hardware Hardware flow control only applicable to the
297. s Chapter 5 User Management Commands 5 1 AAA Configuration Commands 5 1 1 debugging aaa event Syntax debugging aaa event View Parameter Description Example undo debugging aaa event User view None Use the debugging aaa event command to enable debugging for AAA events Use the undo debugging aaa event command to disable debugging output By default debugging for AAA events is disabled When debugging for AAA events is enabled information about AAA events is displayed for technicians to debug The system displays the following message when you terminate the connection SMay 6 16 37 05 2005 XE2000 SHELL 5 LOGOUT anchun logout from 192 168 80 30 This indicates the user anchun terminates the connection Related command display debugging Enable debugging for AAA events lt XE gt debugging aaa event 5 1 2 debugging aaa primitive Syntax debugging aaa primitive undo debugging aaa primitive 5 1 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 5 User Management Commands View User view Parameter None Description Use the debugging aaa primitive command to enable debugging for AAA primitives Use the undo debugging aaa primitive command to disable debugging for AAA primitives By default debugging for AAA primitives is disabled The debugging output is mainly used by technicians Related command display debugging Example Enable debugging for AAA primitive
298. s Parameter engineid Displays the SNMPv3 user information of the specified engine ID engineid string Character string of the engine ID username Displays the information of the specified SNMPv3 user user name User name in the range of 1 to 32 characters group Displays the user information belonging to the related SNMP group group name Group name in the range of 1 to 32 characters Description Example Use the display snmp agent usm user command to display the information of SNMP users An SNMP user is the remote user who executes SNMP management operation Use the snmp agent usm user command to specify the SNMP user Display information about all the current users lt XE gt display snmp agent usm user User name authuser Group name group0l Engine ID 800007DB7F00000100000026 Storage type nonVolatile UserStatus active A Caution When the SNMP agent is disabled Snmp Agent disabled is displayed for all the above display commands 6 1 9 snmp agent Syntax View snmp agent undo snmp agent System view Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 6 SNMP Configuration Commands Parameter None Description Example Use the snmp agent command to enable the SNMP agent and specify the SNMP configuration information Use the undo snmp agent command to disable SNMP agent By default the SNMP agent is disabled Use the snmp agent command to enable SNMP agent a
299. s Parameter configuration Displays the configuration information about the CPU usage statistics including the enable disable state the statistical cycle and the alarm threshold of the CPU usage statistics number Number of the statistic entities to be displayed offset Offset from the first entity to the last entity to be displayed verbose Displays detail information from device Displays the information saved in a peripheral storage device flash hard disk and so on This option is not supported at present Description Example Use the display cpu usage command to display the statistics about the CPU usage The display cpu usage for user command without any option is equivalent to display cpu usage for user 1 0 verbose It displays the last statistic entry of CPU usage in detail Display detailed CPU usage statistics XE display cpu usage for user Current CPU usage info CPU Usage Stat Cycle 37 Second oe CPU Usage 4 CPU Usage Stat Time 2005 04 11 13 39 45 CPU Usage Stat Tick Ox0 CPU Tick High Oxf4bbad99 CPU Tick Low Actual Stat Cycle OxO CPU Tick High 0x37bab97d CPU Tick Low 1 1 10 display current configuration Syntax View Parameter display current configuration interface interface type interface number configuration Is system user interface Any view interface Displays the configuration of the interface interface type Type of interface
300. s all call lists Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 11 Third Party Call Termination Configuration Commands Description Example Use the display location server call list command to display specified users or all call lists Display all call list XE ls display location server call list all Ccb index caller callee Start 13 1002 1001 11 09 17 Table 11 1 Description on the fields ofthe display location server call list command Field Description Ccb index Call index caller The caller number callee The called number Start Start time of the call Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 12 ONLY Service Configuration Commands Chapter 12 ONLY Service Configuration Commands 12 1 ONLY Service Configuration Commands 12 1 1 only Syntax only subscriber id undo only subscriber id all View LS view Parameter subscriber id User ID which consists of up to 31 characters which can be digits from 0 to 9 letters A B C and D and signs and all Removes all only user IDs Description Use the only command to enter the only service view corresponding to the user if you specify an existing user ID for a nonexistent user ID the system first create the user ID and then enters the corresponding only service view Use the undo only command to remove specified or all only user IDs Example Create user 800123456 and enter the corr
301. s an LS that resides on a different device 1 11 Command Manual Process Server Configuraiton H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Process Server p address Specifies the IP address of the remote LS It defaults to 0 0 0 0 port Port number of the remote LS It defaults to 13579 Description Use the Is mode command to configure an LS table entry for the PS The LS table can contain up to five entries with at most one local LS LS IDs must be non identical Use the undo Is mode command to delete a specified entry or all entries from the LS table Example Assign the remote LS at 10 1 5 6 to the PS Adopt the default port number and specify the LS priority as 1 XE ps ls mode 1 remote 10 1 5 6 Note If this is not the first time that you specify a remote LS the port number that you configured last time for the LS instead of the default port number applies 1 1 12 policy call interrupt by long time Syntax policy call interrupt by long time enable disable undo policy call interrupt by long time View PS view Parameter Enable Enables a long time call interruption function Disable Disables a long time call interruption function Description Use the policy call interrupt by long time command to enable or disable the long time call interruption function Use the undo policy call interrupt by long time command to restore the default By default the long time call interruption function is disabled 1 12
302. s an integer which is the port number of the destination host You do not need to change this argument q Sets the number of the query packets nqueries is an integer which is the number of the query packets sent every time This number is greater than 0 w Sets the timeout time timeoutis an integer which represents the timeout time of the IP packet in seconds The timeout time is greater than 0 host IP address of the destination host Description Use the tracert command to test the gateways through which the packet travels from the sender host to destination It is used to check the network connectivity and locate the network faults The default settings of the above parameter are a is not selected first_TTLis 1 max_TTL is 30 portis 33434 nqueries is 3 timeout is 5 seconds The following is how a tracert operates ech Tracert sends a packet with TTL value of 1 The fist hop sends back an ICMP TTL Expired message Tracert resends the packet with TTL value of 2 The second hop sends back an ICMP TTL Expired message when the packet arrives RO MN This process continues till the packet reaches its destination The route is determined by examining the ICMP Time Exceeded messages sent back by intermediate routers 3 6 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 3 System Maintenance and Management Commands After you have executed the ping command to learn that there
303. s for the static route number You can configure up to two substitute rules for a static route number each serving the purpose of calling number substitution called number substitution or both Configure two rules for the static route number 8803 XE2000 1s gw gw01 8803 prefix rule 0 callee 63 ias before XE2000 1s gw gw01 8803 prefix rule 1 caller 88 FL tts eases calles ess oia after Command Manual Feature H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Number Substitution 1 1 13 rule LS GW view Syntax rule rule tag caller input format output format callee input format output format callee input format output format before after undo rule rule tag all View LS GW view Parameter rule tag Substitute rule tag in the range of 0 to 7 caller Sets input output calling number pattern callee Set input output called number pattern input format Input number pattern consisting of characters A I 0 9ABCD The number should be within 31 digits in length output format Output number pattern consisting of characters A I 1 0 9IABCD H 15 1 The number should be within 31 digits in length before Performs number substitution before number analysis after Performs number substitution after number analysis all Deletes all substitute rules Description Use the rule command to configure a substitute rule for the gateway Use the undo rule command to delete the specifi
304. s number Use the undo prefix command to delete one or all of the static route numbers of an office group Example Configure the static route number 8803 for office group 0g01 XE2000 1s og 0g01 prefix 8803 XE2000 1s og o0g01 8803 1 1 46 priority LS GW view Syntax priority level undo priority View LS GW view Command Manual Location Server Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Location Server Commands Parameter level Priority of a gateway which ranges from 0 to 1000 and defaults to 10 The larger the value the higher the priority Description Use the priority command to set the priority of a gateway registered with the LS Use the undo priority command to restore the default priority The default priority is 10 Example Set the priority of the gateway gw001 to 11 XE 1s gw gw001 priority 11 1 1 47 priority LS OFFICEGROUP OFFICE view Syntax priority priority level undo priority View LS OFFICEGROUP OFFICE view Parameter level Priority of an office device which ranges from 0 to 1000 and defaults to 10 The larger the value the higher the priority Description Use the priority command to set the priority of an office device configured on the LS Use the undo priority command to restore the default priority The default priority is 10 Example Set the priority of the office device of1 to 11 XE 1s og 0g01 of1 priority 11 1 1 48 priority prefix view Syntax priority
305. s the office device to H 323 gateway sip Sets the office device to SIP grade device Description Use the device type command to specify the device type of an office device Use the undo device type command to restore the default office device type 1 13 Command Manual Location Server Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Location Server Commands The type of an office device defaults to SIP grade device Example Set the office device of1 to H 323 gateway XE 1s og 0g01 of1 device type h323 gw 1 1 17 display debugging location server Syntax display debugging location server View Any view Parameter None Description Use the display debugging location server command to display the debugging level of the LS Example Display the debugging level of the LS lt XE gt display debugging location server CALL debugging level 3 REGISTER debugging level 3 HEARTBEAT debugging level 3 1 1 18 display location server domain Syntax display location server domain domain id all View Any view Parameter domain id ID of the domain whose information is to be displayed All Displays information about all domains 1 14 Command Manual Location Server Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Location Server Commands Description Example Use the display location server domain command to display the information about one domain or all domains on an LS Display information about
306. scriptio Example arp static p address mac address undo arp p address System view jjp address IP address of the ARP mapping entry in dotted decimal notation mac address Ethernet MAC address of ARP mapping entry lts format is H H H where H is a hexadecimal number in the range of 1 digit to 4 digits n Use the arp static command to configure the ARP mapping table Use the undo arp command to delete the mapping entry corresponding to an address in the ARP mapping table By default the ARP mapping table of the system is empty and the address mapping can be obtained through dynamic ARP Normally ARP mapping table is maintained by dynamic ARP protocol and manual configuration is needed in some special cases Besides ARP mapping table is used for LAN only Related command reset arp display arp Configure the Ethernet MAC address corresponding to the IP address 129 102 0 1 to e0 fc01 0 XE arp static 129 102 0 1 e0 fc01 0 Configure the Ethernet MAC address corresponding to the IP address 11 0 0 1 to aa fcc 12 XE arp static 11 0 0 1 aa fcc 12 2 1 Command Manual IP Performance and Application H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX 2 1 2 debugging arp packet Syntax debugging arp packet undo debugging arp packet View User view Parameter None Description Chapter 2 IP Application Configuration Commands Use the debugging arp packet command to enable ARP packets debugging Use the undo debugg
307. scription Redirect Redirect messages Notify Notify messages H245 Info H245Info messages Bearlnfo Bearlnfo messages Inter Check Inter Check messages Pre Setup Pre Setup messages Pre Ack Pre Ack messages BW Request BW Request messages BW Response BW Response messages Invalid Q931 Invalid Q 931 messages total Total number of messages rcv Number of received messages send Number of sent messages err Number of errors dupr Number of received message duplicates dups Number of resent messages disc Number of discarded messages 1 1 6 gatekeeper Syntax gatekeeper View PS view Parameter None Description Use the gatekeeper command to enter PS GK view Example Enter PS GK view XE ps gatekeeper Command Manual Process Server Configuraiton H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Process Server XE ps gk 1 1 7 gk config Syntax gk config rasport q931port 2nd port port number undo gk config rasport q931port 2nd port View PS GK view Parameter rasport Specifies the RAS port on the gatekeeper q931port Specifies the Q931 port on the gatekeeper 2nd port Specifies the backup RAS port on the gatekeeper The backup RAS port is used to assist the RAS port for RAS signaling transmission and receiving port number Port number The default RAS port is 1719 The default Q931 port is 1720 Description Use the gk config command to configure the port used by the
308. separated by The match is considered successful as long as the received content contains one of these character strings By default the timer times out five seconds later after waiting for a receive string You can insert the TIMEOUT seconds anywhere in a script to adjust the timeout time waiting for receive string which is valid till a new TIMEOUT is set in the same script For detailed description seeTable 7 1 7 7 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 7 Modem Management Configuration Commands Table 7 1 Script keywords Keyword Description ABORT sent from the Modem or remote DTE device in exact receive string The string following ABORT will be compared with the strings matching mode One script can includes multiple ABORT settings and all of them take effect in the whole script execution process TIMEOUT seconds expected string is received within this time the execution of The digit following TIMEOUT is used to set the timeout time that allows the system to wait for a receive string If no the script fails Once set the settings will be valid till a new TIMEOUT is configured All the strings and keywords in a script are case sensitive Between strings or keywords you should use spaces as separators So a space contained in a string must be enclosed in a pair of double quotation marks A pair of empty quotation marks that is has two meanings Be
309. server Syntax display location server process server all device id list View Any view Parameter all Display information of all PSs registered with the LS device id The identifier of the PS to be displayed list Lists the identifiers and IP addresses of the PSs Description Use the display location server process server command to display information about the PSs registered with the LS Example Display information about the PS ps0 1 19 Command Manual Location Server Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Location Server Commands XE display location server process server ps0 AS Process Server Information Identifier RelativeCapability Attached SubsLineNumber ps0 1 4 Eege Static Information SIP port RAS port 5060 1719 Process Server Group Identifier Attached Domain Identifier Tunnel function HeartBeat Key Transport default domain Disable XEngine auto iS Dynamic Information Ip address Status Attaching Gateway List 172 31 3 24 Authorized Table 1 3 Description on the fields of the display location server process server command Field Description Identifier Identifier of the PS RelativeCapability Relative capability of the PS Attached SubsLineNumber Number of the subscriber line the PS supports SIP port SIP port of the PS RAS port RAS port of the PSs Process Server Gro
310. ss 300 1 1 21 tcp timer fin timeout Syntax tcp timer fin timeout time value undo tcp timer fin timeout View System view Parameter time value The value of TCP finwait timer in seconds in the range from 76 to 3600 Description Use the tcp timer fin timeout command to set the TCP finwait timer Use the undo tcp timer fin timeout command to restore the TCP finwait timer to its default value By default the TCP finwait timer is set to 675 seconds When the TCP connection status changes from FIN_WAIT_1 to FIN_WAIT_2 the finwait timer is started If no FIN packet is received before finwait timer times out the TCP connection will be terminated It is recommended that you configure this parameter under the guidance of technicians Related command tcp timer syn timeout tcp window Example Set the value of the Tcp finwait timer to 600 XE tcp timer fin timeout 600 1 1 22 tcp timer syn timeout Syntax tcp timer syn timeout time value undo tcp timer syn timeout View System view Parameter time value The value of the TCP synwait timer in seconds in the range from 2 to 600 1 19 Command Manual IP Performance and Application H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 IP Performance Configuration Commands Description Example Use the tcp timer syn timeout command to set the TCP synwait timer Use the undo tcp timer syn timeout command to restore the TCP synwait timer to its default value By default the TCP synwait ti
311. ssword LS PS view Syntax heartbeat password password undo heartbeat password View LS PS view Parameter password Heartbeat password that consists of 1 to 16 characters and is case sensitive Description Use the heartbeat password command to set the heartbeat password for a PS registered with the LS Use the undo heartbeat password command to restore the default password By default the password is XEngine Example Set the heartbeat password for the PS ps0 to pass1 XE 1s ps ps0 heartbeat password passl 1 26 Command Manual Location Server Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Location Server Commands 1 1 27 heartbeat time range Syntax heartbeat time range time undo heartbeat time range View LS view Parameter time Allowed time difference between the LS and the PS MS in the range of 0 to 36000 seconds Description Use the heartbeat time range command to set the allowed time difference between the LS and the PS MS Use the undo heartbeat time range command to restore the default value By default this value is O indicating the time difference is not limited Example Set the allowed time difference between the LS and the PS MS to 3600 seconds XE 1s heartbeat time range 3600 1 1 28 ip address LS GW view Syntax ip address p address undo ip address View LS GW view Parameter jjp address P address Description Use the ip address command to set the IP address of a gateway regis
312. t call limit group Name of the call limit group for the called which is case sensitive and consists of 16 characters at most Description Use the forbid command to define the call limit relationship between groups Use the undo forbid command to remove the call limit relationship between groups The forbid src call limit group call dst call limit group command defines a call limit entry that mean the src call limit group cannot call the dst call limit group The undo forbid src call limit group call dst call limit group command removes the call limit entry that means the src call limit group cannot call the dst call limit group The forbid all call dst call limit group command defines multiple call limit entries that mean all normal groups except the normal table group cannot call the dst call limit group The undo forbid all call dst call limit group command removes multiple call limit entries that mean all normal groups cannot call the dst call limit group The forbid src call limit group call all command defines multiple call limit entries that mean the src call limit group cannot call all normal groups except the normal table group The undo forbid src call limit group call all command removes multiple call limit entries that mean the src call limit group cannot call all normal groups The forbid all call all command defines multiple call limit entries that mean users in normal groups except the normal table group cannot call each ot
313. t tcp statistics command to clear TCP traffic statistics The system displays nothing upon executing the command Related command display tcp statistics Example Clear TCP traffic statistics lt XE gt reset tcp statistics 1 17 Command Manual IP Performance and Application H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 IP Performance Configuration Commands 1 1 19 reset udp statistics Syntax reset udp statistics View User view Parameter None Description Use the reset udp statistics command to clear UDP traffic statistics The system displays nothing upon executing the command Example Clear UDP traffic statistics lt XE gt reset udp statistics 1 1 20 tcp mss Syntax tcp mss value undo tcp mss View Interface view Parameter value The maximum size of a TCP packet fragment in the range from 128 to 2048 Description Use the tcp mss command to configure TCP packet fragmentation Use the undo tcp mss to remove TCP packet fragmentation Because the default MTU size is 1500 bytes the sum of the encrypted packet header overhead of link layer IP header and the TCP packet should be less than 1500 bytes so it is ideal to set the TCP packet fragment to 1200 By default TCP packets are not fragmented Example Set the maximum size of a TCP packet fragment to 300 1 18 Command Manual IP Performance and Application H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 IP Performance Configuration Commands XE Ethernet1 0 tcp m
314. tatistics about the SIP SM module stack Displays statistics about the SIP protocol stack tucl Displays statistics about the TUCL module Command Manual Process Server Configuraiton H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Process Server Description Example Use the display process server statistics command to display statistics about the gatekeeper or process server such as SIP and H 323 messages sent and received messages exchanged between internal modules and timer messages Display statistics about the SM module lt XE gt display process server statistics sm SAI Message Statistics of SM SAI Message total rcv send err dupr dups disc RINGING ve EDIRECT OK ve EGISTER INVITE ACK Bye CANCEL INFO PRACK Or O TOTO e En EN 0 o gt O 0 CR lt gt A gt E gt E gt DE Es EN 0 E SH gt Ka e DD AA O A OA DD A O INVALID SAI Q931 Message Statistics of SM Q931 Message total rcv send err dupr dups disc Setup 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Setup Ack 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Callproceeding 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Progress 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Alerting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Connect 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Connect Ack 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Release 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Release Complete 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Information 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Facility 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Status 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Redirect 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Notify 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 H245Info 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 BearInfo 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Inter Check 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o Command Manual Process Serv
315. tem Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 3 System Maintenance and Management Commands Table 3 1 Channel names and their associated channel numbers Channel name Channel number channel6 channel7 channels channel9 console logbuffer N AJO oO N o loghost monitor 1 snmpagent 5 trapbuffer 3 Description Use the display channel command to display channel information All the channel settings are displayed when you execute the display channel command without any parameter Example Display the information of channel 0 lt XE gt display channel 0 channel number 0 channel name console MODU_ID NAME ENABLE LOG LEVEL ENABLE TRAP LEVEL ENABLE DEBUG LEVEL fff f0000 all Y warning Y debugging Y debugging 3 2 2 display info center Syntax display info center View Any view Parameter None 3 8 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 3 System Maintenance and Management Commands Description Example Use the display info center command to display the information recorded in the information center Related command info center enable info center loghost info center logbuffer info center trapbuffer info center console channel info center monitor channel Display the information recorded in the information center lt XE gt display info center Information Center enabled Log host Console ch
316. tered with the LS Use the undo ip address command to restore the default IP address By default the IP address is 0 0 0 0 1 27 Command Manual Location Server Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Location Server Commands Example Set the IP address of the gateway gw001 to 192 168 1 33 XE 1s og 0g01 of1 ip address 192 168 1 33 1 1 29 ip address LS OFFICEGROUP OFFICE view Syntax ip address p address undo ip address View LS OFFICEGROUP OFFICE view Parameter jjp address P address Description Use the ip address command to set the IP address of an office device Use the undo ip address command to restore the default IP address By default the IP address is 0 0 0 0 Example Set the IP address of the office device of1 to 192 168 1 33 XE 1s office of1 ip address 192 168 1 33 1 1 30 Is config Syntax Is config interface interface type slot number port port undo Is config View LS view Parameter interface Specifies the interface interface type Interface type slot number Interface number port Specifies the port number which ranges from 1 to 65535 1 28 Command Manual Location Server Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Location Server Commands Description Use the Is config command to specify the interface and port number of the LS Use the undo Is config command to restore the default interface and port number By default the port number is 13579 t
317. ters Description Use the heartbeat password command to configure the heartbeat password between the MS and LS Use the undo heartbeat password command to restore the default heartbeat password By default the heartbeat password is XEngine Example Set the heartbeat password between the MS and LS to xe2000 XE ms heartbeat password xe2000 1 1 4 language Syntax language chinese english undo language View MS view Parameter chinese Specifies Chinese as the language to be used on the MS english Specifies English as the language to be used on the MS Description Use the language command to configure the current language type to be used on the MS Command Manual Media Server H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 MS Configuration Commands Use the undo language command to remove the current language type used by the MS By default no language type is configured for the MS Example Configure the MS to use English XE ms language english 1 1 5 Is mode Syntax Is mode local remote ip address p address port port View MS view Parameter local Uses a local LS remote Uses a remote LS jjp address P address of the remote LS port Port number of the remote LS The default value is 13579 Description Use the Is mode command to specify the LS for the MS The default setting is local namely the local LS Example Specify a remote LS for the MS The IP address of the remote
318. ters in length add Positive offset to universal time coordinated UTC equivalent to mean solar time at the prime meridian 0 longitude time minus Negative offset to UTC time HH MM SS Time in hours minutes and seconds Description Example Use the clock timezone command to set the local time zone Use the undo clock timezone command to restore the default UTC time zone After the setting takes effect you can use the display clock command to view the information Times in log and debug information are the local time with daylight saving time and time zone adjustment Related command clock summer time Set the name of the local time zone to Z5 5 hours ahead of UTC time lt XE gt clock timezone z5 add 05 00 00 1 1 4 command alias Syntax command alias alias currentfirstcmdkey undo command alias alias View System view Parameter alias An alias within 64 characters set by the user It cannot be identical with the existing first keywords currentfirsicmdkey The complete name of a current first keyword to be substituted by the alias Description Use the command alias command to configure an alias for the specified command Use the undo command alias command to cancel the alias configuration Before configuring a command alias you need to enable the command alias function by the enable command alias command 1 3 Command Manual Basic Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Basic Configuratio
319. teway Description Use the area code substitute command to enable or disable the LS to perform location based number substitution before sending a number to the gateway By default the LS performs location based number substitution while sending a number to the gateway Example Disable the LS to perform location based number substitution while sending a number to gateway gw01 XE 1s gw gw01 area code substitute disable Command Manual Feature H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Number Substitution 1 1 4 area code substitute LS OFFICEGROUP view Syntax area code substitute enable disable View LS OFFICEGROUP view Parameter enable Enables the LS to perform location based number substitution before sending a number to the office devices in the office group disable Disables the LS to perform location based number substitution before sending a number to the office devices in the office group Description Use the area code substitute command to enable or disable the LS to perform location based number substitution before sending a number to the office devices in the office group By default the LS does not perform location based number substitution before sending a number to the office devices in the office group Example Enable the LS to perform location based number substitution while sending a number to office devices in office group og01 XE ls og og01 area code substitute enable 1 1 5 display location ser
320. the current view XE display this sysname XE 4 17 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 4 File Management Commands tcp window 8 return 4 2 5 reset saved configuration Syntax View Parameter reset saved configuration User view None Description Example Use reset saved configuration command to erase the saved configuration of XE IP PBX Be careful when executing this command lt is recommended to use this command under the guide of technical staff Generally the command is used under following cases e When a used XE IP PBX is applied in a new application environment e The old configuration files cannot fit the new environment Related command save display current configuration display saved configuration Erase the configuration of the XE IP PBX lt XE gt reset saved configuration This will erase the configuration in the device The VPN GW configurations will be erased to reconfigure Are you sure Y N y 4 2 6 save Syntax View save file name safely User view 4 18 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 4 File Management Commands Parameter file name File name The extension must be cfg safely lf safely is not used the system saves the configuration file quickly and is not allowed to reboot or power off in the duration otherwise the configuration will be lost If safely is used th
321. the files including the ones deleted flash Device name string The name of the file or directory to be displayed Description Use the dir command to display the information about the specified file or directory in the storage device of the XE IP PBX By default this command displays the file information under the current directory mn This command supports wildcard 4 7 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 4 File Management Commands Example Use the dir all command to display the information about all the files including the deleted files The names of the deleted files are denoted with for instance temp cfg Such deleted files can be restored by the undelete command Use the reset recycle bin command to delete the file from the recycle bin permanently Display the information about the file flash backup config cfg lt XE gt dir flash backup config cfg Directory of flash backup 0 rw 957 Mar 17 2005 16 15 40 config cfg 15621 KB total 1610 KB free 4 1 8 execute Syntax execute filename View System view Parameter filename Name of the batch file with a suffix of bat ranging from 1 to 256 Description Use the execute command to execute the specified batch file This command executes the command lines in the batch file one by one Invisible characters are not allowed otherwise the current batch process will be stopped The execution process of the
322. the srv switch cf caller command to enable or disable CFC service By default CFC service is enabled Example Enable CFC service XE 1s gw gw01 1 1001 srv switch cf caller on Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 10 Call Forwarding Configuration Commands 10 4 CFT Configuration Commands 10 4 1 cft subscriber number view Syntax cft View Subscriber number view Parameter None Description Use the cft command to enter call forwarding based on time range CFT service view Example Enter CFT service view XE 1s gw gw01 1 1001 cft XE 1s gw gw01 1 1001 cft 10 4 2 cft CFT service view Syntax cft start time stop time forward number undo cft start time all View CFT call forwarding based on time range service view Parameter start time Start time for call forwarding in the format of HH MM SS stop time End time for call forwarding in the format of HH MM SS forward number Target CFT number which consists of up to 31 characters Each character can be a digit 0 through 9 A B C D or all Removes all CFT items Description Use the cft command to configure CFT items including the start time the end time and the forwarding number Five time ranges can be added at most The start time must be earlier than the end time and the time range cannot cover the 00 00 10 6 Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 10 Call Forwarding Configuration Comman
323. time limit call service is enabled no time limit is specified for gateway users under the LS that is the default time limit configured with this command will be used Use the undo default limit call time command to restore the default value By default the time limit for calls is 1800 seconds Example Set the time limit for calls to 270 seconds XE ls default limit call time 270 13 1 2 limited call time Syntax limited call time imited time undo limited call time View Time limit call service view Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 13 Time Limit Call Configuration Commands Parameter limited time Time limit for calls ranging from 60 to 65535 seconds Description Use the limit call time command to set time limit for calls Use the undo limit call time command to restore the default time limit for calls which is defined by using the default limit call time command in LS view Example Set time limit for calls to 90 seconds XE 1s gw gw01 1 1001 1tc limited call time 90 13 1 3 limited time call Syntax limited time call View Subscriber number view Parameter None Description Use the limited time call command to enter time limit call service view Example Enter time limit call service view XE 1s gw gw01 1 1001 1imited time call XE 1s gw gw01 1 1001 1tc 13 1 4 srv switch limited time call Syntax srv switch limited time call on off View Subscriber number v
324. ting is not the number of subscriber lines that can be accommodated by the hardware of the gateway lt is rather a value specified considering the hardware performance of the gateway relative to other gateways This setting will take effect in the load sharing policy for your voice network The number of subscriber lines set using this command however can be the same as that accommodated by the hardware Example Set the number of subscriber lines that can be accommodated by gateway gw0 to 25 XE 1s gw gw0 subsline sum 25 2 6 Command Manual Feature H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 3 Overload Protection Chapter 3 Overload Protection 3 1 Overload Protection Configuration Commands 3 1 1 cpu Syntax View Parameter cpu value discard chance undo cpu value all Overload protection view value CPU overload protection threshold an integer in the range 10 to 95 When CPU load exceeds this value the system begins to drop messages chance Message drop probability an integer in the range 1 to 100 all Deletes all protection configuration entries Description Example Use the cpu command to create a protection configuration table entry mapping CPU overload protection threshold to message drop probability You can configure up to five entries Use the undo cpu command to delete the specified or all protection configuration entries By default no protection configuration entry is configured Configu
325. to be deleted must be empty 4 13 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 4 File Management Commands Example Delete the directory subdir lt XE gt rmdir subdir Rmdir subdir Y N y o Removed directory subdir 4 1 18 undelete Syntax undelete filename View User view Parameter filename Name of the file to be restored Description Uses the undelete command to restore deleted files If the name of the file to be restored is the same with that of an existing directory the execution fails If the name of the file is the same with that of an existing file a prompt will appear asking whether to overwrite the existing file Example Restores the deleted file sample bak lt XE gt undelete sample bak Undelete flash test sample bak Y N y Undeleted file flash test sample bak 4 2 Configuration File Management Commands 4 2 1 display current configuration Syntax View display current configuration interface jinterface type interface number configuration gui Is ps system user interface begin include exclude string Any view 4 14 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 4 File Management Commands Parameter interface Displays the configuration of the interface interface type Interface type interface number Interface number configuration Displays the specified configuration gui Displays the GUI
326. to the default storage device lt XE gt save now Now saving current configuration to the device Saving configuration flash config cfg Please wait Current configuration has been saved to the device successfully 4 2 8 startup saved configuration Syntax View Parameter Parameter startup saved configuration filename User view filename Name of the configuration file Use the startup saved configuration command to set the configuration file used for the next boot After the setting is complete the system will use the configuration file as the boot file for the next startup 4 20 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 4 File Management Commands Note Example The configuration file is named as follows config cfg Default name of the configuration file which is specified by the manufacturer but the contents of this file can be changed by the user There are three cases in which the system selects the configuration for startup e lf you have set to boot with skipping the configuration file the system starts with null configuration e f you have specified the start configuration file the system selects the specified file as the start configuration file if the file exists if the file does not exist the system starts with null configuration e f you have not specified the start configuration file the system searches for the config cfg file and selects this file as t
327. to unlock system and enter it Example Lock the current user interface where the user logs in through console port lt XE gt lock Password Again 1 1 21 quit Syntax quit View Any view Parameter None Description Use the quit command to exit from the current view to the previous view If you are in user view you can use this command to exit the system There are three view levels which are listed as follows from low to high e User view with user level 0 e System view with user level 3 e Configuration view such as interface view Related command return Example Return to system view and then to user view from Ethernet1 0 0 port view 1 18 Command Manual Basic Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX XE Ethernet0 0 quit XE quit lt XE gt 1 1 22 return Syntax return View Any view except for user view Parameter None Description Use the return command to return to user view Alternatively you can press lt Ctrl Z gt to return to user view Related command quit Example Return from system view to user view XE return lt XE gt 1 1 23 super Syntax super level View User view Parameter level User level in the range 0 to 3 Description Chapter 1 Basic Configuration Commands Use the super command to switch from the current user level to a specified level User levels refer to the categories of login users which fall into four levels Corresponding to the level of command
328. tor Service Configuration Commande 22 1 EE Tue Gelee EE 22 1 2212 OXTOMSION EE 22 1 EE e ue citada 22 2 Chapter 23 Group Notification Service ccccsecesseeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeneeeesesaeseseeeeneeeeseeeseseaesneeeeeees 23 1 23 1 Group Notification Service Configuration Commande 23 1 2 COMO A A io eii ae 23 1 23 1 2 display location server notify config oooomnccnnnnconnccnnccnnonacnnccnnncccnn cnn 23 2 23 1 3 display location server NOtify QrOUP 0cooooccconnnnconocinocccnnornnn nara crac anna 23 3 A E 23 4 23 1 5 group notify LS SRV view 23 4 23 1 6 group config group notify view 23 5 LIMA MN e la e pees reer re 23 6 23 Mu le ET 23 6 CNN ue ul os tdt otto od 23 7 23 11 10 Shi WN aii rs aa aia 23 7 A A AA 23 8 Chapter 24 Call Transfer Service oommnmmicncccionrracercerc er 24 1 24 1 Call Transfer Service Configuration Commandes seesseesseeseessieesnesreesriesrrrerressrresre 24 1 24 AWCSIVZSWITCN Clits eet EE 24 1 Chapter 25 Number Query Service ccseccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeseseeeeneeeeeseaesaseeeenseeeseeesennaesnseeeene 25 1 25 1 Number Query Service Configuration Commande sesssesseessesseesiesriesriesrieernssrese 25 1 25 1 1 srv switch QUery Self A 25 1 Chapter 26 Alarm Clock Service c scccseeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeescaeseseeeeneeeeseaeeeseaesaseeeenseeseseaesnseeeeeees 26 1 26 1 Alarm Clock Service Configuration COMMANAS oocnccccinccconccononanononananoccnnnc cnn narran c
329. trap buffer sends information channel number Channel number from 0 to 9 which means the system can have 10 channels channel name Channel name size Size of the trap buffer buffersize Size of the trap buffer the number of information entries that can be stored Description Use the info center trapbuffer command to enable the trap buffer and set the channel number through which trap information in output and specify the size of the trap buffer Use the undo info center trapbuffer command to remove the current configuration By default it is allowed to send information to trap buffer and the size for trap buffer is 256 This command is effective only after the information center function is enabled You can send information to trap buffer by specifying the size of the trap buffer Related command info center enable display info center display info center trapbuffer Example Enable the XE IP PBX to send information to trap buffer and set the size of trap buffer to 30 XE info center trapbuffer size 30 3 21 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 3 System Maintenance and Management Commands 3 2 17 reset logbuffer Syntax reset logbuffer View User view Parameter None Description Use the reset logbuffer command to clear the information in log buffer Example Clear the information in log buffer lt XE gt reset logbuffer 3 2 18 reset trapbuffer Syntax reset trapbuffer View User vi
330. ttings of CMD module in SNMP channel XE undo info center source cmd channel snmp 3 2 15 info center timestamp Syntax View Parameter info center timestamp trap debugging log boot date none undo info center timestamp trap debugging log System view trap Trap information debugging Debugging information log Log information boot Post booting time that the system experiences It is in the format of XXXXXX yyyyyy with xxxxxx being the high order 32 bits and yyyyyy the low order 32 bits of the passed milliseconds date Current system date and time in the format of yyyy mm dd hh mm ss in Chinese and mm dd yyyy hh mm ss in English none No timestamp format Description Use the info center timestamp command to set the timestamp format of the output debugging trap log information Use the undo info center timestamp command to remove the current configuration Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 3 System Maintenance and Management Commands Example By default the date timestamp is used in all types of information Set the timestamp of trap information to boot XE info center timestamp trap boot 3 2 16 info center trapbuffer Syntax info center trapbuffer channel channel number channel name size buffersize undo info center trapbuffer channel size View System view Parameter channel S Specifies the channel through which the
331. tual user interface types however depend on the interfaces provided by the XE IP PBX The following example is specific for the case in which there are one console port user interface one AUX port user interface and two VTY user interfaces XE user interface 0 3 XE ui0 3 1 2 Telnet Terminal Service Configuration Commands 1 2 1 debugging telnet Syntax debugging telnet undo debugging telnet View User view Parameter None Description Use the debugging telnet command to enable Telnet connection debugging Use the undo debugging telnet command to disable Telnet connection debugging By default Telnet connection debugging is disabled Related command telnet Example Enable Telnet connection debugging lt XE gt debugging telnet 1 2 2 display tcp status Syntax display tcp status View Any view 1 18 Command Manual System Management Chapter 1 Terminal Service and User Interface H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Configuration Commands Parameter None Description Use the display tcp status command to view information on all current TCP connections Compared with the display users command the display tcp status command can display more information about Telnet clients and servers The information that this command can provide includes local address local port number external address external port number and connection status Related command telnet Example Display information on TCP connections lt X
332. two sides Related command speed display interface 2 2 Command Manual Basic Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 2 Ethernet Interface Configuration Commands Example Set the FE interface to operate in full duplex mode XE Ethernet0 0 duplex full 2 1 3 interface Syntax interface type number undo interface type number View System view Parameter type Interface type number Interface number The XE IP PBX numbers interfaces by type The interfaces of each type are numbered beginning with 0 or 1 Description Use the interface command to enter the desired interface view or create a logical interface or sub interface Use the undo interface command to delete the specified logical interface or sub interface Table 2 1 Comware supported interface types Interface type Description Interface attributes AUX Backup interface Physical interface Gigabit Ethernet interface GigabitEthernet provided only by XE 2000 Physical interface IP PBX Fast Ethernet interface Ethernet provided only by XE 200 Physical interface IP PBX Loopback Loopback interface Logical interface NULL Null interface Logical interface On the XE IP PBX an interface is represented by interface type interface number for example Ethernet 0 0 For your convenience you can abbreviate interface type to the minimum number of letters that define a unique abbreviation for example Ethernet 0 0 to e0 0
333. ty mode of v2c in use v3 Security mode of v3 in use user name User name in the range of 1 to 32 characters group name Group name the user corresponds to in the range of 1 to 32 characters authentication mode Specifies to use authentication for the security level md5 Specifies the authentication protocol as HMAC MD5 96 sha Specifies the authentication protocol as HMAC SHA 96 auth password Authentication password which is a character string in the range of 1 to 64 characters privacy Specifies the security level as encrypted des56 Specifies the encryption protocol as DES priv password Encryption password which is a character string in the range of 1 to 64 characters local Indicates the local entity user engineid Specifies the engine ID associated with the user engineid string Character string of engine ID Description Example Use the snmp agent usm user command to add a new user to an SNMP group Use the undo snmp agent usm user command to delete an SNMP group user When you configure a remote user for a certain agent the engine ID is needed for authentication If the engine ID changes after you configure the user the user corresponding to the former engine ID will be ineffective For SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c this command adds a new community name For SNMPv3 it adds a new user to an SNMP group Related command snmp agent group snmp agent community snmp agent local engineid Add a user John
334. ugging option Description Example Use the debug command to enable the debugging Use the undo debug command to disable the debugging XE IP PBX provides abundant debugging functions for troubleshooting It is recommended not to use the debugging all command because large amount of debugging information reduces the system efficiency or even causes collapse of the system when you use this command However the undo debugging all command offers you great convenience for disabling all the debugging at one time Related command display debugging Enable the debugging for IP Packet information lt XE gt debugging ip packet IP packet debugging switch is on 3 1 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 3 System Maintenance and Management Commands 3 1 2 display debugging Syntax display debugging interface interface type interface number module name View Any view Parameter module name Module name interface type Interface type interface number Interface number Description Use the display debugging command to display the debugging that is already enabled By default this command has no parameter and enables the debugging for all information Related command debugging Example Display all enabled debugging lt XE gt display debugging IP packet debugging switch is on 3 1 3 display diagnostic information Syntax display diagnostic information View Any view Paramete
335. ults to normal Example Set the device state of the gateway gw001 to forever up and specify this gateway belong to the PS named default ps XE 1s gw gw001 device status forever up attachedps default ps 1 1 14 device status LS OFFICEGROUP OFFICE view Syntax device status forever normal View LS OFFICEGROUP OFFICE view Parameter forever Sets the device status to forever up normal Sets the device status to normal Description Use the device status command to set the status of an office device By default the status of an office device is forever Example Set the device status to normal XE 1s og 0g01 of1 device status normal 1 12 Command Manual Location Server Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Location Server Commands 1 1 15 device type LS GW view Syntax device type h323 sip undo device type View LS GW view Parameter h323 Sets the gateway type to H 323 sip Sets the gateway type to SIP Description Use the device type command to specify the gateway type Use the undo device type command to restore the default gateway type The type of a registered gateway defaults to SIP Example Set the gateway type to H 323 XE 1s gw gw001 device type h323 1 1 16 device type LS OFFICEGROUP OFFICE view Syntax device type h323 gk h323 gw sip undo device type View LS OFFICEGROUP OFFICE view Parameter h323 gk Sets the office device to H 323 gatekeeper h323 gw Set
336. umbers Example Add target CFO number 8899 XE 1s gw gw01 1 1001 cfo cfo number 8899 10 5 3 srv switch cfo Syntax srv switch cfo on off View Subscriber number view Parameter on Enables CFO service off Disables CFO service Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 10 Call Forwarding Configuration Commands Description Use the srv switch cfo command to enable or disable CFO service By default CFO service is enabled Example Enable CFO service XE 1s gw gw01 1 1001 srv switch cfo on 10 6 CFB Configuration Commands 10 6 1 cfb Syntax cfb View Subscriber number view Parameter None Description Use the cfb command to enter call forwarding on busy CFB service view Example Enter CFB service view XE 1s gw gw01 1 1001 cfb XE 1s gw gw01 1 1001 cfb 10 6 2 cfb number Syntax cfb number forward number undo cfb number forward number all View CFB service view Parameter forward number Target CFB number which consists of up to 31 characters which can be digits from 0 to 9 letters A B C and D and signs and 10 9 Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 10 Call Forwarding Configuration Commands all Removes all target CFB numbers Description Use the cfb number command to add target CFB numbers Up to 2 target CFB numbers can be added Use the undo cfb number command to remove specified or all target CF
337. unchanged while if the type is h323 gw you should use the port command to set the port number to 1720 and if the type is h323 gk you should use the port command to set the port number to 1719 Example Set office device of1 using port 1720 XE ls og og01 of1 port 1720 1 1 44 prefix LS GW view Syntax prefix number undo prefix number all View LS GW view Parameter number Static route number consisting of 1 to 31 characters which can be numbers from 0 to 9 letters A B C D or signs and all Deletes all route numbers Description Use the prefix command to configure a static route number for a gateway registered with the LS and enter the view of this number Use the undo prefix command to delete one or all of the static route numbers of a gateway 1 37 Command Manual Location Server Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Location Server Commands Example Configure the static route number 8801 for the gateway gw01 XE 1s gw gw01 prefix 8801 XE 1s gw gw01 8801 1 1 45 prefix LS OFFICEGROUP view Syntax prefix number undo prefix number all View LS OFFICEGROUP view Parameter number Static route number consisting of 1 to 31 characters which can be numbers from 0 to 9 letters A B C D or signs and all Deletes all route numbers Description Use the prefix command to configure a static route number for an office device configured on the LS and enter the view of thi
338. unreachable route blackhole Indicates a blackhole route Command Manual Basic Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 3 Static Route Configuration Commands Description Example Use the ip route static command to configure static routes Use the undo ip route static to delete the static routes Two static routes to the same destination and with the same next hop but with different preferences are totally different The route with the smaller preference value higher preference level will be chosen as the current route Use the undo ip route static command to delete all the static routes to the same destination and with the same next hop Use the undo ip route static preference command to delete the static routes with specified preference By default the system obtains the sub net route direct to the voice server If no preference is specified when configuring static routes its default value is 60 If reject or blackhole is not specified it defaults to reachable routes Notes e Ifthe destination IP address and the mask are both 0 0 0 0 it is the default route If it fails to find a route from the routing table the packet will be forwarded via the default route e You may flexibly apply the routing management policy for preference privilege setting For instance when configuring a number of routes to the same destination address if the routes are of the same privilege load sharing can be performed if not route
339. up Identifier Group identifier of the PS Attached Domain Identifier The domain the PS belongs to Tunnel function Whether the tunnel function is enabled HeartBeat Key Heartbeat key of the PS and LS Transport Transport method of the PS Ip address IP address of the PS Status Status of the PS Attaching Gateway List List of gateways registered with a PS Display the identifier and IP address of the PS Command Manual Location Server Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Location Server Commands XE 1s display location server process server list Identifier IP address gkserver 192 168 80 50 13580 1 1 22 display location server statistics Syntax display location server statistics View Any view Parameter None Description Use the display location server statistics command to display statistics of the LS Example Display statistics of the LS lt XE gt display location server statistics CAI Message Statistics of LS CAI Message total rcv send err dupr dups disc Register Query Device Register Response Device Register Notify Confirm Register Notify Reject Register Notify Challenge Register Indication Device Status Register Notify BlankOut Register Indication Device Update Call Query Number Analysis Call Response Number Analysis Call Notify Ring Back Call Notify Redirect Call Notify Off Hook Call Notify Talk Call Notify Release
340. used of the XE IP PBX to 192 168 1 10 and specify port 10000 as the port through which the accounting request messages are received XE radius server 192 168 1 10 accounting port 10000 4 1 3 radius shared key Syntax radius shared key pwd undo radius shared key View System view Parameter pwd Shared access password of the RADIUS accounting server a character string consisting of 1 to 15 characters Description Use the radius shared key command to configure the on the XE IP PBX which must be the same as configured on the RADIUS accounting server Use the undo radius shared key command to delete the shared access password of the RADIUS accounting server Example Specify acc pwd as the shared access password of the RADIUS accounting server XE radius shared key acc pwd 4 1 4 radius source address Syntax radius source address p address 4 2 Command Manual Feature H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 4 VoIP RADIUS Accounting Configuration undo radius source address View System view Parameter p address The source IP address of all the RADIUS packets Description Use the radius source address command to specify a source IP address for the RADIUS packets transmitted from the XE IP PBX Use the undo radius source address command to disable specifying a source IP address for the RADIUS packets By default no IP address is specified for transmitting RADIUS packets If the same source IP address is speci
341. vel is 0 Description Use the debugging location server command to set the debugging level of LS Use the undo debugging location server command to restore the default setting The call keyword refers to information about calls the register keyword indicates information about registration the heartbeat keyword indicates information about heartbeat the all keyword indicates all debugging levels including call register and heartbeat All debugging options are disabled by default When set to 4 debugging of level 1 to 4 is enabled and 0 means to disable the debugging by which you can hide the debugging information About the levels Level 0 Disable the debugging Level 1 DEBUG_LEVEL_EMERGENCY Fail to allocate memory Fail to allocate timer Level 2 DEBUG_LEVEL_ALERT Null pointer invalid memory operation Switching information about the state of the connection between process server PS and LS Level 3 DEBUG_LEVEL_ERROR 1 10 Command Manual Location Server Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Location Server Commands Control block state incorrect not matched Invalid unexpected control block index Invalid unexpected PID Module ID Fail to return value the functions of the main function affected Invalid message type Level 4 DEBUG_LEVEL_WARNING Fail to return value but the functions of the main function not affected Message head received Abnormal timer timeout message State transition message Level 5
342. ver number substitute Syntax display location server number substitute table identifier all View Any view Parameter table identifier Name of substitute table all All substitute tables Description Use the display location server number substitute command to display details about the specified or all substitute tables 1 3 Command Manual Feature H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Number Substitution Example Display details about a substitute table named table1 XE ls display location server number substitute tablel 53 Substitute Table Information Table Name tablel Rule 0 callee 8801 9901 before Rule 1 callee 6601 7701 before XE 1s sst tablel 1 1 6 display location server substitute Syntax display location server substitute View Any view Parameter None Description Use the display location server substitute command to display the substitute tables bound to the LS globally Example Display the substitute tables bound to the LS globally XE 1s display location server substitute OR Global Bound Substitute Table tablel table2 table3 tables table5 rooml room2 XE ls 1 1 7 display subscriber Syntax display subscriber long number nation num region num Command Manual Feature H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Number Substitution View Any view Parameter long number Subscriber number of the number resource It should be within 31 b
343. will prompt you to input the correct confirmation The configuration is valid only after you enter Y or y If you executed the command before the new configuration overwrites the previous one Moreover if you configure the clock command after you have configured the schedule reboot at command the previous parameters of schedule reboot at are invalidated Related command reboot schedule reboot delay undo schedule reboot display schedule reboot Configure the XE IP PBX to reboot at 22 00 on the day when you perform the setting the current time is 15 50 lt XE gt schedule reboot at 22 00 Reboot scheduled for 22 00 00 UTC 2002 11 18 in 6 hours and 10 minutes Proceed with reboot Y N y Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 3 System Maintenance and Management Commands 3 2 20 schedule reboot delay Syntax schedule reboot delay hhh mm mmm undo schedule reboot View User view Parameter hhh mm Time waiting for the XE IP PBX to reboot in the format of Ahh mm hhh ranges from O to 720 and mm ranges from 0 to 59 mmm Time waiting for the XE IP PBX to reboot in the format of absolute value of minutes in the range of 0 to 43200 Description Use the schedule reboot delay command to schedule the reboot of the XE IP PBX and set the waiting delay Use the undo schedule reboot command to disable the function You can set the waiting delay of reboot for the XE IP PBX in two format hhh mm and a
344. y Commande 1 11 1 1 13 display Save Gonfiguraton coran 1 11 US E Ree TEE 1 12 age EE Ae BEE 1 13 1 1 16 enable COMMand allaS 00 2 eect ee eete cece eeeee tees aeeeeaee sense eeaeeesaaeseeaeeseeeeeteaeeeteneeseaes 1 13 E Deg e EE AR 1 14 TATA NOIKG Yi titel ee aie EA Ale Aa ee eee eet ar EEA 1 15 1 1 49 language Mode iiiaae da nite dad la dd 1 17 MELO a o dt ee dee 1 17 ALL II 1 18 A Ti EE 1 19 AA te eae ie ia dal a An aan 1 19 Eelere WEE 1 20 LALA A e a atte 1 21 ALO STO MV A AAA a aa 1 22 Chapter 2 Ethernet Interface Configuration COMMANAS ommomocncnncncnonnnnnnnnnncn carencia 2 1 2 1 1 display interface eihermet nac na no cnn nn nana nr 2 1 E O TE E idee ie TE ENE TS 2 2 E IMC MACE ivi cy side ea nivel de ye ee tela nian aii 2 3 Zl p ele 2 4 2 1 5 loopback Ethernet Gigabitethernet Interface 2 5 2 1 6 mtu Ethernet Gigabitethernet Interface 2 6 CA ele 2 6 A DEE 2 7 Command Manual Basic Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Table of Contents Chapter 3 Static Route Configuration Commands a 3 1 3 1 1 delete static routes all o oocoonncnnnonicccononccccnnoncccnnnnnnccnnnnnecn nn nnnec cnn crac cnn 3 1 3 1 2 display ip routing table seriei eiri o aE ei E EAEE TENNE A RA 3 1 35123 A a TT 3 2 Command Manual Basic Configuration H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 1 Basic Configuration Commands Chapter 1 Basic Configuration Commands 1 1 1 clock datetime Syntax clock datetime HH MM SS YYYY MM DD View
345. y ip routing table command to view the currently used routing that is the best route Display the summary of the current routing table lt XE gt display ip routing table Routing Table public net Destination Mask Protocol Pre Cost Nexthop Interface 127 0 0 0 8 DIRECT 0 0 127 0 0 1 InLoopBack0 12 70 061 32 DIRECT 1270505 1 InLoopBack0 192 168 80 40 Ethernet0 0 0 192 168 80 0 24 DIRECT 0 0 O Us 192 168 80 40 32 DIRECT 127 0 0 1 InLoopBack0 3 1 3 ip route static Syntax View Parameter ip route static p address mask mask length interface name nexthop address preference preference value reject blackhole undo ip route static p address mask mask length interface name nexthop address preference preference value reject blackhole System view jp address Destination IP address in dotted decimal notation mask Mask mask length Mask length The 1s in the 32 bit mask must be consecutive therefore the mask in dotted decimal notation can be replaced by mask length which is the number of the consecutive 1s in the mask interface name Specifies the outgoing interface name of the static route You may specify the public network interface as the outgoing interface nexthop address Specifies the next hop IP address in dotted decimal notation of the static route preference value Preference level of the static route ranging from 1 to 255 reject Indicates an
346. yGroup 8801 8802 8803 The result shows notifyGroup has three members namely 8801 8802 and 8803 23 1 4 format Syntax format format undo format View Notify config view Parameter format Format of the media file used for the group notification The value range is G711a G711u G7231 G729 Description Use the format command to specify format of the media file used for the group notification Use the undo format command to restore the format of the media file used for the group notification to the default By default G711u is adopted Example Specify that the group notification notify1 uses a file of the G711a format XE ls srv gn nc notifyl format G lla 23 1 5 group notify LS SRV view Syntax group notify View LS SRV view Command Manual Call Services H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 23 Group Notification Service Parameter None Description Use the group notify command to enter group notify view Example Enter group notify view XE 1s srv group notify AE Ls srv on 23 1 6 group config group notify view Syntax group config group id undo group config group id all View Group notify view Parameter group id ID of the notification group to be created configured all Deletes all notification groups Description Use the group config command to enter group config view or create the notification group and enter its group config view if the specified ID does not exist
347. ystem can have 10 channels channel name Channel name size Specifies the size of the log buffer buffersize Size of the log buffer the number of information entries to be stored Description Use the info center logbuffer command to enable the log buffer set the channel number through which log information in output and specify the size of the log buffer 3 14 Command Manual System Management H3C XE 200 2000 IP PBX Chapter 3 System Maintenance and Management Commands Example Use the undo info center logbuffer command to remove the current configuration By default information is sent to log buffer and the size of the log buffer is 512 This command is effective only after the information center function is enabled You can enable the information to be output to a channel by specifying the channel number in log buffer Related command info center enable display info center display info center logbuffer Enable the XE IP PBX to send information to log buffer and set the size of the log buffer to 50 XE info center logbuffer size 50 3 2 10 info center loghost Syntax View Parameter info center loghost X X X X channel channel number channel name facility local number language chinese english undo info center loghost X X X X System view X X X X IP address of the log host channel Information channel of the log host channel number Channel number from 0 to 9 which m

Chapter 1 Basic Configuration Commands

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents